SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING

(AUTONOMOUS)
Karakambadi Road Tirupati-517 507

Department of Electronics & Communication Engineering

Course Structure
R 20 Regulations

1|P ag e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
Karakambadi Road, TIRUPATI – 517507

Electronics and Communication Engineering

Semester-0
Induction Program
(Common for all branches)

S.No Course Name Category L-T-P-C

Physical Activities - Sports, Yoga and Meditation,

1 MC 0-0-6-0
Plantation

2 Career Counseling MC 2-0-2-0

3 Orientation to all branches - career options, tools, etc. MC 3-0-0-0

Orientation on admitted Branch - corresponding labs,

4 EC 2-0-3-0
tools and platforms

5 Proficiency Modules & Productivity Tools ES 2-1-2-0

6 Assessment on basic aptitude and mathematical skills MC 2-0-3-0

7 Remedial Training in Foundation Courses MC 2-1-2-0

8 Human Values & Professional Ethics MC 3-0-0-0

Communication Skills - focus on Listening, Speaking,

9 BS 2-1-2-0
Reading, Writing skills

10 Concepts of Programming ES 2-0-2-0

2|P ag e www.svce.edu.in
 Semester - 1 (Theory - 5, Lab 4, MC-1)
S.No Course No Course Name Category L-T-P/D Credit
s
1. MA20ABS101 Linear Algebra and Calculus BS 3-0-0 3

2. PH20ABS103 Applied Physics BS 3-0-0 3

3. EG20AHS101 Communicative English HS 3-0-0 3

4. EE20AES103 Fundamentals of Electrical Circuits ES 3-0-0 3

5. ME20AES102 Engineering Drawing ES 1-0-0/2 2

6. ME20AES103 Engineering Graphics Lab ES 0-0-2 1

7. PH20ABS104 Applied Physics Lab BS 0-0-3 1.5

8. EG20AHS102 Communicative English Lab HS 0-0-3 1.5

9. EE20AES104 Fundamentals of Electrical Circuits Lab ES 0-0-3 1.5

10. MA20AMC101 Logical Skills for Professionals-I MC 2-0-0 0

Total 19.5

Semester – 2 (Theory – 4, Lab –5 , MC-2)

S.No Course No Course Name Category L-T-P Credits
Differential Equations and Vector
1. MA20ABS201 BS 3-0-0 3
Calculus
2. CH20ABS103 Chemistry BS 3-0-0 3

3. CS20AES101 Problem Solving using C ES 3-0-0 3

4. EC20AES201 Electronic Devices & Circuits ES 3-0-0 3

5. ME20AES101 Engineering Workshop ES 0-0-3 1.5

6. CS20AES103 IT Workshop ES 0-0-3 1.5

7. CS20AES102 Problem Solving using C Lab ES 0-0-3 1.5

8. CH20ABS104 Chemistry Lab BS 0-0-3 1.5

9. EC20AES202 Electronic Devices & Circuits Lab ES 0-0-3 1.5

10. CH20AMC201 Environmental Science MC 2-0-0 0

11. EG20AMC101 Speech & Oral Communication MC 2-0-0 0

Total 19.5

3|P ag e www.svce.edu.in
 Semester – 3 (Theory –5 , Lab –3, SC -1, MC-3)
S.No Course No Course Name Category Credit
L-T-P
s
1. MA20ABS302 Complex Variables & Transforms BS 3-0-0 3
2. EC20APC301 Digital Logic Design PC 3-0-0 3
3. EC20APC302 Electronic Circuit -Analysis and Design PC 3-0-0 3
4. EC20APC303 Signals & Systems PC 3-0-0 3
Managerial Economics and Financial
5. BA20AHS301 HS 3-0-0 3
Analysis
6. EC20APC304 Basic Simulation Lab PC 0-0-3 1.5
7. EC20APC305 Digital Logic Design Lab PC 0-0-3 1.5
Electronic Circuit -Analysis and Design
8. EC20APC306 PC 0-0-3 1.5
Lab
Skill oriented course-
9. IT20ASC301 SC 1-0-2 2
Application Development using Python
Mandatory course (AICTE suggested):
10. CH20AMC301 MC 2-0-0 0.0
Biology For Engineers
11. MA20AMC301 Logical Skills for Professionals -II MC 2-0-0 0.0
Enhancing English Language Skills
12. EG20AMC301 MC 2-0-0 0.0
(Lateral Entry Students only)
Total 21.5

Semester – 4 (Theory – 5, Lab – 3,SoC-1, AC-1,MC-3)

S.No Course No Course Name Category L-T-P Credits
1. CS20AES401 Data Structures using C ES 3-0-0 3
Probability Theory and Stochastic
2 MA20ABS402 BS 3-0-0 3
Processes
3 EC20APC401 Analog Communications PC 3-0-0 3
Electro Magnetic Waves and
4 EC20APC402 PC 3-0-0 3
Transmission Lines
5 EC20APC403 Linear & Digital IC Applications PC 3-0-0 3
6 EC20APC404 Analog Communications Lab PC 0-0-3 1.5
7 CS20AES402 Data Structures using C Lab ES 0-0-3 1.5
8 EC20APC405 Linear & Digital IC Applications Lab PC 0-0-3 1.5
9 EG20ASC301 Skill oriented course-Soft Skills SC 1-0-2 2
Extra Academic Activities
10 SH20AAC401 (NSS/Yoga/Cultural/Games and AC 0-0-2 0.0
Sports/ Societal Relationship)
Mandatory course (AICTE suggested):
11 BA20AMC201 MC 2-0-0 0.0
Universal Human Values
Mandatory course (AICTE suggested):
11 *BA20AHS201 HS 3-0-0 *3
Universal Human Values
Engineering Mathematics
12. MA20AMC401 MC 2-0-0 0.0
(Lateral Entry Students only)
Total 21.5
Industry/Research Internship minimum of 4 weeks (Mandatory)during summer
13.
vacation
Honors / Minor courses (Hours distribution can be 3-0-2 or 3-1-0
14. 4-0-0 4
also)
*UHV is considered as Credit Based Course from 2021 Batch

4|P ag e www.svce.edu.in
 Semester – 5 (Theory – 5, Lab –2,Soc-1,MC-2,Ts-1,IP-1)
S.No Course No Course Name Category L-T-P Credits
1. EC20APC501 Antennas and Wave Propagation PC 3-0-0 3
2 EC20APC502 Digital Communications PC 3-0-0 3
3 EC20APC503 Microprocessors & Microcontrollers PC 3-0-0 3
4 Open Elective Course/ Job oriented elective-1

CE20AOE502 Principles of Waste Management

Industrial Automation
ME20AOE501

EE20AOE502 Programmable Logic Controllers OE 3-0-0 3

Introduction to Operating Systems
AM20AOE501

CS20AOE502 Computer Architecture & Organization

CH20AOE501 Chemistry of Polymers & Applications
5 Professional Elective courses-1
EE20APE502 Control System Engineering.
PE 3-0-0 3
EC20APE501 Mechatronics
EC20APE502 Nanoelectronics
6 EC20APC504 Digital Communications Lab PC 0-0-3 1.5
7 EC20APC505 Microprocessors & Microcontrollers Lab PC 0-0-3 1.5
Skill advanced course/ soft skill
8. EC20ASC501 course* SC 1-0-2 2
PCB Design and Prototype Development
Mandatory course (AICTE suggested)
9. BA20AMC501 MC 2-0-0 0
Constitution of India
Problem Solving and Programming
10. IT20AMC501 MC 2-0-0 0
(Lateral Entry Students only)
11. EC20ATS501 Technical Seminar Presentation-I TS 0-0-0 0.5
12. EC20AIP501 Evaluation of Summer Internship IP 0-0-0 1.5
Total 22
Honors/Minor courses
13. 4-0-0 4
(The hours distribution can be 3-0-2 or 3-1-0 also)
14. MOOC/NPTEL Course 0-0-0 2

5|P ag e www.svce.edu.in
 Semester – 6 (Theory – 5, Lab –3,SoC-1,MC-2,TS-1)

S.No Course No Course Name Category L-T-P Credits

1. EC20APC601 Digital Signal Processing PC 3-0-0 3

Microwave Engineering and Optical
2. EC20APC602 PC 3-0-0 3
Communications
3. EC20APC603 VLSI Design PC 3-0-0 3
4. Professional Elective courses-2
EC20APE601 Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation
EC20APE602 Information Theory and Coding PE 3-0-0 3
EC20APE603 Introduction to Digital Signal Processing
EC20APE604 RADAR Systems.
5. Open Elective Course/Job oriented elective-2
CE20AOE601 Disaster Management
ME20AOE601 Fundamentals of Additive Manufacturing
EE20AOE603 Optimization Techniques through MATLAB OE 3-0-0 3
CS20AOE602 JAVA Programming
AM20AOE502 Web Technologies
EG20AOE601 Technical Communication & Presentation Skills
6. EC20APC604 Digital Signal Processing Lab PC 0-0-3 1.5
7. EC20APC605 Microwave and Optical Communications Lab PC 0-0-3 1.5
8. EC20APC606 VLSI Design Lab PC 0-0-3 1.5
Skill advanced course/ soft skill course*
9. EC20ASC601 SC 1-0-2 2
Graphical System Design Using Lab-view / CISCO
Mandatory course (AICTE)
10. BA20AMC502 MC 3-0-0 0.0
Intellectual Property Rights & Patents.
11. EC20ATS601 Technical Seminar Presentation-II TS 0-0-0 0.5
AI Tools Techniques and Applications (Lateral
12. AM20AMC601 MC 2-0-0 0
Entry Students only)
Industrial/Research Mini Project (Mandatory) 4 weeks during summer vacation.
13.
Total 22
14. Honors / Minor courses 4-0-0 4
(The hours distribution can be 3-0-2 or 3-1-0 also )
15.
MOOC/NPTEL Course 0-0-0 2

6|P ag e www.svce.edu.in
 Semester – 7 (Theory – 6,Soc-1,TS-1,PW-1,IP-1)

S.No Course No Course Name Category L-T-P Credits

1. Professional Elective courses-3

EC20APE701 Analog and Digital IC Design
PE 3-0-0 3
EC20APE702 FPGA Design
EC20APE703 Low Power VLSI Circuits and Systems
2. Professional Elective courses-4
EC20APE704 Digital Image Processing
PE 3-0-0 3
EC20APE705 Electronic Defense Systems
EC20APE706 Smart Sensor Networks.
3. Professional Elective courses-5
EC20APE707 Data Communication and Networking
PE 3-0-0 3
EC20APE708 Satellite Communications
EC20APE709 Wireless Sensor Networks.
4. Open Elective Course/Job oriented elective-3
CE20AOE701 Air Pollution and Quality Control
ME20AOE703 Introduction to Industrial Engineering
EE20AOE701 Embedded Systems
AM20AOE601 Machine Learning Tools and Techniques. OE 3-0-0 3
CS20AOE503 Structured Query Language
EE20AOE704 Introduction to Smart Grid & Electric
vehicles
MA20AOE701 Numerical Methods for Engineers
5. Open Elective Course/Job oriented elective-4
Environmental Impact Analysis and
CE20AOE704
Management
ME20AOE704 Introduction to Product Marketing
OE 3-0-0 3
EE20AOE703 IoT applications in Electrical Engineering
AM20AOE701 Cyber Security Techniques
CS20AOE601 Data Analysis using ‘R’
PH20AOE701 Nano Materials
6. *Humanities and Social Science Elective
BA20AHS703 Entrepreneurship and Incubation
HS 3-0-0 3
BA20AHS704 Enterprise Resource Planning
BA20AHS705 Management Science
Skill advanced course/ soft skill course*
7. EC20ASC701 SC 1-0-2 2
IoT and Industrial Automation
8. EC20ATS701 Technical Seminar Presentation-III TS 0-0-1 0.5
9. EC20APW701 Project Work Stage-I PW 0-0-0 2
Evaluation of Industrial / Research Mini
IP 0-0-0 3
10. EC20AIP701 Project

Total 25.5
11. Honors/Minor courses 4-0-0 4
(The hours distribution can be 3-0-2 or 3-1-0 also)

7|P ag e www.svce.edu.in
 Semester – 8 (Project)
S.No Course No Course Category Credits
L-T-P
Name
Project Work
Stage-II / Full 8.5
1 EC20APW801 0-0-0
Internship in PW
Industry
Total credits 8.5

Open Elective/ Job Oriented Elective:

(Offered by Electronics & Communication Engineering Department
to other Department students)

S.No Course No Course Name Category L-T-P/D Credits

3-0-0 3
1 EC20AOE501 Basic VLSI design OE/JOE

3-0-0 3
2 EC20AOE502 Digital Electronics OE/JOE

Electronic Instrumentation & 3-0-0 3

3 EC20AOE601 OE/JOE
Measurements
3-0-0 3
4 EC20AOE602 Signal Processing OE/JOE

3-0-0 3
5 EC20AOE701 IC Applications OE/JOE

3-0-0 3
6 EC20AOE702 Principles of Communication Engineering OE/JOE

3-0-0 3
7 EC20AOE703 Sensors & Systems OE/JOE

3-0-0 3
8 EC20AOE704 Internet of Things OE/JOE

3-0-0 3
9 EC20AOE705 Introduction to Image Processing OE/JOE

3-0-0 3
10 EC20AOE706 Microcontroller & Applications OE/JOE

8|P ag e www.svce.edu.in
 Honors/Minors
(Offered by Electronics & Communication Engineering Department)

Note: Eligible and interested students can register either for Honors or for Minors in IV
Semester as per the guidelines

B.Tech HONORS

S.No Course No Course Name Category L-T-P/D Credits

4-0-0 4
1 EC20AHO401 Electronics Packaging HO

HO 4-0-0 4
2 EC20AHO402 Structured Digital System Design

HO 4-0-0 4
3 EC20AHO501 MEMS Technology

HO 4-0-0 4
4 EC20AHO502 Modern Communication Systems

HO 0-0-0 2
5 EC20AHO503 MOOC/NPTEL -I

HO 4-0-0 4
6 EC20AHO601 Advanced Computer Architecture

EC20AHO602 HO 4-0-0 4
7 Digital Speech Processing

EC20AHO603 HO 0-0-0 2
8 MOOC/NPTEL -II
EC20AHO701 HO 4-0-0 4
9 Digital Video Processing
HO 4-0-0 4
10 EC20AHO702 Testing & Testability

9|P ag e www.svce.edu.in
Minor Degree for Circuit Branches(EEE,CSE,CSM,CSC,CSD,IT)

S.No Course No Course Name Category L-T-P/D Credits

4-0-0 4
1 EC20AMI401 Communication Systems-I MI

MI 4-0-0 4
2 EC20AMI402 Electronic Instrumentation
MI 4-0-0 4
3 EC20AMI501 Automotive Electronics
MI 4-0-0 4
4 EC20AMI502 Communication Systems-II

MOOC/NPTEL -I MI 0-0-0 2
5 EC20AMI503

MI 4-0-0 4
6 EC20AMI601 Digital Integrated Circuits
EC20AMI602 MI 4-0-0 4
7 Nanotechnology
EC20AMI603 MOOC/NPTEL -II MI 0-0-0 2
8

EC20AMI701 Digital Image & Video MI 4-0-0 4

9
Processing
MI 4-0-0 4
10 EC20AMI604 Embedded System Design

Minor Degree for Non- Circuit Branches(CIV,MECH)

S.No Course No Course Name Category L-T-P/D Credits
4-0-0 4
1 EC20AMI403 Introduction to Signal Processing MI

MI 4-0-0 4
2 EC20AMI402 Electronic Instrumentation
MI 4-0-0 4
3 EC20AMI401 Communication Systems-I
MI 4-0-0 4
4 EC20AMI504 MATLAB Programming

MOOC/NPTEL -I MI 0-0-0 2
5 EC20AMI505

MI 4-0-0 4
6 EC20AMI604 Embedded System Design
EC20AMI605 MI 4-0-0 4
7 Introduction to CMOS VLSI Design
EC20AMI606 MOOC/NPTEL -II MI 0-0-0 2
8

EC20AMI501 MI 4-0-0 4
9 Automotive Electronics
MI 4-0-0 4
10 EC20AMI702 Introduction to IoT

10 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech-I Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3

(MA20ABS101) LINEAR ALGEBRA & CALCULUS

(Common to All Branches)

Course Objectives:
• This course will illuminate the students in the concepts of calculus and linear
algebra.
• To equip the students with standard concepts and tools at an intermediate to
advanced level mathematics to develop the confidence and ability among the
students to handle various real-world problems and their applications.

Unit -1:
Matrices
Rank of a matrix by echelon form, normal form. Solving system of homogeneous and
non-homogeneous linear equations. Eigen values and Eigen vectors and their
properties, Cayley-
Hamilton theorem (without proof), finding inverse and power of a matrix by Cayley-
Hamilton theorem, Diagonalisation of a matrix.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
• Solve systems of linear equations, using technology to facilitate row reduction
determine the rank, eigen values and eigen vectors. (L3)
• Identify special properties of a matrix, such as positive definite, etc., and use
this information to facilitate the calculation of matrix characteristics. (L3)

Unit -2:
Mean Value Theorems
Rolle’s Theorem, Lagrange’s mean value theorem, Cauchy’s mean value theorem,
Taylor’s and Maclaurin theorems with remainders (without proof) related problems.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
• Translate the given function as series of Taylor’s and Maclaurin’s with
remainders. (L3)
• Analyze the behavior of functions by using mean value theorems. (L3)

11 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit -3:
Multivariable Calculus
Partial derivatives, total derivatives, chain rule, change of variables, Jacobian,
maxima and minima of functions of two variables, method of Lagrange multipliers.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
• Find partial derivatives numerically and symbolically and use them to analyze
and interpret the way a function varies. (L3)
• Acquire the Knowledge maxima and minima of functions of several variables.
(L1)

Utilize Jacobian of a coordinate transformation to deal with the problems in change

of variables. (L3)

Unit -4:

Multiple Integrals
Double integrals, change of order of integration, change of variables. Evaluation of
triple integrals, change of variables between Cartesian, Cylindrical and Spherical
polar co-ordinates.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
• Evaluate double integrals of functions of several variables in two dimensions
using Cartesian and polar coordinates. (L5)
• Apply double integration techniques in evaluating areas bounded by region.
(L4)
• Evaluate multiple integrals in Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical geometries.
(L5)

Unit -5:

Beta and Gamma functions

Beta and Gamma functions and their properties, relation between beta and gamma
functions,
Evaluation of definite integrals using beta and gamma functions. Evaluation of double
and triple integrals using Beta and Gamma functions.
Learning Outcomes:
12 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
• Understand Beta and Gamma functions and its relations. (L2)
• Conclude the use of Special function in evaluating definite integrals. (L4)

Text Books:
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 44/e, Khanna Publishers, 2017.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10/e, John Wiley & Sons,
2011.
Reference Books:
1. R. K. Jain and S. R. K. Iyengar, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 3/e, Alpha
Science International Ltd., 2002.
2. George B. Thomas, Maurice D. Weir and Joel Hass, Thomas Calculus, 13/e,
Pearson Publishers, 2013.
3. Glyn James, Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics, 4/e, Pearson
publishers, 2011.
4. B. V. Ramana, Higher Engineering Mathematics, McGraw Hill Education.
5. H. k Das, Er. RajnishVerma, Higher Engineering Mathematics, S. Chand.
6. N. Bali, M. Goyal, C. Watkins, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Infinity
Science Press.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
• Develop the use of matrix algebra techniques that is needed by engineers for
practical applications. (L6)
• Utilize mean value theorems to real life problems. (L3)
• Familiarize with functions of several variables which are useful in optimization.
(L3)
• Apply multiple integrals to find the area and volumes for different functions.
(L3)
• Analyze the concepts of Beta and Gamma special function for different
functions. (L4)

13 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech I Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(PH20ABS103) APPLIED PHYSICS
(ECE, EEE, CSE, CSE (AI & ML), IT)

Course Objectives:
• To identify the importance of the optical phenomenon i.e., interference,
diffraction and polarization related to its engineering applications.
• To understand the mechanisms of emission of light, the use of lasers as light
sources for low and high energy applications, study of propagation of light wave
through optical fibers along with engineering applications.
• To explain the significant concepts of dielectric and magnetic materials that
leads to potential applications in the emerging microdevices.
• To enlighten the concepts of Quantum Mechanics and to provide fundamentals
of de ’Broglie waves, quantum mechanical wave equation and its applications,
the importance of free electron theory and band theory of solids.
• Evolution of band theory to distinguish materials, basic concepts and transport
phenomenon of charge carriers in semiconductors. To give an impetus on the
subtle mechanism of superconductors using the concept of BCS theory and
their fascinating applications.

Unit-1:
Wave Optics
Interference- Principle of superposition – Interference of light – Interference by
division of wavefront and amplitude -Interference in thin films (Reflection Geometry)
– Colors in thin films – Newton’s Rings – Determination of wavelength and refractive
index–Applications.
Diffraction- Introduction – Fresnel and Fraunhofer diffraction – Fraunhofer
diffraction due to single slit, double slit and N-slits (qualitative) – Grating spectrum–
Applications.
Polarization- Introduction – Types of polarization – Polarization by reflection,
refraction and double refraction - Nicol’s Prism - Half wave and Quarter wave plates–
Applications.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
14 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 • Explain the need of coherent sources and the conditions for sustained
interference. (L2)
• Identify engineering applications of interference. (L3)
• Analyze the differences between interference and diffraction with applications.
(L4)
• Illustrate the concept of polarization of light and its applications. (L2)
• Classify ordinary polarized light and extraordinary polarized light. (L2)

Unit-2:
Lasers and Fiber optics
Lasers- Introduction – Characteristics of laser – Spontaneous and Stimulated
emission of radiation – Einstein’s coefficients – Population inversion – Lasing action
– Pumping mechanisms – Nd-YAG laser–He-Ne laser– GaAs Laser – Applications of
lasers.
Fiber optics- Introduction – Principle of optical fiber – Acceptance Angle – Numerical
Aperture – Classification of optical fibers based on refractive index profile and modes
– Propagation of electromagnetic wave through optical fibers – Attenuation – Optical
fiber communication system – Applications.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
• Demonstrate the basic concepts of LASER light Sources. (L2)
• Apply the concepts to learn the types of lasers. (L3)
• Identifies the Engineering applications of lasers. (L3)
• Explain the working principle of optical fibers. (L2)
• Classify optical fibers based on refractive index profile and mode of
propagation. (L2)
• Identify the applications of optical fibers in various fields. (L3)

Unit-3:
Dielectric and Magnetic Materials
Dielectric Materials- Introduction – Dielectric polarization – Dielectric polarizability,
Susceptibility and Dielectric constant – Types of polarizations: Electronic, Ionic and
Orientational polarizations (Qualitative) – Lorentz internal field – Clausius-Mossotti
equation-Ferro electricity- Dielectric Loss-Applications.

15 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Magnetic Materials- Introduction – Magnetic dipole moment – Magnetization –
Magnetic susceptibility and Permeability – Origin of permanent magnetic moment –
Classification of magnetic materials: (Dia, Para, Ferro Ferri, & Antiferro) - Domain
theory of Ferromagnetism (Qualitative), – Hysteresis – Soft and Hard magnetic
materials-Applications.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
• Explain the concept of dielectric constant and polarization in dielectric
materials. (L2)
• Summarize various types of polarization of dielectrics. (L2)
• Interpret Lorentz field and Clausius-Mossotti relation in dielectrics. (L2)
• Classify the magnetic materials based on susceptibility and their temperature
dependence. (L2)
• Explain the applications of dielectric and magnetic materials. (L2)
• Apply the concept of magnetism to magnetic devices. (L3)

Unit-4:
Quantum Mechanics, Free Electron Theory and Band theory of Solids
Quantum Mechanics- Dual nature of matter – de-Broglie hypothesis- Heisenberg
uncertainty principle (Qualitative) – Significance of wave function- Schrodinger’s time
independent and dependent wave equation – Particle in a one-dimensional infinite
potential well.
Free Electron Theory- Classical free electron theory (Merits and demerits) –
Quantum free electron theory – Equation for electrical conductivity based on quantum
free electron theory – Density of States–Fermi- Dirac distribution.
Band theory of Solids- Origin of energy bands- Classification of solids – Bloch’s
Theorem (Qualitative) – Kronig- Penney model (Qualitative) – E vs k diagram.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
• Explain the concept of dual nature of matter. (L2)
• Explain the significance of wave function. (L2)
• Interpret the concepts of classical and quantum free electron theories. (L2)
• Explain the importance of K-P model. (L2)
• Classify the materials based on band theory. (L2)

16 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit-5:
Semiconductors and Superconductors
Semiconductors- Introduction – Intrinsic semiconductors – Density of charge
carriers – Electrical conductivity – Fermi level – Extrinsic semiconductors – Density
of charge carriers – Dependence of Fermi energy on carrier concentration and
temperature – Drift and diffusion currents – Einstein’s equation – Direct and indirect
band gap semiconductors – Hall effect – Hall coefficient – Applications of Hall effect.
Superconductors- Introduction – Concept & Properties of superconductors –
Meissner effect – Type I and Type II superconductors – BCS theory – Josephson
effects (AC and DC) – High Tc superconductors – Applications of superconductors.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
• Interpret the direct and indirect band gap semiconductors. (L2)
• Identify the type of semiconductor using Hall effect. (L2)
• Identify applications of semiconductors in electronic devices. (L2)
• Explain how electrical resistivity of solids changes with temperature. (L2)
• Classify superconductors based on Meissner’s effect. (L2)

Text books:
1. A text book of Engineering Physics – Dr. M.N. Avadhanulu & Dr. P.G.
Kshirsagar, S. Chand and Company, 11 Edition, 2019
2.Engineering Physics – B.K. Pandey and S. Chaturvedi, Cengage Learning, 2013

Reference Books:
1. Engineering Physics – Shatendra Sharma, Jyotsna Sharma, Pearson Education,
2018
2. Engineering Physics – K. Thyagarajan, McGraw HillPublishers, 2019
3. Engineering Physics - Sanjay D. Jain, D. Sahasrambudhe and Girish, University
Press, 2010
4. Semiconductor physics and devices- Basic principle - Donald A, Neamen,
McGraw Hill, 2011
5. Solid State Physics, A.J. Dekker, Macmillan Education UK, 1969
6. Kittel's Introduction to Solid State Physics, Charles Kittel ,Wiley India
Edition Paperback, 2019

17 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Course Outcomes:
• Apply the different realms of physics and their applications in both scientific
and technological systems through physical optics. (L3)
• understand the mechanisms of emission of light, the use of lasers as light
sources for low and high energy applications. (L2)
• Understands the response of dielectric and magnetic materials to the applied
electric and magnetic fields. (L2)
• Apply the quantum mechanical picture of subatomic world along with the
discrepancies between the classical estimates and laboratory observations of
electron transportation phenomena by free electron theory and band theory.
(L3)
• Elaborate the physical properties exhibited by materials through the
understanding of properties of semiconductors and superconductors. (L5)

18 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech I Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EG20AHS101) COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH
(Common to all Branches)

Course Objectives:
• To give inputs to students regarding effective listening skills for better
comprehension of academic lectures and English spoken by native speakers.
• To make students aware of reading strategies for comprehension of various
academic texts and authentic materials.
• To improve speaking skills through participation in activities such as role plays,
discussions and structured talks/oral presentations.
• To impart effective strategies for good writing and demonstrate the same in
summarizing, writing well-organized essays, record and report useful
information.
• To offer relevant inputs regarding grammatical structures and vocabulary and
encourage their appropriate use in speech and writing.

Unit-1:
Lesson: On the Conduct of Life: William Hazlitt
Listening: Identifying the topic, the context and specific pieces of information by
listening to short audio texts and answering a series of questions.
Speaking: Asking and answering general questions on familiar topics such as home,
family, work, studies and interests; introducing oneself and others.
Reading: Skimming to get the main idea of a text; scanning to look for specific
pieces of information. Reading for Writing: Beginnings and endings of paragraphs
- introducing the topic, summarizing the main idea and/or providing a transition to
the next paragraph.
Grammar and Vocabulary: Parts of Speech, Prepositions, Word formation-I:
Introduction to Word formation, Clauses and Sentences.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
• Understand social or transactional dialogues spoken by native speakers of
English and identify the context, topic, and pieces of specific information
19 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 • Ask and answer general questions on familiar topics and introduce
oneself/others
• Employ suitable strategies for skimming and scanning to get the general idea
of a text and locate specific information
• Recognize paragraph structure and be able to match
beginnings/endings/headings with paragraphs
• Form sentences using proper grammatical structures and correct word forms

Unit-2:
Lesson: The Brook: Alfred Tennyson
Listening: Answering a series of questions about main idea and supporting ideas
after listening to audio texts.
Speaking: Discussion in pairs/small groups on specific topics followed by short
structured talks. Reading: Identifying sequence of ideas; recognizing verbal
techniques that help to link the ideas in a paragraph together.
Writing: Paragraph writing (specific topics) using suitable cohesive devices;
mechanics of writing - punctuation, capital letters.
Grammar and Vocabulary: Articles, Word formation-II: Root words from other
languages, Punctuation.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
• Comprehend short talks on general topics.
• Participate in informal discussions and speak clearly on a specific topic using
suitable discourse markers.
• Understand the use of cohesive devices for better reading comprehension.
• Write well-structured paragraphs on specific topics.
• Identify basic errors of grammar/ usage and make necessary corrections in
short texts.

Unit-3:
Lesson: The Death Trap: Saki
Listening: Listening for global comprehension and summarizing what is listened to.
Speaking: Discussing specific topics in pairs or small groups and reporting what is
discussed.
Reading: Reading a text in detail by making basic inferences -recognizing and
interpreting specific context clues; strategies to use text clues for comprehension.

20 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Writing: Summarizing, Paragraph Writing.
Grammar and Vocabulary: Noun-pronoun agreement, Subject-verb agreement,
Word formation-III: Prefixes & suffixes from other languages. Principles of Good
writing.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
• Comprehend short talks and summarize the content with clarity and precision.
• Participate in informal discussions and report what is discussed.
• Infer meanings of unfamiliar words using contextual clues.
• Write summaries based on global comprehension of reading/listening texts
• Use correct tense forms, appropriate structures and a range of reporting verbs
in speech and writing.

Unit -4:
Lesson: Muhammad Yunus
Listening: Making predictions while listening to conversations/ transactional
dialogues without video; listening with video.
Speaking: Role plays for practice of conversational English in academic contexts
(formal and informal) - asking for and giving information/directions.
Reading: Studying use of graphic elements in texts to convey information, reveal
trends/patterns/relationships, communication processe or display complicated data.
Writing: Letter writing, Essay writing.
Grammar and Vocabulary: Misplaced Modifiers, Synonyms and Antonyms, Essay
writing.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
• Infer and predict content of spoken discourse.
• Understand verbal and non-verbal features of communication and hold
formal/informal conversations.
• Interpret graphic elements used in academic texts.
• Produce a coherent paragraph interpreting a figure/graph/chart/table.
• Use appropriate language for description and interpretation of graphical
elements.

21 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit-5:
Lesson: Politics and the English Language: George Orwell
Listening: Identifying key terms, understanding concepts and answering a series of
relevant questions.
Speaking: Formal oral presentations on topics from academic contexts - without the
use of PPT slides.
Reading: Reading for comprehension.
Writing: Summary writing, Note making.
Grammar and Vocabulary: Clichés, Redundancies, Common Abbreviations, Writing
a summary.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
• Take notes while listening to a talk/lecture and make use of them to answer
questions.
• Make formal oral presentations using effective strategies.
• Comprehend, discuss and respond to academic texts orally and in writing.
• Produce a well-organized essay with adequate support and detail.
• Edit short texts by correcting Common Errors.

Web links
1. www.englishclub.com
2. www.easyworldofenglish.com
3. www.languageguide.org/english
4. www.bbc.co.uk/learningenglish
5. www.eslpod.com/index.html
6. www.myenglishpages.com

Text Books:
1. Language and Life: A Skills Approach- I Edition 2019, Orient Black-Swan.

Reference Books:
1. Bailey, Stephen. Academic writing: A Handbook for International Students,
Routledge, 2014.
2. Chase, Becky Tarver. Pathways: Listening, Speaking and Critical Thinking,
Heinley ELT; 2nd Edition, 2018.

22 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 3. Raymond Murphy’s English Grammar in Use, Fourth Edition (2012)E-book.
4. Hewings, Martin. Cambridge Academic English (B2). CUP, 2012.
5. Oxford Learners Dictionary, 12th Edition, 2011.
6. Norman Lewis Word Power Made Easy- The Complete Handbook for Building a
Superior Vocabulary Goyal Reprint edition 2011.
7. Speed Reading with the Right Brain: Learn to Read Ideas Instead of Just Words
by David Butler; 2nd edition 2014.

Course Outcomes:
• Understand the context, topic, and pieces of specific information from social or
transactional dialogues spoken by native speakers of English. (L2)
• Apply grammatical structures to formulate sentences and correct word forms.
(L3)
• Analyze discourse markers to speak clearly on a specific topic in informal
discussions. (L4)
• Evaluate reading/listening texts and to write summaries based on global
comprehension of these texts. (L5)
• Create a coherent paragraph interpreting a figure/graph/chart/table. (L6)

23 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
L T P C
B.Tech I/I Sem 3 0 0 3

(EE20AES103) FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS

(Common to ECE & EEE)

Course Objectives:
To make the student learn about
• Basic characteristics of R, L, C parameters, their Voltage and Current Relations
and Various combinations of these parameters.
• The
• Single-Phase AC circuits and concepts of real power, reactive power, complex
power, phase angle and phase difference
• Network theorems and their applications
• Network Topology and concepts like Tree, Cut-set, Tie-set, Loop, Co-Tree.
• To know the analysis of three phase balanced and unbalanced circuits and to
measure active and reactive powers in three phase circuits.

Unit- I Introduction to Electrical & Magnetic Circuits

Electrical Circuits: Circuit Concept – Types of elements - Source Transformation-
Voltage-Current Relationship for Passive Elements. Kirchhoff’s Laws – Network
Reduction Techniques-Series, Parallel, Series Parallel, Star-to-Delta or Delta-to-Star
Transformation. Examples. Loop and Nodal Methods of Analysis of Networks &
Independent Voltage and Current Sources.
Magnetic Circuits: Faraday’s Laws of Electromagnetic Induction-Concept of Self and
Mutual Inductance-Dot Convention-Coefficient of Coupling-Composite Magnetic
Circuit-Analysis of Series and Parallel Magnetic Circuits, MMF Calculations.

Learning Outcomes:
• Know about Kirchhoff’s Laws in solving series, parallel, non-series-parallel
configurations in DC networks (L2)
• Know about voltage source to current source and vice-versa transformation in
their representation (L2)
• Understand Faraday’s laws (L1)
• Distinguish analogy between electric and magnetic circuits(L3)
• Understand the analysis of series and parallel magnetic circuits (L1)

24 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit- II Single Phase A.C Circuits
R.M.S, Average Values and Form Factor for Different Periodic Wave Forms –
Sinusoidal Alternating Quantities – Phase and Phase Difference – Complex and Polar
Forms of Representations, j-Notation, Steady State Analysis of R, L and C (In Series,
Parallel and Series Parallel Combinations) with Sinusoidal Excitation- Phasor
diagrams - Concept of Power Factor-Concept of Reactance, Impedance, Susceptance
and Admittance-Apparent Power, Active and Reactive Power, Examples.
Learning Outcomes: The student will be able to
• Understand fundamental definitions of 1-ϕAC circuits(L2)
• Distinguish between scalar, vector and phasor quantities(L3)
• Understand voltage, current and power relationships in 1-ϕAC circuits with
basic elements R, L, and C. (L2)
• Understand the basic definitions of complex admittances and complex power
(L2)
• Solve 1-ϕAC circuits with series and parallel combinations of electrical circuit
elements R, L and C. (L5)

Unit- III Network Theorems

Superposition, Reciprocity, Thevenin’s, Norton’s, Maximum Power Transfer,
Millmann’s, Tellegen’s, and Compensation Theorems for D.C and Sinusoidal
Excitations.
Learning Outcomes: The student will be able to
• Understand that the electrical circuits are ‘heart’ of electrical engineering
subjects and network theorems are main part of it. (L1)
• Distinguish between various theorems and inter-relationship between various
theorems(L4)
• know about applications of certain theorems to DC circuit analysis (L2)
• Understands about applications of certain theorems to AC network analysis (L1)
• Know about applications of certain theorems to both DC and AC network
analysis(L2)

Unit- IV Network Topology

Definitions – Graph – Tree, Basic Cut set and Basic Tie set Matrices for Planar
Networks–Duality & Dual Networks. Nodal Analysis, Mesh Analysis.
Learning Outcomes: The student will be able

25 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 • To understand basic graph theory definitions which are required for solving
electrical circuits(L1)
• To understand about loop current method(L1)
• To understand about nodal analysis methods(L1)
• To understand about principle of duality and dual networks(L1)
• To identify the solution methodology in solving electrical circuits based on the
topology(L4)

Unit- V Three Phase A.C. Circuits

Introduction - Analysis of Balanced Three Phase Circuits – Phase Sequence- Star and
Delta Connection - Relation between Line and Phase Voltages and Currents in
Balanced Systems - Measurement of Active and Reactive Power in Balanced and
Unbalanced Three Phase Systems.
Analysis of Three Phase Unbalanced Circuits - Loop Method - Star Delta
Transformation Technique – for balanced and unbalanced circuits - Measurement of
Active and reactive Power – Advantages of Three Phase System.
Learning Outcomes:
The student will be able to
• To know about advantages of 3-ϕcircuits over 1-ϕcircuits (L2)
• To distinguish between balanced and unbalanced circuits (L4)
• To know about phasor relationships of voltage, current, power in star and delta
connected balanced and unbalanced loads (L2)
• To know about measurement of active, reactive powers in balanced circuits (L2)
• To understand about analysis of unbalanced circuits and power calculations (L2)
Text Books:
1. Circuit Theory (Analysis & Synthesis) A. Chakrabarti, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 7th
Revised Edition, 2018.
2. Fundamentals of Electric Circuits Charles K. Alexander and Matthew. N. O.
Sadiku, McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 2013.

Reference Books:
1. Engineering circuit analysis William Hayt and Jack E. Kemmerly, Mc Graw Hill
Company, 7th Edition, 2006.
2. Network Analysis M.E Van Valkenberg, Prentice Hall (India), 3rd Edition, 1999.
3. Electrical Engineering Fundamentals V. Del Toro, Prentice Hall International,
2ndEdition, 2019.

26 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 4. Electric Circuits- Schaum’s Series, Mc Graw Hill, 5th Edition, 2010.
5. Electrical Circuit Theory and Technology John Bird, Routledge, Taylor & Francis,
5thEdition, 2014.

Course Outcomes:
After completing the course, the student should be able to do the following
• Given a network, able to find equivalent impedance by using network reduction
techniques and determine the current through any element and voltage across
and power through any element. (L5)
• Given a circuit and the excitation, determine the real power, reactive power,
power factor etc, (L5)
• Apply the network theorems suitably to analyze complex circuits and
determine the effective voltages and currents in the circuit. (L6)
• Determine the Dual of the Network, develop the Cut Set and Tie-set Matrices
for a given Circuit. (L5)
• Analyze the three-phase balanced and unbalanced circuits and to measure
active and reactive powers in three phase circuits. (L5)

27 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
L T P/D C
B.Tech I/I Sem 1 0 0/2 2

(ME20AES102) ENGINEERING DRAWING

(Common to all Branches of Engineering)

Engineering drawing being the principal method of communication for

engineers
Course Objectives:
To introduce and make the students
• To use drawing instruments and to draw polygons, engineering curves.
• To draw orthographic projections of points, lines & planes.
• To draw the projections of the various types of solids in different positions
inclined to one and both the planes.
• To draw the projections of sectional views of various types of right regular
solids.
• To draw the development of regular solids.

Unit-1:
Introduction to Engineering Drawing:
Principles of Engineering Drawing and its Significance-Conventions in drawing-
lettering – BIS conventions.
a) Conic sections (General Method only) including Rectangular Hyperbola.
b) Cycloid, Epicycloid and Hypocycloid.
c) Involutes.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit the student will be able to
• Understand the significance of engineering drawing. (L2)
• Identify and draw curves obtained in different conic sections. (L3)
• Draw different curves such as cycloids and involutes. (L3)

Unit-2:
Projection of Points, Lines and Planes: Projection of Points in any quadrant, lines
inclined to one or both planes, finding true lengths, angle made by line. Projections
of regular plane surfaces inclined to one or both the planes.
28 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit the student will be able to
• Understand the meaning of projection and draw the projections of points &
lines. (L2)
• Differentiate between projected length and true length and find the true length
of the lines. (L2)
• Draw the projection of regular plane surfaces. (L3)

Unit-3:
Projections of solids: Projections of regular solids inclined to one or both planes by
rotational or auxiliary view method.
Learning Outcomes: At the end of this unit the student will be able to
• Understand the procedure to draw projection of solids. (L2)
• Draw the projection of solids inclined to one plane. (L3)
• Draw the projection of solids inclined to both the planes. (L3)

Unit-4:
Sections of solids: Section planes and sectional view of right regular solids- prism,
cylinder, pyramid and cone. True shapes of the sections.
Learning Outcomes: At the end of this unit the student will be able to
• Understand different sectional views of regular solids. (L2)
• Obtain the true shapes of the sections of prism, cylinder, pyramid and cone.
(L4)
• Draw the sectional views of prism, cylinder, pyramid and cone. (L3)

Unit-5:
Development of surfaces: Development of surfaces of right regular solids-prism,
cylinder, pyramid, cone and their sectional parts.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit the student will be able to
• Understand the meaning of development of surfaces. (L2)
• Draw the development of regular solids such as prism, cylinder, pyramid and
cone. (L3)
• Obtain the development of sectional parts of regular shapes. (L4)

29 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Text Books:
1. K.L. Narayana & P. Kannaiah, Engineering Drawing, 3/e, SciTech Publishers,
Chennai, 2012.
2. N.D. Bhatt, Engineering Drawing, 53/e, Charotar Publishers, 2016.

Reference Books:
1. Dr K. Prahlada Rao, Dr. S. Krishnaiah, Prof. A.V.S. Prasad, Engineering
Graphics, Amaravati publications.
2. Dhanajay A Jolhe, Engineering Drawing, Tata McGraw-Hill, Copy Right, 2009.
3. Venugopal, Engineering Drawing and Graphics, 3/e, New Age Publishers, 2000.
4. Shah and Rana, Engineering Drawing, 2/e, Pearson Education, 2009.
5. K.C. John, Engineering Graphics, 2/e, PHI, 2013.
6. Basant Agarwal & C.M. Agarwal, Engineering Drawing, Tata McGraw-Hill, Copy
Right, 2008.

Course Outcomes:
After completing the course, the student will be able to
• Draw basic geometrical constructions, curves used in engineering practices.
(L1)
• Understand the concept of projection and acquire visualization skills,
projection of points, Lines and Planes. (L2)
• Illustrate the projections of solids graphically. (L3)
• Draw and explore the sectional views of right regular solids.(L3)
Draw the development of surfaces of solids. (L3)

30 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
L T P/D C
B.Tech I/I Sem 0 0 2 1

(ME20AES103) ENGINEERING GRAPHICS LAB

(Common to all Branches of Engineering)

Course Objectives:
• Instruct the utility of drafting & modelling packages in orthographic and
isometric drawings.
• Train the usage of 2D and 3D modelling.
• Develop the graphical skills for communication of concepts, ideas and design of
engineering products through technical drawings
Introduction to AutoCAD: Basic drawing and editing commands: line, circle,
rectangle, erase, view, undo, redo, snap, object editing, moving, copying, rotating,
scaling, mirroring, layers, templates, polylines, trimming, extending, fillets, arrays,
dimensions.
Exercises:
1. Practice exercise using basic drawing commands (4 No’s).
2. Practice exercise using editing commands (4 No’s).
Orthographic and Isometric Projections
Orthographic Projections: Systems of projections, conventions and application
to orthographic projections.
Isometric Projections: Principles of isometric projection- Isometric scale;
Isometric views: lines, planes, simple solids.
Exercises:
1. Practice exercises on Orthographic Projections (4 No’s).
2. Practice exercises on Isometric Projections (4 No’s).

Text Books:
1. K. Venugopal, V. Prabhu Raja, Engineering Drawing + Auto Cad, New Age
International Publishers.
2. Engineering Drawing, ND Bhatt, Charotar Publishing House.
3. Engineering Drawing, K.L Narayana, SciTech Publishers.
4. D. M. Kulkarni, A. P. Rastogi, A. K. Sarkar, Engineering Graphics with
AutoCAD, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, Revised edition, 2010.

31 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Course Outcomes:
After completing the course using CAD package, the student will be able to
• Draw the basic views related to projections of Lines, Planes. (L1)
• Draw the basic views related to projections of Planes. (L1)
• Illustrate orthographic views of simple objects. (L3)
• Illustrate isometric projections of simple solids. (L3)
• Interpret and comprehend with drafting packages for engineering
practice. (L2)

32 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
L T P C
B.Tech I/I Sem 0 0 3 1.5

(PH20ABS104) APPLIED PHYSICS LAB

(ECE, EEE, CSE, CSE (AI & ML), IT)

Course Objectives:
• Understands the concepts of interference, diffraction and their applications.
• Understand the role of optical fiber parameters in communication.
• Recognize the importance of energy gap in the study of conductivity and Hall
Effect in a semiconductor.
• Illustrates the magnetic and dielectric materials applications.
• Apply the principles of semiconductors in various electronic devices.
Note: In the following list, out of 12 experiments, any 10 experiments
must be performed in a semester.

List of Applied Physics Experiments:

1. Determine the thickness of the wire using wedge shape method.
2. Determination of the radius of curvature of the lens by Newton’s ring method.
3. Determination of wavelength by plane diffraction grating method.
4. Determination of dispersive power of prism.
5. Determination of wavelength of LASER light using diffraction grating.
6. Determination of particle size using LASER.
7. To determine the numerical aperture of a given optical fiber its
acceptance angle.
8. Determination of dielectric constant by charging and discharging method.
9. Magnetic field along the axis of a circular coil carrying current–
StewartGee’s method.
10. Study the variation of B versus H by magnetizing the magnetic material (B-H
curve).
11. To determine the energy gap of a semiconductor by temperature by Four-Probe
Method.
12. Determination of thermistor negative temperature coefficient of resistance.
References:
1. S. Balasubramanian, M.N. Srinivasan “A Text book of Practical
Physics”- S Chand Publishers,2017.

33 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 2. http://vlab.amrita.edu/index.php -Virtual Labs, Amrita University.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
• Utilize optical instruments like microscope and spectrometer. (L3)
• Determine thickness of a hair/paper with the concept of interference. (L5)
• Estimate the wavelength of different colors using diffraction grating
and resolving power. (L5)
• Organize the intensity of the magnetic field of circular coil carrying current
with distance. (L3)
• Evaluate the acceptance angle of an optical fiber and numerical aperture. (L5)
• Determine the resistivity of the given semiconductor using four probe
method. (L5)
• Identify the type of semiconductor i.e., n-type or p-type using hall effect. (L3)
• Determine the band gap of a given semiconductor. (L5)

34 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
L T P C
B.Tech I/I Sem 0 0 3 1.5
(EG20AHS102) COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH LAB
(Common to all Branches)

Course Objectives:
• To expose students to a variety of self-instructional, learner-friendly modes of
language learning.
• To give inputs on better pronunciation through stress, intonation and rhythm.
• To make students aware of the impact of mother tongue on their use of English.
• To make students aware of the skills of using effective language in Interviews,
Group Discussions and Public speaking.
• To equip students with knowledge of the use of computers in resume
preparation, report writing, and format making etc.
Unit-1:
1. Phonetics (sounds symbols, transcription and Received Pronunciation (R.P),
stress and intonation).
2. Describing objects/places/persons.
Unit-2:
1. Role Play/ Conversational Practice.
2. JAM.
Unit-3:
1. Group Discussion: Types, process, language and body language.
2. Debate: Arguing in favor of and against a topic- logical questioning.
Unit-4:
1. Oral/ Poster Presentations: Structure, preparation, visual aids and delivery.
2. Resume Writing: Definition, formats and practice.
Unit-5:
1. Interview Skills: Basics of interviews -kinds of interviews- preparation – and
performance.
2. Film/book review: Structure, language and practice.

Suggested Software
Orel, Walden InfoTech, Young India Films.
Reference Books
1. Bailey, Stephen. Academic writing: A Handbook for International Students,

35 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Routledge, 2014.
2. Chase, Becky Tarver. Pathways: Listening, Speaking and Critical Thinking.
Heinley ELT; 2nd Edition, 2018.
3. Skillful Level 2 Reading & Writing Student's Book Pack (B1) Macmillan
Educational. 2016.
4. Hewings, Martin. Cambridge Academic English (B2). Cambridge University
Press, 2012.
5. T. Balasubramaniyan, A Textbook of English Phonetics for Indian Students, 3rd
edition; Laxmi publications 2017.

Web Links
1. www.esllab.com
2. www.englishmedialab.com
3. www.englishinteractive.net

Course Outcomes:
After completing the course, the students will be:
1. Develop to handle and excel in a variety of self-instructional, learner-friendly
modes of language learning. (L6)
2. Develop to employ better stress and intonation patterns and utter English
sounds correctly. (L6)
3. Develop to avoid the impact of mother tongue in English and neutralize their
accent. (L6)
4. Develop to participate with skill and confidence in Group Discussions,
Interviews and Public Speaking. (L6)
5. Utilize the technical skills to prepare resume, report-writing, and format-
making etc. (L3)

36 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech I/I Sem L T P C

0 0 3 1.5

(EE20AES104) FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS LAB

(ECE & EEE)

Course Objectives:

• Remember, understand and apply various theorems and verify practically.

• Understand and analyze active, reactive power measurements in three
phase balanced &unbalanced circuits.

List of Experiments:

1. Verification of KCL and KVL for DC circuits

2. Determination of Self, Mutual Inductances and Coefficient of Coupling
3. Verification of Superposition Theorem for DC Circuits
4. Maximum Power Transfer Theorem for DC and AC circuits
5. Verification of Compensation Theorem for DC circuits
6. Verification of Reciprocity, Millmann’s Theorems for DC circuits
7. Measurement of Active Power for Star Connected Balanced Loads
8. Measurement of Reactive Power for Star Connected Balanced Loads
9. Measurement of Active Power for Delta Connected Balanced Loads
10. Measurement of Reactive Power for Delta Connected Balanced Loads
11. Measurement of 3-Phase Power by Two Wattmeter Method for Unbalanced
Loads

Note: Minimum 10 experiments to be performed

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, students should be able to

• Distinguish analogy between electric and magnetic circuits and apply

the principles to determine circuit parameters. (L5)
• Remember, understand and apply various theorems
and verify practically. (L5)
• Understand and analyze active, reactive power measurements in three
phase balanced & unbalanced circuit (L5)

37 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

L T P C
B.Tech I/I Sem 2 0 0 0
(MA20AMC101) LOGICAL SKILLS FOR PROFESSIONALS-I
(Mandatory Course)
Course Objectives:
• To learn the basic methods to find averages, percentages, Time and Distance
and Time and Work concepts extended to problems on trains, Boats and
Streams and different shortcut techniques to find the solution in a stipulated
time.
• To understand the logic behind the series, coding- decoding, Directions,
Problems on ages, Analogy concepts.

Unit-1:
Averages:
• Find the averages on some quantities.
• Find the averages on speed and distance.
Ratio and Proportions:
• Ratio between quantities of the same kind.
• Comparison of two ratios and convert into equal fractions.
• Find the 4th, 3rd terms of proportions and mean proportions.
Profit and Loss:
• Find the Profit or Loss on Selling price, cost price and market price.

Unit-2:
Partnership:
• Ratio of division of gains.
• Working and sleeping partners.
Simple Interest and Compound Interest:
• Find the Principal, Rate of interest and time.
• Find the amount of compound interest when the compound interest is
Annually or half-year or quarterly or daily.
• Find the difference between the simple and compound interests
Time and Distance:
• Find the time, speed and distance by using direct formula.
• Find the time, speed and distance by using ratios and averages.
38 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit-3:
Time and Work:
• The relation between days taken by individuals to complete a given work
independently and to complete while working simultaneously or alternately.
• Teams of men, women, children and time taken by the teams to complete work
independently or while working simultaneously.
Problems on Trains:
• Time Taken by Train to Cross any stationary Body or Platform.
• Time Taken by 2 trains to cross each other.
• Distance covered when two trains are moving in the same/opposite directions.
Boats and streams:
• Find the speed of boat in upstream and downstream.
• Find the speed of boat in still water and average speed of
boat. Unit-4:
Series:
• Alphabet series
• Number series
• Alpha-Numeric series
Coding and Decoding:
• Letter coding
• Number/symbol coding
• Substitution coding
Blood relation:
• Based dialogue or conversation
• Based on puzzles

Unit-5:
Directions:
• The right and left directional movement
• The directional reference point
• The directions of sun rays and shadow
Problems on ages:
• Find the ages at present
• Find the ages in future
• Find the ages in post
Analogy:

39 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 • Alphabet analogy
• Number analogy

Text Books:
1. Quantitative Aptitude, 2012, Dr. R.S. Agarwal, S. Chand and Company
Ltd, New Delhi.
2. A Modern Approach to Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning, 2012, Dr. R.S.
Aggarwal, S. Chand and Company Ltd, New Delhi.

Reference Books:
1. Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, 14/e, 2010, Abhijit
Guha, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, New Delhi.
2. Course in Mental Ability & Quantitative Aptitude, 3/e, 2012, Edgar Thorpe, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishers, New Delhi.
3. Fast Track Objective Arithmetic, 2012, Rajesh Verma, Arihant Publications,
Meerut.
4. Reasoning and Aptitude, 2013, Nem Singh, Made Easy Publications, New Delhi

Course Outcomes:
• Demonstrate knowledge basic mathematics to develop analytical skills
to solving problems of Averages - Percentages - Ratio. (L2)
• Demonstrate knowledge basic mathematics to develop analytical skills
to solving problems of Partnership - Simple Interest and Compound Interest
and time and distance. (L2)
• Demonstrate knowledge basic mathematics to develop analytical skills
to solving problems of time ad work, problems on trains and Boats and
streams. (L2)
• Analyze the techniques in series, coding and decoding and blood relations. (L3)
• Analyze the techniques in directions, problems on ages and analogy. (L3)

40 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech I/II Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3

(MA20ABS201) DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND VECTOR CALCULUS

(Common to All Branches)

Course Objectives:
• To enlighten the learners in the concept of differential equations and
multivariable calculus.
• To furnish the learners with basic concepts and techniques at plus two level to
lead them into advanced level by handling various real world applications.
Unit -1:
Differential equations
Exact, Non-Exact Linear and Bernoulli equations. Applications to Newton’s law of
cooling and law of natural growth and decay.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
• Identify the essential characteristics of linear differential equations with
constant coefficients. (L3)
• Solve the linear differential equations with constant coefficients by
appropriate method. (L3)
• Classify and interpret the solutions of linear differential equations. (L3)

Unit -2:
Linear differential equations of higher
order
Definitions, homogenous and non-homogenous, complimentary function, general
solution, particular integral, method of variation of parameters, Cauchy’s
and Legendre’s linear equations. Applications to L-C-R Circuit.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able
to
• Solve the linear differential equations with variable coefficients by
appropriate method. (L3)
• Classify and interpret the solutions of linear differential equations of
higher order. (L3)
41 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 • Formulate and solve the higher order differential equation by analyzing
physical situations. (L3)

Unit 3:
Partial differential
equations
Formation of a PDE, Linear partial differential equations of first order, non-linear
PDEs of first order (standard forms). Solutions to homogenous linear partial
differential equations with constant coefficients, rules for finding the
complementary function and the particular integral.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
• Apply a range of techniques to find solutions of standard PDEs. (L3)
• Outline the basic properties of standard PDEs. (L2)

Unit-4:
Vector differentiation
Scalar and vector point functions, vector operator del, del applies to scalar point
functions-Gradient, del applied to vector point functions-Divergence, Curl and their
related properties.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
• Apply del to Scalar and vector point functions. (L3)
• Illustrate the physical interpretation of Gradient, Divergence and Curl. (L3)

Unit -5:
Vector integration
Line integral-circulation-work done by force, surface integral-flux, Green’s
theorem in the plane (without proof), Stoke’s theorem (without proof), volume
integral, Divergence theorem (without proof).

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able
to
• Find the work done in moving a particle along the path over a force field. (L4)
• Evaluate the rates of fluid flow along and across curves. (L4)

42 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 • Apply Green’s, Stokes and Divergence theorem in evaluation of double
and triple integrals. (L3)

Text Books:
1. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10/e, John Wiley & Sons,
2011.
2. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 44/e, Khanna publishers, 2017.

Reference Books:
1. Dennis G. Zill and Warren S. Wright, Advanced Engineering Mathematics,
Jones and Bartlett, 2011.
2. Michael Greenberg, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 2/e, Pearson, 2018
3. George B.Thomas, Maurice D. Weir and Joel Hass, Thomas Calculus,
13/e, Pearson Publishers, 2013.
4. R.K.Jain and S.R.K.Iyengar, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 3/e, Alpha
Science International Ltd., 2002.
5. B. V. Ramana, Higher Engineering Mathematics, McGraw Hill Education.
6. H. k Das, Er. RajnishVerma, Higher Engineering Mathematics, S. Chand.
7. N. Bali, M.Goyal, C. Watkins, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Infinity
Science Press.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
• Solve the differential equations related to various engineering fields. (L6)
• Solve the linear differential equations of higher order related to
various engineering fields. (L6)
• Identify solution methods for partial differential equations that model
physical processes. (L3)
• Interpret the physical meaning of different operators such as gradient, curl
and divergence. (L5)
Estimate the work done against a field, circulation and flux using
vector calculus. (L5)

43 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech I/II Sem L T P C

3 0 0 3

(CH20ABS103) CHEMISTRY
(ECE, EEE, CSE, CSE (AI & ML), IT)

Course Objectives:
• To impart the concept of soft and hard waters, softening methods of hard water.
• To familiarize engineering chemistry and its applications.
• To train the students on the principles and applications of electrochemistry.
• To determine the polymer molecular weights and various
applications of polymers.
• To introduce instrumental methods.

Unit 1: Water Technology

Introduction –Soft Water and hardness of water, Estimation of hardness of water
by EDTA Method, Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen by Winkler’s method -Boiler
troubles– Priming, foaming, scale and sludge, Caustic embrittlement, Domestic
treatment of water, specifications for drinking water, Bureau of Indian Standards
(BIS) and World Health Organization (WHO) standards, Industrial water treatment,
ion-exchange processes - desalination of brackish water, reverse osmosis.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the students will be able
to
• List the differences between temporary and permanent hardness of water. (L1)
• Explain the principles of reverse osmosis and electrodialysis. (L2)
• Compare quality of drinking water with BIS and WHO standards. (L2)
• Illustrate problems associated with hard water - scale and sludge. (L2)
• Explain the working principles of different Industrial water treatment
processes. (L2)

Unit 2: Modern Engineering materials

Understanding of materials: Crystal field theory – salient features – splitting in
octahedral and tetrahedral geometry. Properties of coordination compounds-
Oxidation state, coordination, magnetic and colour.
44 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Semiconductor materials, super conductors- basic concept, band diagrams for
conductors, semiconductors and insulators, Effect of doping on band structures.
Super capacitors: Introduction, Basic Concept-Classification – Applications.

Nano chemistry: Introduction, classification of nanomaterials, properties and

applications of Fullerenes, carbon nano tubes and Graphene’s nanoparticles.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the students will be able to
• Explain splitting in octahedral and tetrahedral geometry of complexes. (L2)
• Discuss the magnetic behavior and colour of coordination compounds. (L3)
• Explain the band theory of solids for conductors, semiconductors and insulators.
(L2)
• Demonstrate the application of Fullerenes, carbon nano tubes and Graphines
nanoparticles. (L2)

Unit 3: Electrochemistry and Applications

Introduction to Electrochemistry: Electrodes – concepts, reference electrodes
(Calomel electrode, Ag/AgCl electrode and glass electrode); Electrochemical cell,
Nernst equation, cell potential calculations and numerical problems,
PH metry, Potentiometry - potentiometric titrations (redox titrations), concept of
conductivity, conductivity cell, conductometric titrations (acid-base titrations).
Electrochemical sensors – potentiometric sensors with examples, amperometric
sensors with examples.
Primary cells – Zinc-air battery, Secondary cells – Nickel-Cadmium (NiCad), and
lithium ion batteries- working of the batteries including cell reactions; Principles and
applications of Fuel cells: hydrogen-oxygen, methanol fuel cells

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the students will be able to
• Apply Nernst equation for calculating electrode and cell potentials. (L3)
• Differentiate between Ph metry, potentiometric and conductometric titrations.
(L2)
• Explain the theory of construction of battery and fuel cells. (L2)
• Solve problems based on cell potential. (L3)

45 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit 4: Polymer Chemistry
Introduction to polymers, functionality of monomers, types of polymerization, chain
growth and step growth polymerization, coordination polymerization,
copolymerization (stereospecific polymerization) with specific examples and
mechanisms of polymer formation. Calculation of weight average molecular mass of
polymers, polydispersity index (PDI).
Plastics - Thermoplastics and Thermosettings, Preparation, properties and
applications of – PVC, Teflon, Bakelite, Nylon-6,6, carbon fibres.
Elastomers–Buna-S, Buna-N–preparation, properties and applications.
Conducting polymers–polyacetylene, polyaniline, polypyrroles–mechanism of
conduction and applications.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the students will be able to
• Explain the different types of polymers and their applications. (L2)
• Explain the preparation, properties and applications of Bakelite, Nylon-6,6, and
carbon fibres. (L2)
• Describe the mechanism of conduction in conducting polymers. (L2)
• Discuss Buna-S and Buna-N elastomers and their applications. (L2)

Unit 5: Instrumental Methods and Applications

Electromagnetic spectrum. Absorption of radiation: Beer-Lambert’s law. Principle,
instrumentation and applications of UV-Visible, IR Spectroscopies.

Learning outcomes:
After completion of Unit IV, students will be able to:
• Explain the different types of spectral series in electromagnetic spectrum. (L2)
• Understand the principles of different analytical instruments. (L2)
• Explain the different applications of analytical instruments. (L2)
Text Books:
1. Jain and Jain, Engineering Chemistry, 16/e, DhanpatRai, 2013.
2. Peter Atkins, Julio de Paula and James Keeler, Atkins’ Physical Chemistry, 10/e,
Oxford University Press, 2010.
Reference Books:
1. G.V.Subba Reddy, K.N.Jayaveera and C. Ramachandraiah, Engineering
Chemistry, Mc Graw Hill, 2020.

46 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 2. D. Lee, Concise Inorganic Chemistry, 5/e, Oxford University Press, 2008.
3. Skoog and West, Principles of Instrumental Analysis, 6/e, Thomson, 2007.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
• Estimate the amount of hardness and DO present in water. (L2)
• Compare the materials of construction for battery and electrochemical
sensors. (L2)
• Explain the preparation, properties, and applications of thermoplastics
&thermosetting, elastomers & conducting polymers. (L2)
• Explain the principles of spectrometry. (L2)
• Apply the principle of Band diagrams in application of conductors
and semiconductors. (L3)

47 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF
ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

L T P C
B.Tech- I/II Sem 3 0 0 3

(CS20AES101) PROBLEM SOLVING USING

C (Common to All Branches of Engineering)
Course Objectives:
• To learn how to solve a given problem.
• To illustrate the basic concepts of C programming language.
• To discuss the concepts of Functions, Arrays, Pointers and Structures.
• To familiar with Dynamic memory allocation concepts.
• To apply concepts of structures and files to solve real word problems.

UNIT-1:
Introduction to Problem Solving: Problem Solving Aspect, Problem Identification,
Problem Understanding, Algorithm Development, Solution Planning, Flowcharts,
flowgorithm.
Overview of C: History Of C, C Language Elements, Basic Structure of C
Program, C Tokens-Variables and Data Types, Operators, Expressions and Type
Conversions.
Learning Outcomes:
The students will be able
to
• Develop solution through problem understanding and decomposition (L6).
• Develop basic flowcharts for performing input and output and computations
(L3).
• Solve Numerical Problems using Flowgorithm (L3).
• Use C basic concepts to write simple C programs (L3).

UNIT-2:
Control Statements: Selection Statements- if and switch statements.
Iterative Statements: for, while and do-while statements.
Jump Statements: break and continue statements.

48 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Learning Outcomes:
The students will be able to
• Implement C program using Conditional statements (L2).
• Implement C program using Iterative statements (L2).

UNIT-3:
Arrays: Declaration, accessing array elements, Storing values, Operations on arrays,
Multi-dimensional a r r a ys .
Functions: Introduction, Using Functions, Function declaration, Function definition
and Function call, Parameter passing, Passing arrays to functions, Recursion, Storage
classes.

Learning Outcomes: The students will be able to

• Writing Structured programs using Functions (L5).
• Apply arrays concepts on real time applications (L6).

UNIT-4:
Pointers: Declaration and Initialization of pointer variables, Pointer arithmetic,
Pointers and arrays, Pointer to pointer, Array of pointers, Pointers and functions,
Dynamic Memory Allocation.
Strings: Introduction to Strings, String handling functions, Preprocessor Directives.

Learning Outcomes: The students will be able to

• Use pointers to write c Programs (L3).
• Understand the concepts of preprocessors (L2).
• Apply Dynamic Memory Allocation concepts on real time applications (L6).

UNIT-5:
Structures: Introduction, Nested Structures, Array of Structures, Structures and
Functions, Unions.
Files in C: Using Files in C, Read data from Files, Writing data to Files, Random
access to files, Command-line Arguments

Learning Outcomes:
The students will be able to
• Use the concepts of Structures and Unions to write C programs (L3).
• Apply various operations on Files (L6).

49 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Text Books:
1. Reema Thareja, Programming in C, Oxford University Press, AICTE Edition,
2018.
2. R.G. Dromey, “How to Solve it by Computer”. 2014, Pearson.

Reference Books:
1. Jeri R. Hanly, Ellot B. Koffman, Problem Solving and Program Design in C, 5/e,
Pearson
2. B. A. Forouzan and R. F. Gilberg, Computer Science: A Structured
Programming Approach Using C, 3/e, Cengage Learning, 2007.
3. Brian W Kernighan and Dennis M Ritchie, The C Programming Language,
Second Edition, Prentice Hall Publication.
4. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel -C How to Program with an introduction to C++,
Eighth Edition

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
• Solve computational problems (L3).
• Select the features of C language appropriate for solving a problem (L4)
• Design computer programs for real world problems (L6)
• Organize the data which is more appropriated for solving a problem

50 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

L T P C
B.Tech I/II Sem
3 0 0 3

(EC20AES201) ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS

(ECE)

Course Objectives:
• To understand the basic principles of all semiconductor devices.
• To be able to solve problems related to diode circuits, and amplifier circuits.
• To analyze diode circuits, various biasing and small signal equivalent circuits
of amplifiers.
• To be able to compare the performance of BJTs and MOSFETs.
• To design rectifier circuits and various amplifier circuits using BJTs and
MOSFETs.

Unit 1
Diodes: Review of Semiconductors, the ideal diode- current voltage characteristics,
Applications of diodes, Terminal characteristic of junction diodes- forward-bias,
Reverse-bias and breakdown regions, Modeling the diode forward characteristics- The
exponential model, Graphical analysis and Iterative analysis using the
exponential model, The Piecewise-Linear model, Constant-voltage-drop model,
Ideal-Diode model and Small signal model.
Learning outcomes:
• Remember and understand the basic characteristics of semiconductor
diode. (L1)
• Understand iterative and graphical analysis of simple diode circuits. (L1)

Unit 2
Other Diodes and Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs):
Specifying and Modeling the Zener diode, Use of the Zener as a Shunt
regulator, Temperature effects. Rectifier circuits- The Half-wave rectifier, The
Full-Wave rectifier, The Bridge Rectifier without and with a Filter capacitor, Voltage
doubler, The Schottky- barrier diode, Varactor diode, Photodiodes and Light-
Emitting Diodes.

51 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs): Device Structure and Physical operation- circuit
symbol and conventions, Simplified structure and Modes of operation, Operation
of NPN transistor in the Active mode, Structure of actual transistor, Ebers-Moll model,
Operation in the Saturation mode, The PNP transistor, Graphical representation of
transistor characteristics and Early effect.
Learning outcomes:
• Understand principle of operation of Zener diode and other
special semiconductor diodes. (L1)
• Understand the V-I characteristics of BJT and its different configurations. (L1)
• Analyze various applications of diode and special purpose diodes. (L3)
• Design rectifier and voltage regulator circuits. (L4)

Unit 3
Bipolar Junction Transistors:
BJT circuits at DC, Biasing in BJT amplifier circuits- The classical discrete-circuit bias
arrangement, A two power supply version, Biasing using a Collector-to-Base feedback
resistor, The Hybrid-π model and T model, Performing small-signal analysis
directly on the circuit diagram.
Basic BJT amplifier configurations: Three basic configurations- The Common Emitter
amplifier without and with emitter resistance, Common Base amplifier and Common
collector amplifier, Comparison of three configurations.
Learning outcomes:
• Solve problems on various biasing circuits using BJT. (L2)
• Analyze BJT based biasing circuits. (L3)
• Design an amplifier using BJT based on the given specifications. (L4)
Unit 4
JFET & MOS Field-Effect Transistors:
Operation of both N-channel and P-channel JFET-Drain characteristics and
Transfer characteristics. Device structure and Physical Operation (both N-
channel and P- channel MOSFET), Current – Voltage characteristics, MOSFET
circuits at DC, Biasing in MOS amplifiers circuits: Biasing by fixing VGS, Biasing
by fixing VG and connecting a resistance in the source and Biasing using a drain
to gate feedback resistor. Learning outcomes:
• Understand the principle of operation of various types of JFET and MOSFET
devices (L1)

52 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 • Understand the V-I characteristics of JFET and MOSFET devices and their
configurations (L1)
Unit 5
MOSFET Small signal operation and Models:
The DC bias point, voltage gain, separating the DC analysis and the signal analysis,
small signal equivalent circuit models, the trans conductance and T-equivalent circuit
model. Basic MOSFET amplifier configurations-Three basic configurations,
Characterizing amplifiers, Common source amplifier without and with source
resistance, Common Gate amplifier, and Common Drain amplifier and Comparison of
three configurations.
Learning outcomes:
• Solve problems on small signal equivalent of MOSFET devices. (L2)
• Analyze various biasing circuits based on different types of MOSFETs. (L3)
• Design an amplifier using MOSFET based on the given specifications. (L4)
Text Books:
1. Adel S. Sedra and Kenneth C. Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits – Theory and
Applications”, 6th Edition, Oxford Press, 2013.

2. Donald A Neamen, “Electronic Circuits–analysis and design”,3rd McGrawHill

(India),2019.
References:
1. J.Milliman and CHalkias,“Integrated electronics”,2nd Edition, Tata McGrawHill,
1991.

2. Behzad Razavi, “Microelectronics”, Second edition, Wiley, 2013.

3. R.L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuits,” 9 th
Edition, Pearson, 2006.
Course Outcomes:
After the completion of the course, students will able to
• Understand principle of operation, characteristics and applications of Semi
conductor diodes, Bipolar Junction Transistor and MOSFETs.
• Apply the basic principles for solving the problems related to Semiconductor
diodes, BJTs, and MOSFETs.
• Analyze diode circuits for different applications such as rectifiers, clippers and
clampers also analyze biasing circuits of BJTs, and MOSFETs.
• Design diode circuits and amplifiers using BJTs, and MOSFETs.
• Compare the performance of various semiconductor devices.

53 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
L T P C
B.Tech I/II Sem 0 0 3 1.5

(ME20AES101) ENGINEERING WORKSHOP

(Common to all Branches)
Course Description:
This course will provide students with a hands-on experience on various basic
engineering practices. This course will also provide an opportunity to the students to
experience the various steps involved in the industrial product fabrication.
Course Objectives:
• To familiarize students with basic engineering applications in day-to-day life.
Wood Working: (Any 2)
To familiarize with different types of wood and tools used in wood working and make
following joints;
1. Planning and Sawing of Wood
2. Half – Lap Joint
3. Mortise and Tenon Joint
4. Dovetail Joint or Bridle Joint
Sheet Metal Working: (Any 2)
To familiarize with different types of tools used in sheet metal working, developments
of following sheet metal job from GI sheets;
1) Rectangular tray 2) Conical funnel 3) Open scoop
Fitting: (Any 1)
To familiarize with different types of tools used in fitting and do the following fitting
exercises;
1) V-fit 2) Square fit 3) Dovetail fit
Electrical Wiring: (Any 2)
To familiarize with different types of basic electrical circuits and make the following
connections;
1) Parallel and series 2) Two-way switch 3) Godown lighting 4) Soldering of wires.
Foundry Practice: (Any 1)
To familiarize with different types of tools used in Foundry and do the following
exercises;
1. Preparation of a green sand mould using single piece pattern
2. Preparation of a green sand mould using split piece pattern with core and
demonstration of casting.

54 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Welding Practice: (Any 1)
To familiarize with different types of tools used in Welding and do the
following exercises;
1. Lap joint, butt joint and T joint using arc welding.
2. Lap joint using resistance spot welding
3. Lap and butt joints using gas welding
Assembling/Disassembling Practice: (Any 1)
To familiarize with different types of tools used in Assembling/Disassembling and
do the following exercises;
1. Bicycle
2. Clutch and carburetor
3. Two-wheeler engine parts
Manufacture of a Plastic Component (Any 1)
To familiarize with different types of tools used in Manufacture of a Plastic
Component and do the following exercises;
1. Use of injection moulding machine
2. FRP composite preparation using hand layup method
3. Joining of plastic components
Reference Books/Laboratory Manuals:
1. P. Kannaiah and K. L. Narayana, Workshop Manual, SciTech Publishers, 2009.
2. K. Venkata Reddy, Workshop Practice Manual, BS Publications, 2008.
3. V. Ramesh Babu, Engineering Workshop Practice, V R B Publishers Private
Limited, 2009.
Additional Learning Resources:
1. R. K. Jain, Production Technology, Khanna Publishers, 17th edition, 2012.
2. Kalpakjain, Serope, Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, Pearson
Education, 7th edition, 2014.
Course Outcomes:
After completion of this lab the student will be able to
1. Identify tools, work material, measuring instruments useful for
domestic applications (L3).
2. Apply wood working skills in real world applications. (L3)
3. Build different parts with metal sheets in real world applications. (L3)
4. Apply fitting operations in various applications for good strength. (L3)
5. Analyze different types of basic electric circuit connections. (L4)
6. Demonstrate soldering and brazing in joining circuits. (L2)
55 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 7. Make moulds for sand casting using standard equipment. (L3)
8. Develop different weld joints for various metals. (L3)
9. Inspect various parts of machine components. (L4)
10. Make plastic components using proper raw material. (L3)

56 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
L T P C
B.Tech I/II Sem 0 0 3 1.5

(CS20AES103) IT Workshop
(Common to All Branches of Engineering)

Course Objectives:
• To make the students to know about the internal parts of computer, Generation
of Computers
• To make the students to know how to assemble and disassemble a computer
from its parts
• To make the students to install Operating system for a computer.
• To provide technical training to the students on productivity tool like Word
Processor, Spread Sheets, Presentations and LaTeX
• To learn about networking of computers and use Internet facility for browsing
and searching
Task 1:
Learn about Computer Hardware -1: Identifying the internal parts of computer
with its peripherals, Block diagram of Computer, Generations of Computers. Write
specifications for each part of a computer including peripherals and specifications of
a system. Submit it in the form of report.
Task 2:
Learn about Computer Hardware-2: Assemble and disassemble the Personal
Computer, Internal and external connections of the computer, Troubleshoot the
computer by identifying working and non-working parts. Submit a report about the
working and non-working parts in a computer.
Task 3:
Installation of Operating System: Linux, Windows 7/8/10 Installation, install both
the operating system in a computer and make the system as Dual boot. Student
should record the entire installation process.
Task 4:
Installation of Device drivers: install supported device drivers for the system-
printer drivers, audio and video drivers, Graphic card drivers, USB drivers, install new
application software and record the process of installations.

Task 5:

57 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Networking: Connecting computers directly using a cable or wireless connectivity
and share information, connecting computers using switch/hub or Local Area Network
connection and share information, Wide Area Network Connection, crimpling activity,
logical configuration. The entire process has to be documented.
Task 6:
Introduction to Web Design: Introduction to Web Design, Introduction to HTML
tags, Cascading Style sheets and Applications using HTML and CSS.
Task 7:
Introduction to Virus and Antivirus: Types of Virus, virus engine, Antivirus-
download freely available Anti-virus software, install it and use it to check for the
threats to the computer being used. Student should submit information about the
features of the installation process and antivirus used.
Task 8:
Introduction to Microsoft Office-1: Microsoft word, Operations on text data in
word- inserting, deleting, Aligning, header, footer, font style, font type, bulleting and
numbering, hyperlinking, inserting images, page setup, inserting images, writing
equations, formatting Paragraphs, spell checking etc. Student should submit a user
manual of the word processor
Task 9:
Introduction to Microsoft Office-2: Microsoft Excel, Operation on data in Excel-
creating, opening, saving the document as per the requirement, inserting, deleting
the cell data, format the cell, creation of pivot table, applying the formulas and
functions, preparing charts, converting .xls to csv, etc., Student should submit a user
manual of the Spreadsheet.
Task 10:
Introduction to Microsoft Office-3: Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation, creating,
opening, saving the presentations, inserting and deleting the slides, styles for slides,
formatting the slides with different fonts, colours, creating charts and tables,
inserting and deleting text, graphics and animations, bulleting and numbering, hyper
linking, running the slideshow, Setting the timing for slide show. Student should
submit a user manual of the PowerPoint presentation.
Task 11:
Introduction to LaTeX: LaTeX and its installation and different IDEs, Creating the
document using Latex, content into sections using article and book class of Latex.
Styling Pages: Reviewing and customizing different paper sizes and formats.
Formatting text, creating basic table, adding simple and dashed border, merging rows
58 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 and columns, referencing and indexing. Student should submit a user manual of the
LaTeX.
References:
1. Introduction to Computers, Peter Norton, McGraw Hill
2. PC Hardware, Maintenance & Troubleshooting In-Depth, Reddy N.S.
3. MOS study guide for Word, Excel, PowerPoint & Outlook Exams, Joan Lambert,
Joyce Cox, PHI
4. Introduction to Information Technology, ITL Education Solutions limited,
Pearson Education.
5. Networking your computers and devices, Rusen, PHI
6. Lamport L. LaTeX: a document preparation system: user’s guide and reference
manual. Addison-Wesley: 1994

Course Outcomes:
• Identify the Internal parts of computers and Generation of Computers. (L1)
• Assemble and disassemble a computer from its parts and prepare the computer
ready to use.(L3)
• Installation process of different types Operating system for a computer by their
own.(L3)
• Interconnect two or more computers for information sharing.(L4)
• Access the Internet and browse it for required information.(L1)
• Prepare the documents using Word Processor, prepare spread sheets for
calculations using Excel, and documents for LaTeX.(L3)
• Prepare slide presentation using the presentation tool.(L4)

59 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech I/II Sem L T P C

0 0 3 1.5
(CS20AES102) PROBLEM SOLVING USING C LAB
(Common to All Branches of Engineering)

Course Objectives:
• To learn how to solve a given problem.
• To illustrate the basic concepts of C programming language.
• To discuss the concepts of Functions, Arrays, Pointers and Dynamic Memory
Allocation.
• To understand and implement Structures and Unions.
• To familiarize with Files and File Operations.

Week-1: Draw flowcharts for fundamental algorithms.

Week-2: C Programs to demonstrate C-tokens.
Week-3: C Programs on usage of operators.
Week-4: C Programs to demonstrate Decision making and branching (Selection).
Week-5: C Programs to demonstrate different loops.
Week-6: C Programs to demonstrate 1-D arrays.
Week-7: C Programs to demonstrate multi-dimensional arrays.
Week-8: C Programs to demonstrate functions.
Week-9: C Programs on pointers.
Week-10: C Programs to perform operations on Strings with String handling
functions and without String handling functions.
Week-11: C Programs on Structures and Unions.
Week-12: C Programs to demonstrate Files.

Text Books:
1. R.G. Dromey, How to Solve it by Computer, 1/e, Pearson Education, 2006.
2. Reema Thareja, Programming in C, Oxford University Press, AICTE Edition,
2018.

60 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Reference Books:
1. B. A. Forouzan and R. F. Gilberg, Computer Science: A Structured Programming
Approach Using C, 3/e, Cengage Learning, 2007.
2. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, Programming in C, Oxford University Press, AICTE
Edition,
3. B. Gottfried, Programming with C, 3/e, Schaum’s outlines, McGraw Hill (India),
2017.
4. Jeri R. Hanly, Ellot B. Koffman, Problem Solving and Program Design in C, 5/e,
Pearson.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to
• Build algorithm and flowchart for simple problems.
• Use suitable control structures to solve problems.
• Use suitable iterative statements, arrays and modular programming to solve
the problems.
• Implement Programs using pointers and String handling Functions.
• Develop code for complex applications using structures, unions and file
handling features.

61 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
L T P C
B.Tech I/II Sem
0 0 3 1.5
(CH20ABS104) CHEMISTRY LAB
(ECE, EEE, CSE, CSE (AI & ML), IT)

Course Objectives:
• Verify the fundamental concepts with experiments
Note: In the following list, out of 12 experiments, any 10 experiments must be
performed in a semester

List of Chemistry Experiments:

1. Determination of Hardness of a groundwater sample.
2. Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen by Winkler’s method.
3. Conductometric titration of (i) strong acid vs. strong base, (ii) weak acid vs.
strong base.
4. Determination of cell constant and conductance of solutions.
5. Potentiometry - determination of redox potentials and emfs.
6. Determination of Strength of an acid in Pb-Acid battery.
7. Preparation of Bakelite
8. Verify Lambert-Beer’s law.
9. Thin layer chromatography.
10. Identification of simple organic compounds by IR.
11. Preparation of nano material’s by precipitation.
12. Estimation of Ferrous Iron by Dichro metry.
13. PH metric titration of (i) strong acid vs. strong base, (ii) weak acid vs. strong
base

Reference Books:
1. Vogel’s Text book of Quantitative Chemical Analysis, Sixth Edition – Mendham
J et al, Pearson Education, 2012.
2. Chemistry Practical– Lab Manual, First edition, Chandra Sekhar KB, Subba
Reddy GV and Jayaveera KN, SM Enterprises, Hyderabad, 2014.
3. Chemistry Laboratory Manual, Sri Krishna Hitech Publishing Company
Pvt.Ltd,2nd Edition, A Ravi Krishanan, B Tirumalarao, 2020-2021.

62 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
• Determine the cell constant and conductance of solutions.(L3)
• Prepare advanced polymer- Bakelite. (L2)
• Measure the strength of an acid present in secondary batteries.(L3)
• Analyse the IR of some organic compounds.(L3)
• Estimate the amount of dissolved oxygen in water.(L3)

63 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech I/II Sem

L T P C
0 0 3 1.5

(EC20AES202) ELECTRONIC DEVICES & CIRCUITS LAB

(ECE)

Course Objectives:
• To verify the theoretical concepts practically from all the experiments.
• To analyse the characteristics of Diodes, BJT and MOSFET
• To design the amplifier circuits from the given specifications.
• To Model the electronic circuits using tools such as PSPICE / Multisim.

PART A: Electronic Workshop Practice

1. Identification, Specifications, Testing of R, L, C Components (Colour Codes),
Potentiometers, Coils, Gang Condensers, Relays, Bread Boards.
2. Identification, Specifications and Testing of active devices, Diodes, BJTs, JFETs,
LEDs, LCDs, SCR, UJT.
3. Soldering Practice- Simple circuits using active and passive components.
4. Study and operation of Ammeters, Voltmeters, Transformers, Analog and
Digital Multimeter, Function Generator, Regulated Power Supply and CRO.

PART B: List of Experiments: (Execute any 8 experiments).

Note: All the experiments shall be implemented using both Hardware and Software.
1. Verification of Volt- Ampere characteristics of a PN junction diode and find static,
dynamic resistances under forward bias and reverse bias of the diode from the
graphs obtained.
2. Verification of Volt- Ampere characteristics of a Zener diode and find Breakdown
voltage, static and dynamic resistances of the diode from the graphs obtained.
3. Design a full wave rectifier for the given specifications with and without filters,
and verify the given specifications experimentally. Vary the load and find ripple
factor. Draw suitable graphs.
4. Design a Zener diode-based voltage regulator against variations of supply and
load. Verify the same from the experiment.

64 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 5. Verification of the input and output characteristics of BJT in Common
Emitter configuration experimentally and find required h – parameters from the
graphs.
6. Verification of the input and output characteristics of BJT in Common Base
configuration experimentally, and determine required h – parameters from the
graphs.
7. Verification of the output and transfer characteristics of MOSFET (Enhancement
mode) in Common Source Configuration experimentally. Find Threshold voltage
VT, gm, µ & rd.
8. Verification of the output and transfer characteristics of MOSFET (Depletion mode)
in Common Source Configuration experimentally. Find Threshold voltage VT, gm,
µ & rd.
9. Design and analysis of self-bias circuit using BJT.
10. Design and analysis of self-bias circuit using MOSFET.
11. Design a BJT switch.
12. Design a small signal amplifier using BJT (common emitter) for the given
Specifications. Draw the frequency response and find the bandwidth.
13. Design a small signal amplifier using MOSFET (common source) for the given
specification. Draw the frequency response and find the bandwidth.
Tools/Equipment Required: Software Tools like Multisim/P Spice or Equivalent, DC
Power supplies, Multi meters, DC Ammeters, DC Voltmeters, AC Voltmeters, CROs, all
the required active devices.

Course Outcomes:
After the completion of the course students will able to:
• Understand the basic characteristics and applications of basic electronic
devices. (L1)
• Observe the characteristics of electronic devices by plotting graphs.(L2)
• Analyze the Characteristics of UJT, BJT, MOSFET (L3).
• Design MOSFET/ BJT based amplifiers for the given specifications. (L4)
• Simulate all circuits in PSPICE/Multisim. (L5).

65 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

L T P C
B.Tech I/II Sem
2 0 0 0

(CH20AMC201) ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE

(Common to All Branches)
Course Objectives:
• To make the students to get awareness on environment.
• To understand the importance of protecting natural resources, ecosystems for
future generations and pollution causes due to the day-to-day activities of
human life.
• To save earth from the inventions by the engineers.

UNIT – I
Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies: – Definition, Scope and
Importance – Need for Public Awareness.
Natural Resources:
Renewable and non-renewable resources – Natural resources and associated
problems – Forest resources – Use and over – exploitation, deforestation, case
studies – Timber extraction – Mining, dams and other effects on forest and tribal
people – Water resources – Use and over utilization of surface and ground water –
Floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams – benefits and problems – Mineral
resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using
mineral resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes
caused by agriculture and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-
pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case studies. Energy resources.

Learning outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the students will be able to
• Understanding the importance of public awareness. (L2)
• Understanding about the various resources. (L2)

UNIT – II
Ecosystems:
Concept of an ecosystem. – Structure and function of an ecosystem – Producers,
consumers and decomposers – Energy flow in the ecosystem – Ecological succession

66 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 – Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids – Introduction, types,
characteristic features, structure and function of the following ecosystem:
a. Forest ecosystem.
b. Grassland ecosystem.
c. Desert ecosystem.
d. Aquatic ecosystems. (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries)
Biodiversity and Its Conservation:
Introduction: Definition, genetic, species and ecosystem diversity – Bio-geographical
classification of India – Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, Productive use, social,
ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, National and local levels
– India as a mega-diversity nation – Hot-spots of biodiversity – Threats to
biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – Endangered
and endemic species of India – Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ
conservation of biodiversity.

Learning outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the students will be able to
• Understanding about various ecosystems and their characteristics. (L2)
• Understanding the biodiversity and its conservation. (L2)

UNIT – III
Environmental Pollution: Definition, Causes, effects and control measures of
a. Air Pollution
b. Water pollution
c. Soil pollution
d. Marine pollution
e. Noise pollution
f. Thermal pollution
g. Nuclear hazards
Solid Waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban and
industrial wastes –Role of an individual in prevention of pollution – Pollution case
studies – Disaster management: floods, earthquake, cyclone and landslides.

67 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Learning outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the students will be able to
• Understanding about the various sources of pollution. (L2)
• Understanding about the various sources of solid waste and preventive
measures. (L2)
• Understanding about the different types of disasters and their managerial
measures. (L2)

UNIT – IV
Social Issues and the Environment:
From Unsustainable to Sustainable development – Urban problems related to energy
– Water conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management –Resettlement
and rehabilitation of people; its problems and concerns. Case studies – Environmental
ethics: Issues and possible solutions – Climate change, global warming, acid rain,
ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust. Case Studies – Wasteland
reclamation. – Consumerism and waste products Environment Protection Act. – Air
(Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act. –Water (Prevention and control of Pollution)
Act – Wildlife Protection Act – Forest Conservation Act –Issues involved in
enforcement of environmental legislation – Public awareness.
Learning outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the students will be able to
• Understanding about the social issues related to environment and their
protection acts. (L2)
• Understanding about the various sources of conservation of natural resources.
(L2)
• Understanding about the wild life protection and forest conservation acts. (L2)

UNIT – V
Human Population and The Environment:
Population growth, variation among nations. Population explosion – Family Welfare
Programmes. – Environment and human health – Human Rights – Value Education –
HIV/AIDS – Women and Child Welfare – Role of information Technology in
Environment and human health – Case studies.
Field Work: Visit to a local area to document environmental assets River/ forest/
grass/ hill/ mountain–Visit to a local polluted site- Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
Study of common plants, insects, and birds – river, hill slopes.

68 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Learning outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the students will be able to
• Understanding about the population explosion and family welfare programmes. (L2)
• To identify the natural assets and related case studies. (L3)

Text Books:
1. Text book of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate Courses ErachBharucha for
University Grants Commission, Universities Press.
2. Palaniswamy, “Environmental Studies”, Pearson education.
3. S.AzeemUnnisa, “Environmental Studies” Academic Publishing Company.
4. K.Raghavan Nambiar, “Text book of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate
Courses as per UGC model syllabus”, Scitech Publications (India), Pvt. Ltd.
References:
1. Deeksha Dave and E.Sai Baba Reddy, “Textbook of Environmental Science”,
Cengage Publications.
2. M.Anji Reddy, “Text book of Environmental Sciences and Technology”, BS
Publication.
3. J.P.Sharma, Comprehensive Environmental studies, Laxmi publications.
4. J. Glynn Henry and Gary W. Heinke, “Environmental Sciences and
Engineering”, Prentice hall of India Private limited.
5. G.R.Chatwal, “A Text Book of Environmental Studies” Himalaya Publishing
House.
6. Gilbert M. Masters and Wendell P. Ela, “Introduction to Environmental
Engineering and Science, Prentice hall of India Private limited.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
• Understanding multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies and various
renewable and nonrenewable resources. (L2)
• Understand flow and bio-geo- chemical cycles and ecological pyramids. (L2)
• Understand various causes of pollution and solid waste management and
related preventive measures. (L2)
• Apply the rainwater harvesting, watershed management, ozone layer depletion
and waste land reclamation. (L3)
• Apply the concepts of population explosion, value education and welfare
programmes in society. (L3)

69 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech II Sem L T P C
2 0 0 0
(EG20AMC101) SPEECH AND ORAL COMMUNICATION (Mandatory Course)
(Common to All Branches)

Course Objectives:
• To improve the language proficiency of the students in English by practicing
with his/her peers.
• To impart creative skills for professional development.
• To develop the communication skills of the students in both formal and informal
situations.
• To develop extensive speaking skills and comprehension for career growth.
Detailed Syllabus:
Unit-1:
Story Telling (Narrate a story)
1. Biography description (Describe a freedom fighter/politician/athlete/celebrity
etc.)
2. Speech sounds
3. Formal Conversation (Enact official Telephone conversation/Telephone
interview etc.)
Verb forms, Subject -Verb agreement, Vocabulary).
Unit-2:
1. Stress in Speech
2. English Puzzle solving (Finding cross words from table)
3. Fun with English (Speech through grammar-changing tense, voice of the
sentences)
4. Open Talk with CM (Funny interview with class mates) Voice, Speech.
Unit-3:
1. Intonation
2. If I’m a..... What would I do? (Students enact as… and describe their choices
what they would do?)
3. Language Translation (Dialogues/jokes/proverbs/quotations-Regional
language to English)

70 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 4. Mock Assembly (Students enact as speaker, MLA, CM and opposition leaders in
Assembly) Wh- Questions, Question tags.
Unit-4:
1. Tongue twisters / pronounce it…..
2. Humorous Play (Playing jokes/Telling funny dialogues in English)
3. Celebrity Interview (Enact Play), Spotting Errors, Etiquettes
Unit-5:
News Reader (Prepare funny news and read on Dias )
1. Film Review ( A critique on regional language films by students )
2. Movie Script Narration (Subject -Verb agreement, Tenses)
Reference books:
1. K.R Lakshmi Narayanan, A Course book on English, SCITECH publications Pvt.
Ltd,Hyd, 2009.
2. Sanjay Kumar & Pushp Lata, Communication skills, Oxford university
press, New Delhi, 2019.
3. M Ashraf Rizvi, Effective Technical Communication, Tata McGraw- Hill, New
Delhi, 2017.
Additional Learning Resources:
1. https://www.bbc.co.uk/skillswise/english
2. https://www.nonstopenglish.com
3. https://www.grammarly.com/blog/
Course Outcomes:
• Improve the neutral accent and be free from mother tongue influence. (L6)
• Hypothesizing small talks on general topics and learn critiquing
skills by participating in Conversations. (L6)
• Applying Vocabulary and using it in their day-to-day life. (L4)
• Understanding and mastering in verbal and non-verbal communication. (L2)

71 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -III SEM L T P C

3 0 0 3
(MA20ABS302) COMPLEX VARIABLES AND TRANSFORMS
(EEE & ECE)
Course Objectives:
 To understand the knowledge on functions of complex variables. (L2)
 To evaluate improper integrals of complex functions using Residue theorem.
(L5)
 To apply the knowledge on Laplace transforms and its applications in solving
ordinary differential equations. (L3)
 To determine Fourier series of given function in a given interval. (L5)
 To analyze the concepts of Z-transforms in solving Difference equations. (L4)

UNIT – I: Functions of complex variables – Differentiation

Introduction to functions of complex variables - concept of limit & continuity-
Differentiation, Cauchy-Riemann equations in Cartesian and Polar coordinates
(without proof), analytic functions, harmonic functions, finding harmonic conjugate
- construction of analytic function by Milne- Thomson method.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Understand functions of complex variable and its properties.(L2)
 Find derivatives of complex functions.(L1)
 Understand the analyticity of complex functions.(L2)

UNIT – II: Functions of complex variables – Integration

Line Integral - Contour integration, Cauchy’s integral theorem, Cauchy Integral
formula, Cauchy Integral formula for derivatives (All theorems without Proof).
Power Series Expansions: Taylor’s series and Laurent’s series (without proof); zeros of
analytic functions, singularities.
Residues: Evaluation of residue by formula and by Laurent’s series, Cauchy Residue
theorem (without proof), Evaluation of definite integral involving sine and cosine.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Understand the integration of complex functions.(L2)

72 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
  Apply Cauchy’s integral theorem and Cauchy’s integral formula to solve
complex integrals.(L3)
 Understand singularities of complex functions.(L2)
 Evaluate improper integrals of complex functions using Residue
theorem.(L5)

UNIT – III: Laplace Transforms

Definition - Laplace transform of standard functions - existence of Laplace Transform –
Inverse transform – First shifting theorem, Transforms of derivatives and integrals
– Unit step function – Second shifting theorem – Dirac’s delta function –
Convolution theorem – Laplace transform of Periodic function. Differentiation and
integration of transform – solving Initial value problems to ordinary differential
equations with constant coefficients using Laplace transforms.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Understand the concept of Laplace transforms and find the Laplace
transforms of elementary functions.(L2)
 Find the Laplace transforms of general functions using its properties.(L3)
 Understand Laplace transforms of special functions (Unit step function, Unit
Impulse & Periodic).(L2)
 Apply Laplace transforms to solve differential equations.(L3)

UNIT – IV: Fourier series

Fourier coefficients (Euler’s formulae) – Dirichlet conditions for the existence of
Fourier series – functions having discontinuity - Fourier series of even and odd
functions – Fourier series in an arbitrary interval – Half-range Fourier sine and
cosine expansions.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Understand the Fourier series expansion of the given function.(L2)
 Determine Fourier coefficients (Euler’s) and identify existence of Fourier
series of the given function.(L5)
 Determine the Fourier series of given function in Half range interval.(L5)

UNIT – V: Fourier transforms & Z Transforms

73 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Fourier Transforms: Fourier transform – Fourier sine and cosine transforms –
Properties – Inverse transforms – convolution theorem – Finite Fourier Sine and
Cosine transforms.
Z-transform –Z-transforms, Inverse Z-transform – Properties – Damping rule –
Shifting rule – Initial and final value theorems. Convolution theorem – Solution of
Difference equations by Z - transforms.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Find Fourier transforms of given functions.(L1)
 Apply properties of Fourier transforms to different functions.(L3)
 Apply Z transforms to solve difference equations.(L3)

Text Books:
1. B.S. Grewal, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna publishers, 44th
edition.
2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R K Jain and S R K Iyengar, Narosa
Publishing House, New Delhi.
3. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Wiley India

Reference Books:
1. B.V. Ramana, Higher, “Engineering Mathematics”, McGraw Hill publishers.
2. Alan Jeffrey, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Elsevier.
3. Dr. S. Sreenadh, Dr. V. Ramesh Babu, S Ranganadham, Fourier Series and
Transforms, S Chand Publications, 2014
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this Course the student will be able to
CO1:Apply Cauchy-Riemann equations to find the analyticity of complex
functions.(L3)
CO2:Apply Cauchy’s integral formula and Cauchy’s integral theorem to evaluate
CO3:improper integrals along contours.(L3)
CO4:Analyze the concepts of Laplace Transforms to solve ordinary differential
equations. (L4)
CO5:Examine the Fourier series for different functions in half and full range.(L4)

74 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 CO6:Analyze the concepts of Z transforms to solve Difference equations.(L4)

SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING

(Autonomous)
B.Tech -III SEM L T P C

3 0 0 3
(EC20APC301) DIGITAL LOGIC DESIGN
(ECE)
Course Objectives:
 To familiarize with the concepts of different number systems and Boolean
algebra.
 To understand the design techniques of combinational, sequential logic
circuits.
 To understand and analyze the concepts of FSM and PLD’s
 To impart knowledge on operation, characteristics and various configurations
of TTL and CMOS logic families.
 To outline procedures for the analysis and design of combinational and
sequential logic circuits.
 To introduce programmable logic devices.

Unit I
Number Systems, Boolean algebra and Logic Gates: Number systems - binary
numbers, octal, hexadecimal, other binary codes; complements, signed binary
numbers, digital logic operations and gates, basic theorems and properties of
Boolean algebra, Boolean functions, canonical and standard forms, complements
of Boolean functions, two-level NAND and NOR Implementation of Boolean
functions.
Learning Outcomes:
 Summarize advantages of using different number systems. (L2)
 Explain usefulness of different coding schemes and functionality of logic
gates. (L2)
 Apply basic laws and De Morgan’s theorems to simplify Boolean expressions.
(L3)

Unit II
Minimization of Boolean functions and Combinational Logic Circuits: The

75 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Karnaugh map method (up to five variables), product of sums simplifications, don’t
care conditions, Tabular method, Introduction, Combinational circuits, design
procedure, adders, subtractors, 4-bit binary adder/ subtractor circuit, BCD adder,
carry look- a-head adder, binary multiplier, magnitude comparator, decoders and
encoders, multiplexers, demultiplexers.

Learning Outcomes:
 Apply Boolean algebra for describing combinational digital circuits. (L2)
 Compare K- Map and Q-M methods of minimizing logic functions. (L5)

Unit III
Sequential Circuits: Latches, flip-flops, truth tables and excitation tables, timing and
triggering consideration, conversion of flip- flops, design of counters, ripple
counters, synchronous counters, Modulus-n Counter, Ring counter, Johnson
counter, Up-Down counter, registers, shift registers, universal shift register.
Learning Outcomes:
 Describe behavior of Flip-Flops and Latches.(L2)
 Design synchronous sequential circuits using flip flops and construct digital
systems using components such as registers and counters (L4)

Unit IV
Finite State Machine: Types of FSM, capabilities and limitations of FSM, state
assignment, realization of FSM using flip-flops, Mealy to Moore conversion and
vice-versa, reduction of state tables using partition technique, Design of sequence
detector.
Memory and Programmable Logic: RAM, Types of Memories, Memory decoding, ROM,
Types of ROM, Programmable Logic Devices (PLDs): Basic concepts, PROM as PLD,
Programmable Array Logic (PAL) and Programmable Logic Array (PLA).
Learning Outcomes:
 Utilize concepts of state and state transition for analysis and design of
sequential circuits(L3)
 Compare Moore and Mealy machine models.(L5)
 Define RAM, ROM, PROM, EPROM and PLDs. (L1)
 Describe functional differences between different types of RAM & ROM. (L2)

Unit V
76 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 CMOS Logic:
Introduction to logic families, CMOS logic, CMOS logic families; Bipolar Logic and
Interfacing: Bipolar logic, Transistor logic, TTL families, CMOS/TTL interfacing, low
voltage CMOS logic and interfacing, Emitter coupled logic, Comparison of logic
families, Familiarity with standard 74-series and CMOS 40- series-ICs –
Specifications.
Learning Outcomes:
 Analyze various logic families like CMOS, TTL, ECL
 familiar with interfacing between CMOS and TTL

Text Books:
1. M. Morris Mano, “Digital Design”, 3rd Edition, PHI.
2. Charles H.Roth,Jr., “Fundamentals of Logic Design” 5th edition , CENGAGE
Learning 2012.
References:
1. ZviKohavi and Niraj K.Jha, “Switching and Finite Automata Theory, 3rd
Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2010.
2. D.P. Leach, A.P. Malvino, “Digital Principles and Applications”, TMH, 7th
Edition.

Course Outcomes:
After completion of the course, student will be able to
 Understand the properties of Boolean algebra, other logic operations, and
minimization of Boolean functions using Karnaugh map.
 Make use of the concepts to solve the problems related to the logic circuits.
 Analyze the combinational and sequential logic circuits.
 Compare various Programmable logic devices.
 Compare the concepts of RAM and ROM.
 Understand the operation CMOS, TTL logic families, ECL logic families and
interfacing between them.

77 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -III SEM L T P C

3 0 0 3
(EC20APC302) ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS & DESIGN
(ECE)
Course Objectives:
 To design and analyze multi-stage amplifiers using BJT at low and high
frequencies.
 To analyze the effect of negative feedback on amplifier characteristics.
 To understand the basic principles of oscillators and analyze RC & LC
oscillator circuits.
 To understand different types of large signal amplifiers and tuned amplifiers.

Unit I
Multistage Amplifiers and Frequency response: Classification of amplifiers,
Methods of coupling, Cascading transistor amplifiers: CE-CC connection, Miller’s
theorem, CE short circuit current gain obtained with hybrid-pi model, parameter fT,
Cascode transistor configuration, High input resistance transistor circuits, Boot-
strapped Darlington circuit andEmitter coupled difference amplifier.
Learning outcomes:
 Understand basic concepts, need of multistage amplifiers, and various inter-
stage coupling in multi-stage amplifiers. (L2)
 Analyze low frequency and high frequency models of BJT. (L4)
Unit II
Feedback Amplifiers: Classification of feedback amplifiers, Feedback concept, General
characteristics of negative feedback amplifiers, Generalized analysis of feedback
amplifiers using block diagram approach, Performance comparison of feedback
amplifiers, Method of Analysis of Feedback Amplifiers.
Learning outcomes:
 Understand concept of different feedback topologies. (L2)
 Determine the effect of feedback on amplifier characteristics.(L2)
 Analyze characteristics of various types of feedback configurations. (L4)

78 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit III
Oscillators: Oscillator principle, condition for oscillations, types of oscillators, RC phase
shift and Wein bridge oscillators using BJT with the relevant analysis, Generalized
analysis of LC Oscillators, Hartley and Colpitt’s oscillators using BJT with relevant
analysis, Crystal oscillators, Frequency and amplitude stability of oscillators.
Learning outcomes:
 Understand the working principle of oscillator and stability constraints. (L2)
 Analyze different types of RC and LC oscillators, with detailed mathematical
analysis and illustrations. (L4)
Unit IV
Power Amplifiers: Classes of power amplifiers, Class A large signal Amplifiers,
Transformer Coupled Audio power amplifier, Efficiency of Class A Amplifier, Class B
Amplifiers-Push-pull amplifiers and Complementary Symmetry push pull amplifier,
Efficiency of Class B Amplifier, Operation of Class AB, Class C and Class D power
amplifiers, Thermal stability and Heat sink.
Learning outcomes:
 Understand the operation and characteristics of power amplifiers under
different classes of operation. (L2)
 Analyze the efficiency of power amplifiers under different classes of
operation. (L4)
 Understand the concept of heat sink.(L2)

Unit V
Tuned Amplifiers: Introduction, Q-Factor, Capacitance Coupled Single tuned
amplifiers, Double Tuned Amplifiers, Effect of Cascading tuned amplifiers on Band
width, Staggered tuned amplifiers, comparison of single tuned, double tuned and
stagger tuned amplifiers.
Learning outcomes:
 Evaluate the resonant frequency of tuned amplifiers. (L5)
 Understand the operation and characteristics of different tuned amplifiers.
(L4)
Text Books:
1. J. Millman, C.C.Halkias and S. Jit, “Millman’s Electronic Devices and
Circuits”,
Tata McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2019.

79 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 2. S. Salivahanan and N. Suresh Kumar, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”,
McGraw Hill India Pvt. Ltd., 4thEdition, 2020.

References:
1. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuits
Theory”, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 9th Edition, 2006.
2. Sedra A.S. and K.C. Smith, “Micro Electronic Circuits”, Oxford University
Press, 5th Edition.
3. Donald A. Neaman, “Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design”, McGraw Hill
Education, 3rd edition.
Course Outcomes:
After the completion of the course, students will able to
CO1: Understand the working principle of multistage amplifiers, Feedback
amplifiers, power amplifiers and tuned amplifiers. (L2)
CO2: Analyze multistage amplifiers, feedback amplifiers, power amplifiers,
and tuned amplifiers. (L4)
CO3: Design multistage amplifiers, feedback amplifiers, oscillators, power
amplifiers and tuned amplifiers for the given specification.(L6)
CO4: Evaluate the efficiency of large signal (power) amplifiers. (L5)
CO5: Compare the frequency response of Single-stage, Double-stage amplifiers
with Single tuned, double tuned and Stagger tuned amplifiers. (L2)

80 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -III SEM L T P C

3 0 0 3
(EC20APC303) SIGNALS & SYSTEMS
(ECE)
Course Objectives:
 To introduce students to the basic idea of signal and system analysis and its
characterization in time and frequency domains.
 To present Fourier tools through the analogy between vectors and signals.
 To teach concept of sampling and reconstruction of signals.
 To analyze characteristics of linear systems in time and frequency domains.
 To understand Laplace and z-transforms as mathematical tool to analyze
continuous and discrete-time signals and systems.
Unit 1
Signals & Systems: Basic definitions and classification of Signals and Systems
(Continuous time and discrete time), operations on signals, Concepts of Convolution
and Correlation of signals, Analogy between vectors and signals-Orthogonality, mean
square error
Fourier Series: Trigonometric & Exponential, Properties of Fourier series, concept of
discrete spectrum, Illustrative Problems.
Learning outcomes:
 Understand different types of signals and systems. (L2)
 State principles of vector spaces and concept of Orthogonality. (L1)
 Analyze the periodic signals by applying Fourier series. (L4)
Unit II
Continuous Time Fourier Transform: Definition, Computation and properties of
Fourier transform for different types of signals and systems, Inverse Fourier
transform.
Sampling Theory: Statement and proof of sampling theorem of low pass signals,
Illustrative Problems.
Learning outcomes:
 Identify system properties based on impulse response and Fourier analysis.
(L1)
 Analyze the spectral characteristics of signals using Fourier transform. (L3)
 Illustrate signal sampling and its reconstruction. (L4)

81 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit III
Laplace Transform: Definition, ROC, Properties, Inverse Laplace transforms, the S-
plane and BIBO stability, Transfer functions, System Response to standard signals,
Solution of differential equations with initial conditions.
Learning outcomes:
 Understand the limitations of Fourier transform and need for Laplace
transform and develop. (L1)
 Evaluate response of linear systems to known inputs by using Laplace
transforms. (L2)
Unit IV
Signal Transmission through Linear Systems: Linear system, impulse response,
Response of a linear system for different input signals, linear time-invariant (LTI)
system, linear time variant (LTV) system, Transfer function of a LTI system. Filter
characteristics of linear systems. Distortion less transmission through a system, Signal
bandwidth, System bandwidth, Ideal LPF, HPF and BPF characteristics, Causality and
Paley-Wiener criterion for physical realization, Relationship between bandwidth and
rise time, Energy and Power spectral densities, Illustrative Problems.
Learning outcomes:
 Understand the impulse response, transfer characteristics of LTI system and
various filters. (L1)
 Analyze filter characteristics and physical realization of LTI system. (L4)
 Apply the relation between bandwidth and rise time & energy and power
spectral densities in various applications. (L3)

Unit V
Discrete Time Fourier Transform: Definition, Computation and properties of
Discrete Time Fourier transform for different types of signals and systems, Illustrative
Problems.

Z–Transform: Definition, ROC, Properties, Poles and Zeros in Z-plane, The inverse Z-
Transform, System analysis, Transfer function, BIBO stability, System Response to
standard signals, Solution of difference equations with initial conditions, Illustrative
Problems.

Learning outcomes:

82 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
  Apply Discrete Time Fourier transform techniques to analyze discrete-time
signals and systems. (L2)
 Analyze the spectral characteristics of signals using Fourier transform. (L4)
 Evaluate the Fourier transform of Discrete-time signals. (L5)
 Apply transform techniques to analyze discrete-time signals and systems
using Z transforms. (L2)

Text Books:
1. A.V. Oppenheim, A.S. Willsky and S.H. Nawab, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd
Edition, PHI, 2009.
2. Kumar, A. Anand. Signals and systems. PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2012.

References:
1. BP Lathi, “Principles of Linear Systems and Signals”, 2nd Edition, Oxford
University Press, 015.
2. Simon Haykin and Van Veen, “Signals & Systems”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2005.
3. Hwei Hsu, “Schaum's Outline of Signals and Systems”, 4th Edition, TMH,
2019

Course Outcomes:
After completion of the course, student will be able to
CO1: Understand the mathematical description and representation of
continuous- time and discrete-time signals and systems. Also understand
the concepts of various transform techniques. (L2)
CO2: Apply sampling theorem to convert continuous-time signals to discrete-
time signals and reconstruct back, different transform techniques to solve
signals and system related problems. (L3)
CO3: Analyze the frequency spectra of various continuous-time signals using
different transform methods. (L4)
CO4: Analyze the systems based on their properties and determine the
response of them. (L4)
CO5: Analyze the frequency spectra of various discrete-time signals using
different transform methods. (L4)

83 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -III SEM L T P C

3 0 0 3

(BA20AHS301) MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL ANALYSIS

(ECE)
Course Objectives:
 To inculcate the basic knowledge of managerial economics and demand
analysis.
 To make the students learn input-output relationship for optimizing
production and cost analysis.
 To Know the Various types of market structure and pricing methods and
strategy.
 To provide fundamental skills on accounting and to explain the process of
preparing financial statements.
 To give an overview on investment appraisal methods to promote the
students to learn how to plan long-term investment decisions.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS
Managerial Economics – Definition- Nature- Scope - Contemporary importance of
Managerial Economics - Relationship of Managerial Economics with Financial
Accounting and Management. Demand Analysis: Concept of Demand-Demand
Function - Law of Demand - Elasticity of Demand- Significance - Types of Elasticity -
Measurement of elasticity of demand - Demand Forecasting- factors governing
demand forecasting- methods of demand forecasting.
Learning Outcomes:
 Students can understand the basic terms and concepts related to economics
and managerial economics.

 It describes decision making process of a firm.

 Students are able to understand the relationship between price and demand.

 Students can understand the techniques involved in forecasting the Demand.

84 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 UNIT II
THEORY OF PRODUCTION AND COST ANALYSIS
Production Function- Least cost combination- Short-run and Long- run production
function- Isoquants and Isocosts, MRTS - Cobb-Douglas production function - Laws of
returns - Internal and External economies of scale - Cost Analysis: Cost concepts and
cost behavior- Break-Even Analysis (BEA) - Determination of Break Even Point
(Simple Problems)-Managerial significance and limitations of Break- Even Point.
Learning Outcomes:

 Students can understand the various levels of production function.

 It demonstrates the methods of costing a product.
 Students are able to understand the Breakeven point of an organization.

 It explains the merits and demerits of increase in the scale of production.

UNIT III
INTRODUCTION TO MARKETS AND NEW ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT
Market structures: Types of Markets - Perfect and Imperfect Competition - Features of
Perfect Competition- Monopoly-Monopolistic Competition-Oligopoly-Price-Output
Determination - Pricing Methods and Strategies-Forms of Business Organizations- Sole
Proprietorship- Partnership – Joint Stock Companies - Public Sector Enterprises – New
Economic Environment- Economic Liberalization – Privatization - Globalization. GST
and Demonetization.
Learning Outcomes:
 Students can understand about different types of Market structures.
 They are able to find what are the determines of different markets.
 Able to get information about various Pricing strategies.

 Students can understand about various business structures in India.

UNIT IV
INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING AND ANALYSIS
Financial Accounting – Concept - Emerging need and Importance - Double-Entry Book
Keeping- Journal- Ledger – Trial Balance - Financial Statements - Trading Account –
Profit & Loss Account – Balance Sheet (with simple adjustments). Financial Analysis –
Ratios – Liquidity, Leverage, Profitability, and Activity Ratios (simple problems).
Learning Outcomes:

 It explains basic concepts of Accounting.

85 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
  Students can understand preparation of Final Accounts.

 It describes the cycle of Accounting.

 Students can understand the importance of Ratios in measuring the financial
position of a company.
UNIT V
CAPITAL AND CAPITAL BUDGETING
Concept of Capital - Over and Undercapitalization – Remedial Measures - Sources of
Shot term and Long term Capital - Estimating Working Capital Requirements –
Capital Budgeting – Features of Capital Budgeting Proposals – Methods and
Evaluation of Capital Budgeting Projects – Pay Back Method – Accounting Rate of
Return (ARR) – Net Present Value (NPV) – Internal Rate Return (IRR) Method
(simple problems)
Learning Outcomes:
 Students are able to understand the procurement of funds and its effective
utilisation.

 It describes the Time value of money.

 Students are able to understand the difference between working capital and
capital budgeting.
 Students can understand the various types of finance.
TEXT BOOKS:
 Managerial Economics 3/e, Ahuja H.L, S.Chand, 2013.
 Financial Management, I.M.Pandey, Vikas Publications, 2013.

REFERENCES:
1. Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis, 1/e, Aryasri, TMH, 2013.
2. Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis, S.A. Siddiqui and A.S.
Siddiqui, New Age International, 2013.
3. Accounting and Financial Management, T.S.Reddy & Y. Hariprasad Reddy,
Margham
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Should be able to understand managerial economics and demand
analysis.
CO2: Should be able to analyze decisions relating to production and cost
analysis.
CO3: Should be able to evaluate market structures and forms of business.

86 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 CO4: Should be able to assess financial statements and ratios.
CO5: Should be able to apply capital budgeting methods.

SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING

(Autonomous)
B.Tech -III SEM L T P C

0 0 3 1.5
(EC20APC304) BASIC SIMULATION LAB
(ECE)
Course Objectives:
 To simulate various Signals and Systems through MATLAB
 To apply the concepts of signals to determine their energy, power, PSD
etc.
 To teach analyzing signals and sequences using Fourier, Laplace and Z-
transforms.
 To enable to write programs for signal processing applications.

List of Experiments:
1. Write a program to generate various Signals and Sequences: Periodic and
Aperiodic, Unit Impulse, Unit Step, Square, Saw tooth, Triangular,
Sinusoidal, Ramp, Sinc function.
2. Perform operations on Signals and Sequences: Addition, Multiplication,
Scaling, Shifting, Folding, Computation of Energy and Average Power.
3. Write a program to find the trigonometric & exponential Fourier series
coefficients of a rectangular periodic signal. Reconstruct the signal by
combining the Fourier series coefficients with appropriate weightages- Plot
the discrete spectrum of the signal.
4. Write a program to find Fourier transform of a given signal. Plot its
amplitude and phase spectrum.
5. Write a program to convolve two discrete time sequences. Plot all the
sequences.
6. Write a program to find autocorrelation and cross correlation of given
sequences.
7. Write a program to verify Linearity and Time Invariance properties of a
given Continuous/Discrete System.

87 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 8. Write a program to generate discrete time sequence by sampling a
continuous time signal. Show that with sampling rates less than Nyquist
rate, aliasing occurs while reconstructing the signal.
9. Write a program to find magnitude and phase response of first order low
pass and high pass filter. Plot the responses in logarithmic scale.
10. Write a program to find response of a low pass filter and high pass filter,
when a speech signal is passed through these filters.
11. Write a program to generate Complex Gaussian noise and find its mean,
variance, Probability Density Function (PDF) and Power Spectral Density
(PSD).
12. Generate a Random data (with bipolar) for a given data rate (say
10kbps). Plot the same for a time period of 0.2 sec.
13. To plot pole-zero diagram in S-plane/Z-plane of given signal/sequence
and verify its stability.
NOTE: All Experiments are to be simulated using MATLAB or equivalent software.

Course Outcomes:
After completion of the course, student will be able to
CO1: Learn how to use the MATLAB software and know syntax of MATLAB
programming (L1)
CO2: Understand how to simulate different types of signals and system
response.(L2)
CO3: Analyze signals using Fourier, Laplace and Z-transforms. (L4)
CO4: Compute Fourier transform of a given signal and plot its magnitude
and phase spectrum.(L2)
CO5: Verify Sampling theorem, Determine Convolution and Correlation
between signals and sequences. (L5)

Equipment Required:
1. MATLAB.

2. Personal computer with necessary peripherals.

88 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -III SEM L T P C

0 0 3 1.5
(EC20APC305) DIGITAL LOGIC DESIGN LAB
(ECE)
Course Objectives:
 To understand various pin configurations of the Digital ICs used in the
laboratory
 To conduct the experiments and verify the truth tables of various logic
circuits.
 To analyze the logic circuits
 To design sequential and combinational logic circuits and verify their
properties.

List of Experiments:
Part A: Combinational Logic Circuits (any 6 experiments can be performed)
1. Verification of truth tables of the following Logic gates
Two input (i) OR (ii) AND (iii) NOR (iv) NAND (v) Exclusive-OR (vi) NOT
2. Implementation of the given Boolean function using logic gates in both SOP
and POS forms.
3. Design half adder and full adder circuit and verify its functional table.
4. Design half subtractor and full subtractor circuit and verify its functional
table.
5. Implementation and verification of Binary to Gray and Gray to Binary code
converters.
6. Implementation and verification of BCD to Excess-3 and Excess-3 to BCD
code converters.
7. Implementation and verification of BCD to 7 segment decoder.
8. Implementation of 4x1 Multiplexer using logic gates.

Part B: Sequential Logic Circuits (any 6 experiments can be performed)

1. Verification of functional tables of (i) RS Flip–Flop (ii) JK Flip–Flop (iii) D Flip-
Flop.
2. Design a four-bit comparator and verify output.
3. Design and implementation of 8-bit odd/even parity checker.

89 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 4. Verify the operation of 4-bit Universal Shift Register for different Modes of
operation.
5. Design and implementation of a decade counter.
6. Design and implementation of a binary counter.
7. Design a four-bit ring counter using D Flip–Flops/JK Flip Flop and verify
output
8. Design a four bit Johnson’s counter using D Flip-Flops/JK Flip Flops and
verify output

Equipment Required:
1. Digital Trainer kits.

References:
1. M. Morris Mano, “Digital Design”, 3rd Edition, PHI
2. Online learning resources/virtual labs: https://www.vlab.co.in/

Course Outcomes
On completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1: Understand the pin configuration of various digital ICs used in the lab.
CO2: Conduct the experiment and verify the properties of various logic
circuits.
CO3: Design sequential circuits.
CO4: Design combinational circuits.

90 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -III SEM L T P C

0 0 3 1.5

(EC20APC306) ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS & DESIGN LAB

(ECE)
Course Objectives:
 To design and analyze the multistage amplifiers and verify the frequency
response.
 To verify the effect of negative feedback on amplifier parameters.
 To understand the application of positive feedback circuits& generation of
signals.
 To understand the concept of design and analysis of Power amplifiers and
tuned amplifiers

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Two stage RC coupled amplifier
2. Darlington pair amplifier
3. Cascade amplifier
4. Voltage series feedback amplifier
5. Current shunt feedback amplifier
6. RC Phase Shift / Wien Bridge oscillator
7. Hartley / Colpitt’s oscillator
8. Class A power amplifier
9. Class B power amplifier
10. Single tuned amplifier
NOTE: Design & Simulate any 8 experiments with MULTISIM software and verify the
results in hardware lab with discrete components using BJT/JFET/MOSFTET.
Course Outcomes:
After completion of the course, student will be able to
CO1: Understand the characteristics and frequency response of various
amplifiers and determine its gain and bandwidth. (L2)
CO2: Simulate and analyze the performance of negative feedback amplifier
circuits, oscillators and Power amplifiers and single tuned amplifiers. (L4)
CO3: Design a RC and LC oscillator circuits for a given frequency. (L2)
CO4: Calculate the efficiency of the power amplifier circuits. (L2)
91 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 CO5: Distinguish the operating modes of various Power amplifier circuits.(L6)
Software:
1. MULTISIM/ PSPICE/Equivalent Licensed simulation software tool
2. Computer Systems with required specifications
Hardware:
1. Regulated Power supplies ,
2. Analog/Digital Storage Oscilloscopes
3. Analog/Digital Function Generators
4. Digital Multimeters, Decade Résistance Boxes/Rheostats, Decade
Capacitance Boxes,
5. Ammeters & Voltmeters (Analog or Digital)
6. Active & Passive Electronic Components
7. Bread Boards, Connecting Wires & CRO Probes etc.

92 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -III SEM L T P C

1 0 2 2

(IT20ASC301) Application Development using Python

Course Objectives:
The aim of Python Programming Lab is
 To acquire programming skills in core Python.
 To acquire Object Oriented Skills in Python
 To develop the skill of designing Graphics in Python
 To implement various graph using mathematical libraries.
Tasks:
1. Write a program to demonstrate different number datatypes in python
2. Write a program to perform arithmetic operations on numbers
3. Write a program to add two numbers.
4. Write a program to find largest number among three.
5. Write a program to find the given number is even or odd.
6. Write a python program to print a number is positive/negative using if-else.
7. Write a program to find sum of individual digits.
8. Write a program to check the given string is palindrome or not.
9. Write a program to find GCD of two numbers.
10. Use a for loop to print a triangle like the one below. Allow the user to specify
how high the triangle should be
*
**
***
****
11. Write a program takes in the the number of terms and finds the sum of
series:
1 + x2/2 + x3/3 + … xn/n.
12. Write a program to create, concatenate and print a string and accessing sub-
string from a given string.
13. Write a program to construct the following pattern using nested for loop
*

93 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 **
***
****
*****
*****
****
***
**
*
14. Write a program to print prim numbers less than 20.
15. Write a program to find factorial of a number using recursion.
16. Write a program to define a module to find fibonaaci numbers and import
the module to another program.
17. Create a list and perform the following methods
1) insert( ) 2) remove( ) 3) append( ) 4) len( )
5) pop( ) 6)clear( ) meters, or kilometres
18. Write a program to find the cumulative sum of a list where the ith element is
the sum of the first i+1 elements from the original list.
19. Create a dictionary and apply the following methods
1) Print the dictionary items 2) access items 3) useget()
4)change values 5) use len()
20. Write a program to count the frequency of words appearing in a string using
a dictionary
21. Create a tuple and perform the following methods
1) Add items 2) len() 3) check for item in tuple 4)Access
iems
22. Write a program to count the number of vowels present in a string using
sets
23. Write a program which accepts the radius of circle from user and compute
area (use math module).
24. Write a program to count the number of words in a text file.
25. Write a program to read a file and capitalize the first letter of every word in
the file.
26. Write a program to find the area of a rectangle using classes.

94 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 27. Write a program using NumPy, implement different matrix operations in
python.
28. First we import the turtle module. Then create a window, next we create
turtle object and using turtle method we can draw in the drawing board.
29. Write program to draw the following image

30. Write a program using MatPlotlib library, plot the graph with all different plot
types. (Pie Chart, Area Plot, Scatter Plot, Histogram and Bar Graph)
Course Outcomes:
By the end of this lab, the student is able to
CO1: Write, Test and Debug Python Programs. (L1)
CO2: Use Conditionals and Loops for Python Programs. (L3)
CO3: Construct custom modules and functions to handle different
operations.(L3)
CO4: Implement Object oriented concepts through real time scenarios and
handle errors. (L3)
CO5: Design different shapes and objects using turtle graphics. (L4)
Reference Books:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python: How to Think like a Computer Scientist”,
2nd edition,O’Reilly,2016.Or
http://www.ict.ru.ac.za/Resources/cspw/thinkcspy3/thinkcspy3.pdf
2. Paul Barry, “Head First Python a Brain Friendly Guide” 2nd Edition, O’Reilly,
2016
3. Dainel Y.Chen “Pandas for Everyone Python Data Analysis” Pearson
Education, 2019

95 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -III SEM L T P C

2 0 0 0
(CH20AMC301) BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS
(ECE)
Course Objectives:
 To provide basic understanding about life and life Process. Animal an plant
systems.
 To understand what bimolecules, are, their structures are functions.
Application of certain bimolecules in Industry. Brief introduction about
human physiology and bioengineering.
 To understand hereditary units, i.e. DNA (genes) and RNA and their
synthesis in living organism.
 How biology Principles can be applied in our daily life using different
technologies.
 Brief introduction to the production of transgenic microbes, Plants and
animals.

Unit I: Introduction to Basic Biology

Cell as Basic unit of life, cell theory, Cell shapes, Cell structure, Cell cycle.
Chromosomes, Prokaryotic and eukaryotic Cell. Plant Cell, Animal Cell, Plant
tissues and Animal tissues, Brief introduction to five kingdoms of classification.
Learning Outcomes:
After completing this unit, the student will be able to
 Summarize the basis of life. (L1)
 Understand the difference between lower organisms (prokaryotes) from
higher organisms (eukaryotes). (L2)
 Understand how organisms are classified. (L3)

Unit II: Introduction to Biomolecules:

Carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, Vitamins and minerals, Nucleic acids (DNA and RNA)
and their types. Enzymes, Enzyme application in Industry. Large scale production
of enzymes by Fermentation.
Learning Outcomes:

96 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 After completing this unit, the student will be able to
 Understand what are biomolecules, their role in living cells, structure,
function and how they are produced. (L2)
 Analyze the relationship between the structure and function of nucleic acids.
(L4)
 Summarize the applications of enzymes in industry. (L2)
 Understand what is fermentation and its applications of fermentation in
industry. (L2)

Unit III: Human Physiology

Nutrition: Nutrients or food substances. Digestive system, Respiratory system,
(aerobic and anaerobic Respiration). Respiratory organs, respiratory cycle.
Excretory system.
Learning Outcomes:
After completing this unit, the student will be able to
 Understand nutrients are present in our body (L2)
 Understand the mechanism and process of important human functions (L2)

Unit IV:
Introduction to Molecular Biology and recombinant DNA Technology:
Prokaryotic gene and Eukaryotic gene structure. DNA replication, Transcription and
Translation. rDNA technology. Introduction to gene cloning.
Learning Outcomes:
After completing this unit, the student will be able to
 Understand and Explain about gene structure and replication in prokaryotes
and Eukaryotes (L2)
 Understand genetic material is replicated, RNA and proteins are synthesized.
(L2)
 Understand about recombinant DNA technology and its application in
different
fields.(L2)
 Understand the gene cloning. (L2)

Unit V:
Application of Biology:Brief introduction to industrial Production of Enzymes,

97 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Pharmaceutical and therapeutic Proteins, Vaccines and antibodies. Basics of
biosensors, biochips, Bio fuels, and Bio Engineering. Basics of Production of
Transgenic plants and animals.
Learning Outcomes:
After completing this unit, the student will be able to Understand.
 Understand biology is applied for production of useful products for
mankind.(L2)
 Understand the biosensors, biochips etc. (L2)
 Understand transgenic plants and animals and their production (L2)

Course Outcomes:
After studying the course, the student will be able to:
CO1: Analyze about cells and their structure and function. Different types of
cells and basics for classification of living Organisms.
CO2: Analyze about biomolecules, their structure and function and their role in
the living organisms. How biomolecules are useful in Industry.
CO3: Analyze about human physiology.
CO4: Analyze about genetic material, DNA, genes and RNA how they replicate,
pass and preserve vital information in living Organisms.
CO5: Apply biological Principles in different technologies for the production of
medicines and Pharmaceutical molecules through transgenic microbes,
plants and animals.
Text books:
1. P.K.Gupta, Cell and Molecular Biology, 5th Edition, Rastogi Publications -
2. U. Satyanarayana. Biotechnology, Books & Allied Ltd 2017
Reference Books:
1. N. A. Campbell, J. B. Reece, L. Urry, M. L. Cain and S. A. Wasserman,
“Biology: A Global Approach”, Pearson Education Ltd, 2018.
2. T Johnson, Biology for Engineers, CRC press, 2011
3. J.M. Walker and E.B. Gingold, Molecular Biology and Biotechnology 2nd ed..
Panima Publications. PP 434.
4. David Hames, Instant Notes in Biochemistry –2016
5. Phil Tunner, A. Mctennan, A. Bates & M. White, Instant Notes – Molecular
Biology –2014

98 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -III SEM L T P C

2 0 0 0
(MA20AMC301) LOGICAL SKILLS FOR PROFESSIONALS-II
(Mandatory Course)
Course Objectives:
 To learn the basic methods to find HCF, LCM Factors, Simplification, Pipes,
Alligation or Mixture, Table, Bar Graphs and Pie Chart concepts.
 To understand the logic behind the Syllogism, Calender, Clocks and Number
Series Analogy concepts.
UNIT I
HCF, LCM Factors:
Find the HCF and LCM of the given numbers by using Factorization method.
Find the HCF and LCM of the given numbers by using Division method.
Simplification:
Using BODAMS rule to find out the value of a given expression.
Using Vernacular rule to find out the value of a given expression.
UNIT II
Pipes
Find the how much time taken to fill the tank by opening one pipe, two pipe and one
after another.
Alligation or Mixture
Using Ratio and proportion to solve the mixture problems.
To find quickly calculate the price of a mixture, given that it is a mix of two elements
having different prices.
UNIT III
Data Interpretation :
Table, Bar Graphs
Find the Average sales of all branches for the respective years.
Find the ratio of the total sales of respective branches.
Pie Charts
Study the Pie chart and the table answer the questions based on them.
Find the central angle of the components.
UNIT IV: Syllogism
Type-I: Different types of Venn diagrams with their implications.

99 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Type-II: Analyse the figure carefully and then answer certain questions regarding the
given data.
UNIT V:
Calendars
Find the day of the week on a given date, Find the ordinary year and Leap year
Clocks
Find the angle between the hour hand and minute hand of a clock, when the hands
are at right angles.
Number Series Analogy
Choosing a similarly related pair as the given number pair on the basis of the relation
between the numbers in each pair.
Choosing a number similar to a group of numbers on the basis of certain common
properties that they possess.
Text Books:
1. Quantitative Aptitude, 2012, Dr. R.S. Aggarwal, S. Chand and Company Ltd,
New Delhi.
2. A Modern Approach to Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning, 2012, Dr. R.S.
Aggarwal, S. Chand and Company Ltd, New Delhi.
Reference Books:
1. Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, 14/e, 2010, Abhijit
Guha, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, New Delhi.
2. Course in Mental Ability & Quantitative Aptitude, 3/e, 2012, Edgar Thorpe,
Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, New Delhi.
3. Fast Track Objective Arithmetic, 2012, Rajesh Verma, Arihant Publications,
Meerut.
4. Reasoning and Aptitude, 2013, Nem Singh, Made Easy Publications, New
Delhi.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Demonstrate knowledge basic mathematics to develop analytical skills to
solving problems of HCF, LCM Factors and Simplification.
CO2: Demonstrate knowledge basic mathematics to develop analytical skills to
solving problems of Pipes, Alligation or Mixture.
CO3: Demonstrate knowledge basic mathematics to develop analytical skills to
solving problems of Table, Bar Graphs and Pie Chart.
CO4: Analyze the techniques in Syllogism.
CO5: Analyze the techniques in Calender, Clocks and Number Series
Analogyconcepts

100 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech- III Sem. L T P C

2 0 0 0
(EG20AMC301 )ENHANCING ENGLISH LANGUAGE SKILLS

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To enhance communication skills through listening, speaking, reading, and writing.

To improve language proficiency of the students for career devel opment.
To train students to use language appropriately for interview skills, group
discussion and public speaking.
To develop confidence in the students to use English in everyday situations.
To provide training and opportunities to participate in formal and
informal communication.

UNIT- I
1. Greetings-Introducing oneself and others
2. Just A Minute (JAM) & Role play
3. Prepositions, Word formation

Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module, the learners will be able to

Respond general questions on familiar topics by introducing one self and others
Comprehend short talks on general topics.
Use grammatical structures effectively and meaningfully.

UNIT- II
1. Oral Presentations – Technical presentations
2. Letter Writing- Formal and Informal, Email Writing
3. Articles, Punctuation.

Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to Make formal oral presentations
using effective strategies
Write formal letters and e-mail writing appropriately in formal contexts
without any mistakes
Use articles and use punctuation contextually.

101 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 UNIT – III
1. Communication – Verbal and Non- verbal communication
2. Telephone Etiquettes
3. Tenses,Subject-verb agreement, Prefixes & suffixes

Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module, the learners will be able to

Understand non-verbal features of communication and holdFormal& informal

conversations
Use correct tense forms and structures in speech and writing
Use grammatical structures aptly.

UNIT – IV
1. Resume Writing and Technical Report writing
2. Book/Film review
3. Synonyms and Antonyms, Vocabulary building

Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module, the learners will be able to

Write Resume appropriately and ready for an interview.

Review a book/film
Edit short texts by correcting errors

UNIT – V
1. Group Discussions
2. Debate
3. Interview Skills

Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
Participate in formal & informal discussions and speak clearly on a
specific topic
Understand how to face interviews effectively.
Comprehend, discuss and respond to academic texts orally and in writing

COURSE OUTCOMES
Use English language, both written and spoken, competently and correctly.
Improve comprehension and fluency of speech.

102 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Hone the communication skills to meet the challenges of their
careers successfully.
Gain confidence in using English in verbal situations.
Strengthen communication skills in different contexts like
formal and informal.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Krishna Mohan & NP Singh, Speaking English Effectively, 2 nd Edition,2011.

2. MAshrafRizvi,EffectiveTechnicalCommunication,TataMcGra w - Hill, New
Delhi,2017.

3. Francis Soundararaj,Basics of Communication in English: Soft Skills for

Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing, New Delhi: Macmillan-2012.

4. ChaseR. Tarver&Kristin L. Johannsen, Pathways: Listening, Speaking and

Critical Thinking. Heinley ELT; 2nd Edition, 2018.
5. Meenakshi Raman, Technical Communication, Oxford University Press,2008
6. Raymond Murphy, English Grammar in Use, Cambridge University
th
Press,4 Edition,2012.

103 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -IV SEM L T P C

3 0 0 3
(CS20AES401)DATASTRUCTURES USING C
(ECE, EEE, ME, CE)
Course Objectives:
 To familiarize with basic techniques of algorithm analysis.
 To familiarize Stacks, Queues using Arrays and Linked List.
 To Understand Searching and Sorting techniques.
 To learn the concepts of different types of trees and its operations.
 To familiarize with graph algorithms.
Unit I
Data Structures: Introduction to Data Structures, Time and Space Complexity,
Asymptotic Notations. Stack, Stack operations, Implementation using arrays,
Applications of stack, Queue, Queue operations, Implementation using arrays,
various Queue Structures, Applications of queue.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Analyze the given algorithm to find the time and space complexities.(L4)
 Develop the applications of stack and queue using arrays.(L3)

Unit II
Linked lists: Single linked list, double linked list, Circular linked list, operations on
linked lists, Applications of Linked List. Implementation of Stack using Pointers,
Implementation of Queue using Pointers.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Implement Stack and Queues using Pointers.(L3)
 Construct the linked lists for various applications.(L4)

Unit III
Searching Techniques: Linear Search and Binary Search.
Sorting Techniques: Selection Sort, Insertion sort, Merge Sort, Quick Sort, Heap sort.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Select sorting technique for a given sorting.(L3)
 Construct Heap and its implementation.(L4)

104 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit IV
Trees: Vocabulary and Definitions, Binary Tree, Implementation, Binary Tree Traversal,
Binary Search Tree, Implementation, Heap Trees.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Explain the concept of a tree.(L2)
 Compare different tree structures.(L4)
 Apply Trees for indexing.(L3)

Unit V
Graph Theory: Graphs Terminology, Graph Traversals, Shortest Paths, Minimum
Spanning Trees- Prims’ Algorithm, Kruskal’s Algorithm.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Recognize the importance of Graphs in solving real world problems.(L2)
 Apply various graph traversal methods to applications.(L3)
 Design a minimum cost solution for a problem using spanning trees.(L4)

Text Books:
1. Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, Mark Allen Weiss,Second Edition,
2002,Pearson.
2. Introduction to Algorithms, Thomas H. Cormen, Charles E. Leiserson, Ronald
L.Rivest, Clifford Stein, Third Edition, 2010,PHI.
3. Data Structures and Algorithms Made Easy by Narasimha Karumanchi, 2020,
Career Monk Publications.
Reference Books:
1. Fundamental of Data Structures in C, Horowitz, Sahani, Anderson-Freed,
Second Edition, 2008, Universities Press.
2. Classic Data Structures, Debasis Samantha, Second Edition, 2009,PHI
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Analyze the problems using asymptotic notations.(L4)
CO2: Apply Stack, Queues and linked list to solve different applications.(L3)
CO3: Demonstrate suitable sorting techniques for the real world problem.(L4)
CO4: Implementtreestructuresindifferentpatternsofrepresentationofdata.(L3)
CO5: Analyze the given problem using graph traversal techniques.(L4)

105 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -IV SEM L T P C

3 0 0 3

(MA20ABS402) PROBABILITY THEORY AND STOCHASTIC PROCESSES

(ECE)
Course Objectives:
 To gain the knowledge of the basic probability concepts and acquire skills in
handling situations involving more than one random variable and functions of
random variables.
 To understand the principles of random signals and random processes.
 To known the Spectral and temporal characteristics of Random Process.
 To be acquainted with systems involving random signals.
 To gain knowledge of standard distributions that can describe real life
phenomena.
Unit I
Probability Introduced Through Sets and Relative Frequency: Experiments and
Sample Spaces, Discrete and Continuous Sample Spaces, Events, Probability
Definitions and Axioms, Mathematical Model of Experiments, Probability as a Relative
Frequency, Joint Probability, Conditional Probability, Total Probability, Bayes’
Theorem, Independent Events.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand the fundamental concepts of probability (L1).

Unit II
Random Variable: Definition of a Random Variable, Conditions for a Function to be a
Random Variable, Classifications of Random Variable, Distribution and Density
functions and its properties, Distribution & Density functions: Binomial, Poisson,
Uniform, Gaussian, Exponential, Rayleigh, Conditional Distribution & Density
functions.

Operations on Single Random Variable: Introduction, Expectation of a random

variable and its Properties, Moments-moments about the origin, Central moments,
Variance and Skewness, Moment generating function, characteristic function,
Inequalities- Chebyshev’s inequality, Markov’s inequality.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand the fundamental concepts of random variables, and conditional
probability. (L1)

106 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
  Evaluate the different probability distribution and density functions. (L2)
 Apply the knowledge to the sum of random variables, central limit theorem in
communication system (L2).
 Evaluate the single and multiple random variable concepts to expectation,
variance and moments (L4).
Unit III
Multiple Random Variables: Vector Random Variables, Joint Distribution Function and
its properties, Joint Density Function and its Properties, Marginal Distribution
Functions, Conditional Distribution and Density – Point Conditioning, Interval
conditioning, Central Limit Theorem, (Without Proof)-Unequal & Equal Distributions.

Operations on Multiple Random Variables: Expected Value of a Function of Random

Variables, Joint Moments about the Origin, Joint Central Moments, Joint Moment
Generating Function, Joint Characteristic Functions, Jointly Gaussian Random
Variables: Two Random Variables case, N Random Variable case.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand the fundamental concepts of multiple random variables, and
conditional probability. (L1)
 Evaluate the Joint probability distribution and Joint density functions. (L2)
 Evaluate the multiple random variable concepts to expectation, variance and
moments (L4).

Unit IV
Random Processes-Temporal Characteristics: The Random Process Concept,
Classification of Processes, Deterministic and Nondeterministic Processes,
Distribution and Density Functions, joint Distribution and Joint Density Function,
Independent Random Process, Stationary Random Processes, Wide-Sense
Stationary, Strict-Sense Stationary.
Time Averages of a Random Process, Ergodic Theorem and Ergodic Processes,
Autocorrelation Function and Its Properties, Cross-Correlation Function and its
Properties, Covariance Functions, Gaussian Random Processes, Poisson Random
Process.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand and analyze continuous and discrete-time random processes (L1).
 Analyze the concepts and its properties of auto correlation, cross correlation
functions (L3).

107 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit V
Random Processes-Spectral Characteristics: The Power Density Spectrum and its
Properties, Relationship between Power Spectrum and Autocorrelation Function, The
Cross-Power Density Spectrum and its Properties, Relationship between Cross-Power
Spectrum and Cross-Correlation Function.
Learning Outcomes:
 Analyze the concepts and its properties power spectral density (L3).

Course Outcomes:
After completion of the course, student will be able to
CO1: Analyze and understand the concepts of Probability.
CO2: Analyze the concept of Single Random Variable and evaluate the operations that
may be performed on a single Random variable.
CO3: Analyze the concepts of Multiple Random Variable and evaluate the operations
that may be performed on a multiple Random variable.
CO4: Analyze the concepts of Random Process and evaluate the Temporal
characteristics of Random Processes.
CO5: Analyze the concepts of Random Process and evaluate the Spectral characteristics
of Random Processes.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peyton Z. Peebles, “Probability, Random Variables & Random Signal
th
Principles”, 4 Edition, TMH,2002.
2. Probability Theory and Stochastic Processes-Mallikarjuna Reddy,cengage
Learning.

REFERENCES:
1. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, 3 rd Edition, Wiley,2010.
Athanasios Papoulis and S. Unnikrishna Pillai, “Probability, Random Variables and
Stochastic Processes”, 4th Edition, PHI,2002
2. Henry Stark and John W.Woods, “Probability and Random Processes with
Application to Signal Processing,” 3rd Edition, Pearson Education,2002.
3. George R. Cooper, Clave D. MC Gillem, “Probability Methods of Signal and
System Analysis,” 3rd Edition, Oxford,1999.
4. Dr. A. Singaravelu, Probability and Statistics, Meenakshi Agency, 2017

108 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -IV SEM L T P C

3 0 0 3

(EC20APC401) ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS

(ECE)
Course Objectives
 To introduce various modulation and demodulation techniques of Analog
communication system.
 To analyze different parameters of Analog communication techniques.
 Know Noise Figure in AM & FM receiver systems.
 Understand Function of various stages of AM, FM transmitters and Know
Characteristics of AM &FM receivers.
 Understand the concepts of information theory.

Unit I
Introduction: Elements of communication systems, Information, Messages and
Signals, Modulation, Modulation Methods, Modulation Benefits and Applications.
Amplitude Modulation & Demodulation: Baseband and carrier communication,
Amplitude Modulation (AM), Rectifier detector, Envelope detector, Double sideband
suppressed carrier (DSB-SC) modulation & its demodulation, Switching modulators,
Ring modulator, Balanced modulator, Frequency mixer, sideband and carrier power
of AM, Generation of AM signals, Single sideband (SSB) transmission, Time domain
representation of SSB signals & their demodulation schemes (with carrier, and
suppressed carrier), Generation of SSB signals, Vestigial sideband (VSB) modulator
& demodulator, Frequency division multiplexing (FDM).
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand the concepts of Amplitude Modulation and demodulation
techniques. (L1)
 Apply the concepts to solve problems in Amplitude modulation Schemes. (L2)
 Analyse frequency spectra of modulated signals used in various amplitude
modulation (L3)
 Compare the Performance of different amplitude modulation techniques. (L4)

109 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit II
Angle Modulation & Demodulation: Concept of instantaneous frequency, Generalized
concept of angle modulation, Bandwidth of angle modulated waves – Narrow band
frequency modulation (NBFM) and Wide band FM (WBFM), Phase modulation,
Verification of Frequency modulation bandwidth relationship, Features of angle
modulation, Generation of FM waves-Indirect method, Direct generation;
Demodulation of FM, Band pass limiter, Practical frequency demodulators, Small
error analysis, Pre-emphasis, & De-emphasis filters, FM Capture Effect.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand the concepts of Angle modulation and demodulation techniques.
(L1)
 Understand importance Pre-emphasis & de-emphasis circuit in FM modulation.
(L1)
 Apply the concepts to solve problems in Angle modulation Schemes. (L2)
 Analyse frequency spectra of modulated signals used in various angle
modulation (L3)

Unit III
Noise in Communication Systems: Thermal noise, Time domain representation of
narrowband noise, filtered white noise, Signal to noise ratio & probability of error,
Noise equivalent bandwidth, Effective noise temperature, and Noise figure, Baseband
systems with channel noise, Performance analysis (i.e. finding SNR expression) of
AM, DSB-SC, SSB-SC, FM, PM in the presence of noise.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand different types of noise and sources that effect the performance of
the communication system. [L1]
 Analyse performance of Analog communication system in the presence of
noise. [L3]
 Compare the performance of communication system by evaluating figure of
merit for different schemes of modulation. [L4]

Unit IV
Analog Pulse Modulation Schemes: Pulse amplitude modulation – Natural sampling,
flat top sampling and Pulse amplitude modulation (PAM) & demodulation, Pulse-Time
Modulation – Pulse Duration and Pulse Position modulations, and demodulation
schemes, Illustrative Problems.
Radio Receiver: Working principle of Super heterodyne AM and FM Receivers along

110 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 with suitable block diagrams, Sensitivity, Selectivity and fidelity.

Learning Outcomes:
 Understand the concepts of Analog Pulse Modulation and Demodulation
techniques. [L1]
 Understand the concepts of AM and FM receivers. [L1]
 Apply the concepts to solve problems in Analog pulse modulation schemes.
[L2]
 Analyse the performance of AM and FM receivers.[L3]
 Compare the Performance of different Analog Pulse Modulation techniques.[L4]
Unit V
Information Theory: Introduction, Information and Entropy, and its properties, source
coding Theorem, Huffman coding, Discrete Memoryless channels, Mutual
Information, and its properties, Channel capacity, Channel coding Theorem,
differential entropy and mutual information, Information capacity theorem,
implication of information capacity theorem, Rate Distortion, Illustrative problems.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand the concepts of information theory and different coding
techniques.[L1]
 Analyse Binary symmetric channel. [L3]
 Design the channel performance using information theory. [L4]
 Derive equation for Entropy, Mutual information and channel capacity for all
types of channels. [L2]
Course Outcomes
After completion of the course, student will be able to
CO1: Understand the concepts of various Amplitude, Angle and Pulse Modulation
schemes.
CO2: Apply the concepts to solve problems in Analog and pulse modulation
schemes. (L2)
CO3: Analysis of Analog communication system in the presence of noise. (L3)
CO4: Compare and contrast design issues, advantages, disadvantages and
limitations of various modulation schemes in Analog communication
systems.(L4)
CO5: Solve basic communication problems & calculate information rate and
channel capacity of a discrete communication channel (L5)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John Wiley & Sons Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems,”,3rd Edition,
2010.

111 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 2. Dr.Sanjay Sharma, Communication systems, S.K.Katari & Sons 6th Edition,
2013.

REFERENCES:
1. Bruce Carlson, & Paul B. Crilly, “Communication Systems – An Introduction to
Signals & Noise in Electrical Communication”, McGraw-Hill International
Edition, 5th Edition, 2010
2. J. G. Proakis, M Salehi, Gerhard Bauch, “Modern Communication
SystemsUsingMATLAB,” CENGAGE, 3rd Edition, 2013.
3. P.Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems,” 3rd Edition,
Oxford Univ. press, 2006

112 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -IV SEM L T P C

3 0 0 3

(EC20APC402)ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES AND TRANSMISSION LINES

(ECE)
Course Objectives:
The main objectives of this course are to understand
 To introduce fundamentals of static and time varying electromagnetic fields.
 To teach problem solving in Electromagnetic fields using vector calculus.
 To demonstrate the concepts of Static and time varying Maxwell equations.
 To demonstrate Wave equations in different media for normal and oblique
incidence.
 To introduce various concepts of transmission lines and their practical
applications.
Unit I
Electrostatics: Review of Co-ordinate Systems & Vector Calculus , Coulomb’s Law,
Electric Field Intensity – Fields due to Different Charge Distributions, Electric Flux
Density, Gauss Law and Applications, Electric Potential, Relations Between E and
V, Maxwell’s Two Equations for Electrostatic Fields, Electric Dipole, Energy Density,
Convection and Conduction Currents, Dielectric Constant, Linear, Isotropic and
Homogeneous Dielectrics, Continuity Equation, Relaxation Time, Poisson’s and
Laplace’s Equations, Capacitance – Parallel Plate, Coaxial, Spherical Capacitors.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand basic laws of static electric field. (L1)
 Derive the Maxwell’s equations for electrostatic fields. (L3)
 Solve problems applying laws of electrostatics. (L3)

Unit II
Magneto Statics: Biot-Savart Law, Ampere’s Circuital Law and Applications, Magnetic
Flux Density, Maxwell’sTwo Equations for Magneto static Fields, Magnetic Scalar
and Vector Potentials, Forces due to Magnetic Fields, Ampere’s Force Law,
Inductances and Magnetic Energy.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand basic laws of static magnetic field. (L1)
 Derive the Maxwell’s equations for magnetic fields. (L3)
 Solve problems applying laws of magneto statics. (L3)
Unit III

113 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Maxwell’s Equations (Time Varying Fields): Faraday’s Law and Transformer E.M.F,
Inconsistency of Ampere’s Law and Displacement Current Density, Maxwell’s
equations for time varying fields, Maxwell’s Equations in Different Final Forms and
Word Statements, Boundary Conditions of Electromagnetic fields: Dielectric-
Dielectric and Dielectric-Conductor Interfaces.
Learning Outcomes:
 Derive the Maxwell’s equations for electromagnetic fields. (L3)
 Apply the boundary conditions of electromagnetic fields at the interface of
different media. (L2).
Unit IV

EM Wave Characteristics: Waves – Definition, Wave Equations for Conducting and Perfect
Dielectric Media, Uniform Plane, All Relation between E & H Sinusoidal variations, Wave
Propagation in Lossless and Conducting Media, Conductors & Dielectrics – Characterization,
Wave Propagation in Good Conductors and Good Dielectrics.
Reflection and Refraction of Plane Waves – Normal and Oblique Incidences, Brewster
Angle, Critical Angle and Total Internal Reflection, Surface Impedance, Poynting Vector, and
Poynting Theorem.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand concept of wave propagation through the Maxwell’s equations.
(L1)
 Derive wave equations for different media (L3)
 Understand principles of reflections and refraction for different incidences. (L1)
 State concept of power flow using Poynting vector. (L2)
Unit V

Transmission Lines: Types, Transmission line parameters, Transmission line equivalent

circuit, Transmission line equations, input impedance, standing wave ratio, Phase and Group
Velocities, Infinite Line, Lossless lines, distortion less lines, Transmission of finite length -
half wave, quarter wave transmission line, Smith chart, graphical analysis of transmission
lines using Smith chart, Illustrative Problems.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand the principles of transmission lines and concept of smith chart.(L1)
 Derive the input impedance of transmission line.(L3)
 Finding the line parameters through problem solving.(L4)
 Study the applications of different lengths of transmission lines.(L2)
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course the student can able to

114 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 CO1: Understanding the basic laws and applications of electromagnetic fields
(L2)
CO2: Evaluate the problems related to electromagnetic fields (L3)
CO3: Analyze Maxwell equations for static and time varying fields (L3)
CO4: Analyze electric and magnetic fields at the interface of different media (L3)
CO5: Evaluate electric and magnetic fields and calculates different angles (L5)
CO6: Evaluate transmission lines with equivalent circuit and their characteristics
with various lengths (L2)

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Matthew N.O. Sadiku, “Elements of Electromagnetics”, 4th edition. Oxford
Univ. Press,2008.
2. E.C. Jordan and K.G. Balmain, “Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating
Systems”, 2nd
3. Edition, PHI, 2000

REFERENCES:
1. John D. Krauss, “Electromagnetics”, 4th Edition,McGraw- Hill publication1999.
2. William H. Hayt Jr. and John A. Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, 7th
edition.,TMH, 2006.
3. Electromagnetics, Schaum’s outline series, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
publications,2006.

115 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -IV SEM L T P C

3 0 0 3

(EC20APC403) LINEAR & DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND APPLICATIONS

(ECE)

Course Objectives:
 To introduce the basic building blocks of linear integrated circuits.
 To teach the linear and non-linear applications of operational amplifiers.
 To introduce the theory and applications of PLL.
 To introduce the concepts of waveform generation and introduce some special
function ICs.
 Exposure to digital IC’s
 To create combinational circuits &sequential circuits using HDLs.

Unit I
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER: Introduction, Classification of IC’s, basic information and
features of Op-Amp IC741, the ideal Operational amplifier, Op-Amp internal circuit,
characteristics - DC and AC.
LINEAR APPLICATIONS OF OP-AMP: Inverting and non-inverting amplifiers, adder,
subtractor, Instrumentation amplifier, AC amplifier, V to I and I to V converters,
Integrator and differentiator.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand the basic building blocks of Op-Amps & specialized ICs. (L2)
 Understand the DC and AC performance characteristics of Op-Amps. (L2)
 Apply knowledge on linear applications of Op-Amps. (L3)

Unit II
NON-LINEAR APPLICATIONS OF OP-AMP: Sample and Hold circuit, Log and Antilog
amplifier, multiplier and divider, Comparators, Schmitt trigger, Multivibrators,
Triangular and Square waveform generators, Oscillators
TIMER AND PHASE LOCKED LOOPS: Introduction to IC 555 timer, monostable and
astable operations and applications, Schmitt trigger, PLL - introduction, basic
principle, phase detector/comparator, voltage controlled oscillator (IC 566),
applications of PLL.

116 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Learning Outcomes:
 Understand the specialized ICs such as VCO and PLL. (L2)
 Apply knowledge on non-linear applications of Op-Amps. (L3)
 Analyze and create various circuits using Op-Amps and 555 timer. (L5)

UNIT III
VOLTAGE REGULATOR: Introduction, Series Op-Amp regulator, IC Voltage Regulators,
IC 723 general purpose regulators, Switching Regulator.
D to A & A to D CONVERTERS: Introduction, basic DAC techniques - weighted resistor
DAC, R-2R ladder DAC, inverted R-2R DAC, A to D converters - parallel comparator
type ADC, counter type ADC, successive approximation ADC and dual slope ADC,
DAC and ADC Specifications.
Learning Outcomes:
 Apply the specialized ICs of Voltage Regulator. (L3)
 Analyze the operation & characteristics of data converters. (L4)

Unit IV
HARDWARE DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE: Introduction to Verilog - structural
Specification of logic circuits, behavioural specification of logic circuits, hierarchical
Verilog Code, Verilog for combinational circuits - conditional operator, if-else
statement, case statement, for loop; using storage elements with CAD tools-using
Verilog constructs for storage elements, flip-flop with clear capability, using Verilog
constructs for registers and counters.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand the concepts of Verilog Language. (L1)
 Understand and analyze the syntax of HDL. (L3)
Unit V
COMBINATIONAL LOGIC CIRCUITS: Logic gates using 74XX ICs, Adders,
Subtractors, Four-bit parallel adder, Comparator, Encoder, Priority Encoder,
Decoder, BCD-to-7- segment decoder, Multiplexer, Demultiplexer. Verilog/VHDL
models for the above standard building block ICs.
SEQUNTIAL CIRCUITS USING ICs: Latches, Flip Flops, Review of design of State
machines; Standard building block ICs for Shift registers, parallel / serial conversion,
shift register counters, Ring counters; Johnson counters, LFSR counter;
Verilog/VHDL models for the above standard building block ICs.
Learning Outcomes:
 Design of Combinational logic circuits using Verilog. (L4)
 Design of Sequential logic circuits using Verilog. (L4)

117 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Course Outcomes:
CO1: List out the characteristics of Linear and Digital ICs.
CO2: Discuss the various applications of linear & Digital ICs.
CO3: Solve the application based problems related to linear and digital ICs.
CO4: Analyze various applications based circuits of linear and digital ICs.
CO5: Design the circuits using either linear ICs or Digital ICs from the given
specifications.
CO6: Develop digital circuits using HDL.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. D. Roy Choudhury, Shail B. Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuit”, 4thedition (2012),
New Age International Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi, India.
2. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, “OP-AMP and Linear Integrated Circuits”, 4thedition
(2012), Prentice Hall / Pearson Education, New Delhi.
3. John F.Wakerly,“ Digital Design Principles and Practices” 4thedition, Pearson
Education., 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sergio Franco (1997), Design with operational amplifiers and analog integrated
circuits, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
2. Gray, Meyer (1995), Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits, Wiley
International, New Delhi.
3. M.Morris Mano and Michael D. Cilleti., “Digital Logic Design” 4th edition
Pearson Education., 2013
4. J. Bhasker, “A VHDL PRIMER” 3rd edition Eastern Economy Edition, PHI
Learning, 2010.

118 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -IV SEM L T P C

0 0 3 1.5

(EC20APC404) ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS LABORATORY

(ECE)
Course Objectives:
 To familiarize the students with basic analog communication systems.
Integrate theory with experiments so that the students appreciate the
knowledge gained from the theory course.
 Understand all types of analog modulation / demodulation principles.
 Substantiate pulse modulation techniques.
 To design and implement different modulation and demodulation techniques.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (All experiments are to be conducted)

1. Amplitude Modulation and Demodulation
2. Frequency Modulation and Demodulation
3. (a).Characteristics of Mixer
(b).Pre-emphasis & De-emphasis.
4. Pulse Amplitude Modulation & Demodulation.
5. Pulse Width Modulation &Demodulation.
6. Pulse Position Modulation & Demodulation
7. Measurement of Half power Beam width and gain of half wave dipole antenna.
8. Simulate AM and FM signals and find power spectrum of each signal. Plot the
graphs.
9. Simulate PAM and PWM signals and find power spectrum of each signal. Plot
the graphs.
10. Generate a complex Gaussian noise (with zero mean unit variance). And pass
through an LTI system. Find the power spectrum density of the noise signal
available at the output of LTI system.
11. Make use of AM signal from experiment no. 9 add Gaussian noise (with zero
mean and unity variance) to the signal. Extract the information bearing signal
using suitable system.
12. Simulate Huffman coding.

Course Outcomes:
After the completion of the course students able to

119 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 CO1: Understand different analog modulation techniques &Radio receiver
characteristics.(L1)
CO2: Analyze different analog modulation techniques. (L3)
CO3: Design and implement different modulation and demodulation
techniques.(L4)
CO4: Observe the performance of system by plotting graphs & Measure radio
receiver characteristics. (L2)
CO5: Simulate all digital modulation and demodulation techniques. (L5)

Equipment & Software Required:

1. Computer Systems with latest specifications
2. Connected in LAN (Optional)
3. Operating system (Windows XP)
4. Simulations software (MATLAB)
Equipment:
1. Regulated Power Supply (0-30) V.
2. CROs (0-20) MHz.
3. Function Generators (0-3) MHz.
4. RF Signal Generators (0-1000) MHz.
5. Multimeters.
6. Required Electronic components (active and passive) for the design of
experiments from 1 -7.
7. RF power meter frequency range 0 – 1000MHz
8. Spectrum Analyzer.
Note: Conduct experiments (8-12) using MATLAB software.

120 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -IV SEM L T P C

0 0 3 1.5
(CS20AES402) DATA STRUCTURES USING C LAB
(ECE, EEE, ME, CE)
Course Objectives:
 To strengthen the ability to identify and apply the suitable data structure for
the given real-world problem.
Tasks:
1. Demonstrate recursive algorithms with examples.
2. Develop a program to perform operations of a Stack and Queue using arrays.
3. Implement and perform different operations on Single, Double and Circular
Linked Lists.
4. Develop a program to perform operations of Stack and Queue using Linked
Lists.
5. Develop a program to implement Stack applications.
6. Implement Circular Queues.
7. Implement various Searching techniques.
8. Develop programs for different Sorting techniques.
9. Develop a program to represent a Tree Data Structure.
10.Develop a program to demonstrate operations on Binary Search Tree.
11.Demonstrate Graph Traversal Techniques.
Text Books:
1. Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, Mark Allen Weiss, Second Edition,
2002,Pearson.
2. IntroductiontoAlgorithms, ThomasH.Cormen, CharlesE.Leiserson, RonaldL.
Rivest, Clifford Stein, Third Edition, 2010, PHI.
3. Data Structures and Algorithms Made Easy by Narasimha Karumanchi, 2020,
Career Monk Publications.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Demonstrate the concept of Recursion for solving a problem.(L4)
CO2: Choose and implement linear data structure to solve problems.(L3)
CO3: Develop programs for searching and sorting algorithms.(L3)
CO4: Select and implement suitable non linear data structure for solving a
problem. (L3)

121 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -IV SEM L T P C

0 0 3 1.5

(EC20APC405) LINEAR & DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND APPLICATIONS LAB

(ECE)

Course Objectives:
 The objective of the course is to learn design, testing and characterizing of
circuit behavior with digital and analog ICs.
List of Experiments:
Part A: Hardware
Linear IC Experiments: (Students has to perform atleast 6 experiments.)
1. OP AMP Applications – Adder, Subtractor, Comparators.
2. Integrator and Differentiator Circuits using IC 741.
3. IC 741 Waveform Generators – Sine, Square wave and Triangular waves.
4. IC 555 Timer – Monostable and Astable Multivibrator Circuits.
5. Data converters
i. DAC circuits – R-2R and ladder type.
ii. Successive approximation type ADC.
6. Schmitt Trigger Circuits – using IC 741
7. IC 565 – PLL Applications.
8. Voltage Regulator using IC 723, Three Terminal Voltage Regulators – 7805,
7809, 7912.
PART B: Software
Digital IC Applications: (Students has to perform atleast 6 experiments.)
1. 3-8 line decoder.
2. 4-bit comparator.
3. 8x1 Multiplexer and 2 to 4 Demultiplexer.
4. BCD to 7-segment decoder.
5. D Flip Flop, JK Flip Flops.
6. Decade counter.
7. Up/Down Counter.
8. Universal shift registers.

122 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Equipment required for Laboratory:
Software:
1. Xilinx ISE
2. Computer Systems with required specifications
Hardware:
1. Regulated Power supplies
2. Analog/Digital Storage Oscilloscopes
3. Analog/Digital Function Generators
4. Digital Multimeters
5. Decade Resistance Boxes/Rheostats
6. Decade Capacitance Boxes
7. Ammeters (Analog or Digital)
8. Voltmeters (Analog or Digital)
9. Active & Passive Electronic Components
10.Bread Boards
11.Connecting Wires
12.CRO Probes

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Understand the pin configuration of each linear/ digital IC and its functional
diagram.
CO2: Conduct the experiment and obtain the expected results.
CO3: Analyze the given circuit/designed circuit and verify the practical
observations with the analyzed results.
CO4: Design the circuits for the given specifications using linear and digital ICs.
CO5: Acquaintance with lab equipment about the operation and its use.

123 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -IV SEM L T P C

1 0 2 2
(EG20ASC301) SOFT SKILLS
(ECE)
Course Objectives:
 To encourage all round development of the students by focusing on soft skills
 To make the students aware of critical thinking and problem-solving skills
 To develop leadership skills and organizational skills through group activities
 To function effectively with heterogeneous teams

UNIT I
Communication Skills:
Introduction, meaning, significance of soft skills – definition, significance, types of
communication skills - Intra-personal & Inter-personal skills - Verbal and Non-verbal
Communication
Activities:
Intrapersonal Skills- Narration about self- strengths and weaknesses- clarity of thought
– self- expression – articulating with felicity
(The facilitator can guide the participants before the activity citing examples from the
lives of the great, anecdotes and literary sources)
Interpersonal Skills- Group Discussion – Debate – Team Tasks - Book and film Reviews
by groups - Group leader presenting views (non- controversial and secular) on
contemporary issues or on a given topic.
Verbal Communication- Oral Presentations- Extempore- brief addresses and speeches-
convincing- negotiating- agreeing and disagreeing with professional grace.
Non-verbal communication – Public speaking – Mock interviews – presentations with an
objective to identify non- verbal clues and remedy the lapses on observation
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
 Acquire attributes regarding communication skills
 Enhance their intrapersonal and interpersonal skills
 Improve LSRW Skills

UNIT II
Critical Thinking
Active Listening – Observation – Curiosity – Introspection – Analytical Thinking – Open-
mindedness – Creative Thinking
124 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Activities:
Gathering information and statistics on a topic - sequencing – assorting – reasoning –
critiquing issues –facing the problem – finding the root cause - seeking viable
solution – judging with rationale – evaluating the views of others - Case Study, Story
Analysis
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
 Enhance their LSRW skills
 Be able to get innovative and creative skills
 Acquire logical and analytical thinking capability
 Develop their cognitive level

UNIT III
Problem Solving & Decision Making
Meaning & features of Problem Solving – Managing Conflict – Conflict resolution –
Methods of decision making – Effective decision making in teams – Methods & Styles
Activities:
Facing problem which involves conflict of interests, choice and views – formulating the
problem – exploring solutions by proper reasoning – Discussion on important
professional, career and organizational decisions and initiate debate on the
appropriateness of the decision.
Case Study & Group Discussion
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
 Solve the problems logically
 Make decisions effectively
 Face the problems positively with confidence

UNIT IV
Emotional Intelligence & Stress Management
Managing Emotions – Thinking before Reacting – Empathy for Others – Self-awareness –
SWOC analysis – Stress factors – Controlling Stress – Tips
Activities:
Providing situations for the participants to express emotions such as happiness,
enthusiasm, gratitude, sympathy, and confidence, compassion in the form of written or
oral presentations.
Providing opportunities for the participants to narrate certain crisis and stress –ridden
situations caused by failure, anger, jealousy, resentment and frustration in the form of

125 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 written and oral presentation, Organizing Debates
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
Control their emotions and stress levels
Be emotionally balanced
Respond instead of reacting in their professional and academic life

UNIT – V
Leadership Skills
Team-Building – Decision-Making – Accountability – Planning – Public Speaking –
Motivation – Risk-Taking - Time Management
Activities:
Forming group with a consensus among the participants- choosing a leader-
encouraging the group members to express views on leadership- democratic attitude-
sense of sacrifice – sense of adjustment – vision – accommodating nature- eliciting
views on successes and failures of leadership using the past knowledge and experience
of the participants, Public Speaking, Activities on Time Management, Motivation,
Decision Making, Group discussion etc.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
 Learn the aspects of team building
 Understand the characteristics of effective leadership skills
 Improve spontaneous communication

Course Outcomes:
By the end of the program students should be able to
CO1: Memorize various elements of effective communicative skills
CO2: Interpret people at the emotional level through emotional intelligence
CO3: Apply critical thinking skills in problem solving
CO4: Analyze the needs of an organization for team building
CO5: Judge the situation and take necessary decisions as a leader
CO6: Develop social and work-life skills as well as personal and emotional well
being
Textbooks:
1. Barun Mitra, Personality Development and Soft Skills, English,Oxford
University Press,2012
2. Dr Shikha Kapoor,Personality Development and Soft Skills: Preparing for
Tomorrow,International Publishing House; 0 edition (February 28, 2018)

126 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Reference Books:
1. Prashant Sharma ,Soft skills: Personality Development for Life Success, BPB
publications, 2018.
2. DR.K.Alex ,Soft Skills, S.Chand Publications.
3. Gajendra Singh Chauhan &Sangeetha Sharma, Soft Skills: An Integrated
Approach to Maximise Personality, Published by Wiley
4. Avni. Sharma ,Communication Skills and Soft Skills Hardcover, ,Publisher:
Yking books
5. Renu Shorey,SOFT SKILLS for a BIG IMPACT, Publisher: Notion Press
6. Dr. Rajiv Kumar Jain & Dr. UshaLife Skills(a guide to steer life),Publisher: Vayu
Education of India
7. Raymond.L.Gorden,Basic Interviewing Skills, Waveland publications

Online Learning Resources:

1. https://youtu.be/DUlsNJtg2L8?list=PLLy_2iUCG87CQhELCytvXh0E_y-bOO1_q
2. https://youtu.be/xBaLgJZ0t6A?list=PLzf4HHlsQFwJZel_j2PUy0pwjVUgj7KlJ
3. https://youtu.be/-Y-R9hDl7lU
4. https://youtu.be/gkLsn4ddmTs
5. https://youtu.be/2bf9K2rRWwo
6. https://youtu.be/FchfE3c2jzc

127 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech -IV SEM L T P C

2 0 0 0
(BA20AMC201/ BA20AHS201) UNIVERSAL HUMAN VALUES

Course Objectives:

The objective of the course is four fold:

 Development of a holistic perspective based on self-exploration about

themselves (human being), family, society and nature/existence.
 Understanding (or developing clarity) of the harmony in the human being,
family, society and nature/existence.
 Strengthening of self-reflection.
 Development of commitment and courage to act.

Unit I :

Course Introduction-Need, Basic Guidelines, Content and Process for Value

Education

 Purpose and motivation for the course, recapitulation from Universal Human
Values-I.
 Self-Exploration–what is it? Its content and process; ‘Natural Acceptance’ and
Experiential Validation- as the process for self-exploration.
 Continuous Happiness and Prosperity- A look at basic Human Aspirations.
 Right understanding, Relationship and Physical Facility- the basic requirements
for fulfilment of aspirations of every human being with their correct priority.
 Understanding Happiness a n d Prosperity correctly-A critical appraisal of the
current scenario.
 Methods t o fu l fi l the above human aspirations: understanding and living
in harmony at various levels.
 Include practice sessions to discuss natural acceptance in human being as the
innate acceptance for living with responsibility (living in relationship, harmony
and co- existence) rather than as arbitrariness in choice based on liking-
disliking.

Unit -II: Understanding Harmony in the Human Being - Harmony in Myself!

 Understanding human being as a co-existence of the sentient ‘I’ and the material
‘Body’
 Understanding the needs of Self (‘I’) and ‘Body’ - happiness and physical facility.
 Understanding the Body as an instrument of ‘I’ (I being the doer, seer and
enjoyer).
 Understanding the characteristics and activities of ‘I’ and harmony in ‘I’.

128 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
  Understanding the harmony of I with the Body: Sanyam and Health; correct
appraisal of Physical needs, meaning of Prosperity in detail.
 programs to ensure Sanyam and Health.
 Include practice sessions to discuss the role others have played in making
material goods available to me. Identifying from one’s own life.
Differentiate between prosperity and accumulation. Discuss program for
ensuring health vs dealing with disease.

Unit III:

Understanding Harmony in the Family and Society- Harmony in Human - Human

Relationship

 Understanding values in human-human relationship; meaning of Justice (nine

universal values in relationships) and program for its fulfilment to ensure mutual
happiness; Trust and Respect as the foundational values of relationship.
 Understanding the meaning of Trust; Difference between intention and
competence.
 Understanding the meaning of Respect, Difference between respect and
differentiation; the other salient values in relationship.
 Understanding the harmony in the society (society being an extension of
family): Resolution, Prosperity, fearlessness (trust) and co-existence as
comprehensive Human Goals. Visualizing a universal harmonious order in society-
Undivided Society, Universal Order- from family to world family.
 Include practice sessions to reflect on relationships in family, hostel and institute as
extended family, real life examples, teacher-student relationship, goal of
education etc. Gratitude as a universal value in relationships. Discuss with
scenarios, elicit examples from students’ lives.

Unit IV:

Understanding Harmony in the Nature and Existence -Whole existence as

Co-existence
 Understanding the harmony in the Nature.
 Interconnectedness and mutual fulfilment among the four orders of nature
recyclability and self-regulation in nature.
 Understanding Existence as Co-existence of mutually interacting units in
all pervasive Space.
 Holistic perception of harmony at all levels of existence. Include practice
sessions to discuss human being as cause of imbalance in nature (film“Home”
can be used), pollution, depletion of resources and role of technology etc.
Unit V:

Implications of the above Holistic Understanding of Harmony

on Professional Ethics
129 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Natural acceptance of human values.

 Definitiveness of Ethical Human Conduct.

 Basis for Humanistic Education, Humanistic Constitution and
Humanistic universal order
 Competence in professional ethics: a. Ability to utilize the
professional competence for augmenting universal human order b. Ability to
identify the scope and characteristics of people friendly and eco-friendly
production systems, c. Ability to identify and develop appropriate technologies and
management patterns for above production systems.
 Case studies of typical holistic technologies, management models
and production systems
 Strategy for transition from the present state to Universal Human Order:
o At the level of individual: as socially and ecologically responsible engineers,
technologists and managers.
o At the level of society: as mutually enriching institutions and
organizations
 Sum up: Include practice Exercises and Case Studies will be taken up in Practice
(tutorial) Sessions
E.g., To discuss the conduct as an engineer or scientist etc.
Text Books:

1. R R Gaur, R Asthana, G P Bagaria, “A Foundation Course in Human Values and

Professional Ethics”, 2nd Revised Edition, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2019. ISBN
978-93-87034-47-1.
2. R R Gaur, R Asthana, G P Bagaria, “Teachers’ Manual for A Foundation Course in
Human Values and Professional Ethics”, 2nd Revised Edition, Excel Books, New
Delhi,2019. ISBN 978-93-87034-53-2.

Reference Books:

1. Jeevan Vidya: Ek Parichaya, A Nagaraj, Jeevan Vidya Prakashan, Amar kantak,

1999.
2. A. N. Tripathi, “Human Values”, New Age Intl. Publishers, New Delhi, 2004.
3. The Story of Stuff (Book).
4. Mohandas Karamchand Gandhi “The Story of My Experiments with Truth”
5. E. FSchumacher. “Small is Beautiful”.
6. Slow is Beautiful –Cecile Andrews.
7. J C Kumarappa “Economy of Permanence”.
8. Pandit Sunderlal “Bharat Mein Angreji Raj”.
9. Dharampal, “Rediscovering India”.
10. Mohandas K. Gandhi, “Hind Swaraj or Indian Home Rule”.
11. India Wins Freedom - Maulana Abdul Kalam Azad.
12. Vivekananda - Romain Rolland (English).
13. Gandhi - Romain Rolland (English).

130 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Course Outcomes:

By the end of the course,

CO1: Understanding the value of education to become more aware of themselves,

and their surroundings (family, society, nature). (L2)
CO2: Utilize the concepts of human being-harmony in myself become more
responsible in life, and in handling problems with sustainable solutions, while keeping
human relationships and human nature in mind. (L3)
CO3: Understanding the con cept s o f society-harmony in human f o r bet ter
c r i t i c a l ability. (L2)
CO4: Understanding the human values, human relationship and human society to
become sensitive to their commitment. (L2)
CO5: Apply what they have learnt to their own self in different day-to-day settings in
real life, at least a beginning would be made in this direction. (L3)

131 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
Karakambadi Road, TIRUPATI – 517507

B.Tech- IV SEM L T P C
2 0 0 0
(MA20AMC401)ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
(Common to All Branches of LE Students)
Course Objectives:
 This course will illuminate the students in the concepts of calculus and linear algebra.
 To equip the students with standard concepts and tools at an intermediate to advanced
level mathematics to develop the confidence and ability among the students to handle
various realworld problems and their applications.
UNIT -1
Matrices
Solving system of homogeneous and non homogeneous linear equations. Eigen values and
Eigenvectors and their properties, Cayley-Hamilton theorem (without proof), finding inverse and
power of a matrix by Cayley-Hamilton theorem,
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Solving systems of linear equations, using technology to facilitate row reduction
determine the rank, eigen values and eigenvectors (L3).
 Identify special properties of a matrix, such as positive definite, etc., and use this
information to facilitate the calculation of matrix characteristics (L3).
UNIT -2
Mean Value Theorems
Rolle’s Theorem, Lagrange’s mean value theorem, Cauchy’s mean value theorem, Taylor’s
andMaclaurin theorems with remainders (without proof) related problems.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Translate the given function as series of Taylor’s and Maclaurin’s with remainders (L3)
Analyze the behaviour of functions by using mean value theorems (L3)

132 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT 3
Linear differential equations of higher order
Definitions, complete solution, operator D, rules for finding complimentary function, inverse
operator, rules for finding particular integral, method of variation of parameters, Applications to
L-C-R Circuit problems.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Identify the essential characteristics of linear differential equations with constant coefficients
(L3)
 Solve the linear differential equations with constant coefficients by appropriate method (L3)
UNIT 4
Multivariable Calculus
Partial derivatives, total derivatives, chain rule, change of variables, Jacobian, maxima and
minima of functions of two variables, method of Lagrange multipliers.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Find partial derivatives numerically and symbolically and use them to analyze and
interpret the way a function varies. (L3)
 Acquire the Knowledge maxima and minima of functions of several variable (L1)
 Utilize Jacobian of a coordinate transformation to deal with the problems in change of
variables (L3)
UNIT -5
Vector Calculus
Vector differentiation
Scalar and vector point functions, vector operator del, del applies to scalar point functions-
Gradient, del applied to vector point functions-Divergence, Curl and their related properties.
Vector integration
Line integral-circulation-work done, surface integral-flux, Green’s theorem in the plane (without
proof), Stoke’s theorem (without proof), volume integral, Divergence theorem (without proof)
and applications of these theorems.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Find the work done in moving a particle along the path over a force field (L4)

133 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Evaluate the rates of fluid flow along and across curves (L4)
 Apply Green’s, Stokes and Divergence theorem in evaluation of double and triple integrals
(L3)

Text Books:
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 44/e, Khanna Publishers, 2017.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10/e, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
Reference Books:
1. R. K. Jain and S. R. K. Iyengar, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 3/e, Alpha Science
International Ltd., 2002.
2. George B. Thomas, Maurice D. Weir and Joel Hass, Thomas Calculus, 13/e, Pearson
Publishers, 2013.
3. Glyn James, Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics, 4/e, Pearson publishers, 2011.
4. B. V. Ramana, Higher Engineering Mathematics, McGraw Hill Education
5. H. k Das, Er. RajnishVerma, Higher Engineering Mathematics, S. Chand.
6. N. Bali, M. Goyal, C. Watkins, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Infinity Science
Press.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
 Develop the use of matrix algebra techniques that is needed by engineers for practical
applications (L6)
 Utilize mean value theorems to real life problems (L3)
 Solve the differential equations related to various engineering fields (L6)
 Apply multiple integrals to find the area and volumes for different functions. (L3)
 Estimate the work done against a field, circulation and flux using vector calculus (L6)

134 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
L T P C
B. Tech- V Sem 3 0 0 3

(EC20APC501) ANTENNAS AND WAVE PROPAGATION

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce radiation mechanism and basic characteristics of antennas.

2. To discuss various antennas which are operated in VHF & UHF frequency range

3. To introduce design concepts of various types of antennas including micro-strip

antenna & Lens antenna.
4. To explain the concept of antenna arrays and measurement of antenna
parameters.

5. To demonstrate various modes of EM wave propagation.

UNIT-I
Antenna Basics, Monopole & Dipole antennas: Definition of antenna , Radiation
mechanism- single wire, two wire, dipole, Basic antenna parameters- patterns, Main lobe
and Side lobes, Beam widths, Beam area, Radiation Intensity, Beam Efficiency, Directivity,
Gain & Resolution, Antenna Apertures, Effective height & length, Antenna impedance,
Front–to-back ratio, Antenna theorems, Radiation from Monopole, Small Electric Dipole,
Half wave Dipole Antennas – Current Distributions, Field Components, Radiated power,
Radiation Resistance, Illustrative problems.
Learning Outcomes:

• Understand radiation mechanism and basic antenna characteristics. (L1)

• Compute radiation intensity, gain and directivity of antennas. (L2)

UNIT-II
VHF, UHF and Microwave Antennas - I:Loop Antennas - Introduction, Radiation
Resistances and Directives of small and large loops, Arrays with Parasitic Elements - Yagi -
Uda Arrays, Folded Dipoles & their characteristics. Helical Antennas- Helical Geometry,
Helix modes, Practical Design considerations for Monofilar Helical Antenna in Axial and
Normal Modes. Horn Antennas- Types, Fermat’s Principle, Optimum Horns, Design
considerations of Pyramidal Horns, Illustrative Problems.
Learning Outcomes:

• Derive expressions for radiation resistance, directivity of Loop antennas(L3)

• Obtain radiation pattern of various array antennas. (L2)

135 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 UNIT-III
VHF, UHF and Microwave Antennas - II: Micro strip Antennas- Introduction, features,
advantages and limitations, Rectangular patch antennas- Geometry and parameters,
characteristics of Micro strip antennas, reflector antennas - Introduction, Flat sheet and
corner reflectors, parabola reflectors- geometry, pattern characteristics, Feed Methods,
Reflector Types - Related Features, Lens Antennas - Geometry of Non-metallic Dielectric
Lenses, Zoning, Tolerances, Applications, Illustrative Problems.
Learning Outcomes:

• Understand basic principles of Micro strip Antennas (L2)

• Describe feeding methods for micro-strip antennas. (L2)

UNIT-IV
Antenna Arrays: Arrays of 2 Isotropic sources- Different cases, Principle of Pattern
Multiplication, Uniform Linear Arrays – Broadside Arrays, End-fire Arrays, General
considerations and Binomial Arrays, Illustrative problems.
Antenna Measurements: Introduction, Near and Far Fields, Pattern Measurement,
Directivity Measurement, Gain Measurements (by comparison, Absolute and 3-Antenna
Methods).
Learning Outcomes:

 Compare radiation pattern and other antenna parameters of broad side and end fire
array antennas. (L5)

 Describe the different types of Antenna Measurement (2)

UNIT-V

Wave Propagation-I: Introduction, Definitions, Categorizations and General

Classifications, Different Modes of Wave Propagation ,Ray/Mode Concepts ,Ground-Wave
Propagation- Introduction, Plane Earth Reflections, Space and Surface Waves, Wave Tilt,
Curved Earth Reflections, Space-Wave Propagation- Introduction, Field Strength Variation
with Distance and Height, Effect of Earth's Curvature, Absorption, Super refraction, M-
Curves and Duct Propagation, Scattering Phenomena, Troposphere Propagation.
Wave Propagation - II: Sky-Wave Propagation -Introduction, Structure of Ionosphere,
Refraction and Reflection of Sky-Waves by Ionosphere, Ray-Path, Critical-Frequency, MUF,
LUF, OF, Virtual Height and Skip Distance, Relation between MUF and skip Distance, Multi-
hop Propagation, illustrative problems.

136 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Learning Outcomes:
• Understand effects of earth’s magnetic field on wave propagation (L2)
• Apply the concepts to solve problems related to wave propagation (L3)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John D. Kraus, Ronald J. Marhefka, Ahmad S. Khan, “Antennas and Wave
th
Propagation”,4 Edition, TMH, 2010.
2. Jordan E.C. and Balmain. K.G., “Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems”,
Prentice-Hall Publications.

REFERENCES:
1. Constantine A. Balanis, “Antenna Theory-Analysis and Design”, Wiley Publication,2016.
2. K.D. Prasad, “Antenna & Wave Propagation”, Satya Prakash Publications, 2009.
3. Matthew N.O. Sadiku, “Principle of Electromagnetics”, 4th edition, Oxford
(International), 2012.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Discuss various antenna parameters, principles of operation of basic antennas &
Analyze field components of various dipole antennas.
CO2: Demonstrate the basic principles of antennas which are operated in VHF- UHF
frequency range.
CO3: Demonstrate the basic principles of antennas which are operated in
Microwave frequency & discuss various feeding mechanism.
CO4: Analyze radiation pattern of various antenna arrays & Evaluate the antenna
parameters.
CO5: Discuss various EM wave propagation methods & Analyze mathematical aspects of
wave propagation.

137 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- V Sem
L T P C
3 0 0 3

(EC20APC502) DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS

Course Objectives:
1. To understand the key modules of digital communication systems with emphasis on
digital modulation techniques.
2. To get introduced to the concept and basics of information theory and the basics of
source and channel coding/decoding.
3. To prepare mathematical background for communication signal analysis.
4. To study signal flow in a digital communication system.
5. To analyze error performance of a digital communication system in presence of noise
and other interferences.

UNIT- I:
Pulse Digital Modulation: Introduction, sampling process, quantization, quantization noise,
encoding, Pulse-Code Modulation (PCM), Line codes, Differential encoding, Regeneration,
Decoding & Filtering, Noise considerations in PCM systems, Time-Division Multiplexing (TDM),
Synchronization, Delta modulation (DM)- Granular noise Slope over distortion, Differential
PCM (DPCM), Processing gain, Comparison of the above systems.
Learning Outcomes:
• Understand source coding techniques & pulse modulation techniques. (L1)
• Describe and determine the performance of line codes. (L2)

UNIT- II:
Baseband Pulse Transmission: Introduction, Matched filter, Properties of Matched filter,
Matched filter for rectangular pulse, Error rate due to noise, Inter-symbol Interference (ISI),
Nyquist’s criterion for distortion less baseband binary transmission, ideal Nyquist channel,
raised cosine filter & its spectrum, Correlative coding – Duo binary & Modified duo binary
signalling schemes, Partial response signalling, Baseband M-ary PAM transmission, Eye
diagrams.
Learning Outcomes:
• Analyze the performance of baseband pulse transmission system. (L3)
• Describe the generation & detection of pass band modulated signals. (L2)

138 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT- III
Signal Space Analysis: Introduction, Geometric representation of signals, Gram-Schmidt
orthogonalization procedure, Coherent detection of signals in noise - maximum likelihood
decoder, Probability of error, Correlation receiver.

Learning Outcomes:
• Understand the concepts of signal space analysis. (L1)
• Examine the characteristics of maximum likelihood decoder. (L2)

UNIT- IV:
Passband Data Transmission: Introduction, Passband transmission model, Coherent
modulation schemes- Generation and detection of binary phase shift keying (BPSK),
Quadrature shift keying (QPSK), and Binary Frequency shift keying (BFSK). Analysis of
probability of error for BPSK, QPSK, BFSK, M-ary PSK, Non-coherent orthogonal modulation
schemes - Generation and detection of non-coherent BFSK, DPSK ,Comparison of power
bandwidth requirements for all the above schemes, Illustrative Problems.

Learning Outcomes:
• Analyse the different digital modulation techniques, generation and detection, power
spectra and their probability of error performance. (L3)
• Compare the power bandwidth, bit error probability for various modulation scheme. (L5)

UNIT- V
Channel Coding: Linear Block Codes, Syndrome decoding, minimum distance
considerations, Cyclic codes- generator polynomial, parity check polynomial, encoder for
cyclic code, calculation of syndrome, Convolutional Codes – generator polynomials,
problems.

Learning Outcomes:
• Understand various error control encoding and decoding techniques. (L1)
• Apply information theory and linear algebra in source coding and channel coding. (L2)

Text Books:
1. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems,” Wiley India Edition, 4 th Edition, 2011.
2. B. P. Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems,” 3rd Edition,
Oxford Univ. press, 2006.

139 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 References:
1. A. Bruce Carlson, & Paul B. Crilly, “Communication Systems – An Introduction to
Signals & Noise in Electrical Communication”, McGraw-Hill International Edition,
5th Edition, 2010.
2. Sham Shanmugam, “Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, Wiley-India
edition, 2006.
3. Dr. Sanjay Sharma, Communication systems, S.K.Katari & Sons 6 th Edition, 2013.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Understand the elements of digital communication system, baseband pulse
transmission, pass band digital modulation,

CO2: Understand the concepts of geometric representation of signals, basics of information

theory and error correcting codes.

CO3: Apply the knowledge of signals and system & statistical theory to evaluate the
performance of digital communication systems.

CO4: Analyze the different coding, modulation techniques, Probability of error performance
of digital system.

CO5: Compare the performance of different modulation schemes& error correcting codes.

140 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- V Sem
L T P C
3 0 0 3

(EC20APC503) MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS

Course Objectives:
1. To study the architecture, pin diagram, memory organization, interrupt structure
of 8086 Microprocessor.
2. To study Instruction Formats and Assembler Directives, macros and procedure,
string instructions of 8086 microprocessor based ALP.
3. To study to interface 8086 with 8255, 8253, 8251, 8237, 8259 and RAM, ROM
Memories.
4. To study the architecture, pin diagram, memory organization, interrupt structure,
Instruction formats and addressing modes of 8051 Microcontroller.
5. To study to hardware features of timers, interrupts and serial port and also
interface 8051 with Push button switches , LED, seven segment display, stepper
motor & LCD.
Unit I
8086 Microprocessor- Features, Architecture, Register Organization, Flag Register,
Pin Diagram, Maximum and minimum mode configuration, Memory organization,
Memory Segmentation and memory banks accessing, Accessing memory locations.
Interrupt structure of 8086 and Interrupt Vector Table.

Unit II
8086 Microprocessor - Instruction Formats, Addressing Modes, Instruction Set of
8086, Assembler Directives, Procedures and macros. Simple ALPs.

Unit III
8086 Microprocessor Interfacing: Semiconductor memories interfacing (RAM,
ROM), Intel 8255 programmable peripheral interface, Intel timer IC 8253, Intel 8251
USART architecture and interfacing, Intel 8237 DMA controller, 8259 programmable
interrupt controllers.

Unit IV

141 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Intel 8051 Microcontroller - Architecture, Memory organization, internal RAM
structure, Special Function Registers (SFRs). Addressing modes and instruction set of
8051. 8051 Assembly language programming.

Unit V
Hardware features of 8051- timers, interrupts and serial ports. 8051 Interfacing -
Push button switches and LEDs, interfacing seven segment display. Interfacing
stepper motor and LCD with 8051.

Text Books:
1. Microprocessors and Interfacing N. Senthil kumar, M. Saravanan S.Jeevananthan,
S.K. Shah, Oxford University Press.
2. K M Bhurchandi, A K Ray, Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals, 3rd edition,
McGraw Hill Education, 2017.
References:
1. Microprocessors and Interfacing – Programming and Hardware by Douglas V Hall,
SSSP Rao, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, 3rd Edition,1994.
2. Kenneth J. Ayala, The 8051 Microcontroller, 3rd edition, Cengage Learning, 2004.
3. Raj Kamal, Microcontrollers: Architecture, Programming, Interfacing and System
Design, 2nd edition, Pearson, 2012.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Demonstrate ability to understand the architecture of 8086 microprocessor.
CO2: Demonstrate ability to develop 8086 assemble language programming using
assembly language programming in MASM/TASM.
CO3: Demonstrate ability to describe interfacing of peripheral devices with 8086
CO4: Demonstrate ability to understand the architecture and addressing modes of
8051 microcontroller.
CO5: Demonstrate ability to understand the hardware features of 8051 and interfacing
with pushbutton switches, LED, LCD, Stepper motor, Seven Segment Display.,
etc.

142 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRIVENKATESWARACOLLEGEOFENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

L T P C
B.Tech- V Sem
3 0 0 3

(CE20AOE502)Principles of Waste Management

Course Objectives:
 Understanding of problems posed by various types of solid waste
 Categorize various solid and hazardous waste
 Obtain knowledge about various techniques adopted in field to treat solid and
hazardous waste
 Become aware of various methods of disposal of solid and hazardous waste
 Understand engineering, financial and technical options for waste management.

UNIT –I
Introduction to Solid Waste
Waste-Types and classification, Waste sources and generation rates, Traditional methods of
waste collection and disposal, Factors influencing waste generation and health hazards,
Waste composition, Waste collection and Characterization of wastes.
Learning Outcomes:
After completion of this unit, students should
 Learn sampling and characterization of solid waste
 Analysis of hazardous waste constituents including QA/QC issues
 Understand traditional methods of waste collection and disposal

UNIT – II
Waste Processing
Waste processing: Size and volume reduction, Waste minimization, waste hierarchy and
waste audit, Recycling of solid wastes,
Hazardous Waste
Definition, sources, classification, collection and segregation, Hazardous waste
characterization, treatment and disposal, Radioactive waste
Learning Outcomes:

143 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
After completion of this unit, students should
• Learn waste processing techniques
 Determine the ways to reduce waste production
 Learn recycling of solid waste in their homes.
 Understand characteristics of hazardous waste and its treatment, final disposal

UNIT – III
Biomedical waste
e-waste and Plastic waste, Biomedical waste and Biomedical waste management rules, 2016
Composting
Definition- Vermi composting and Biogas production from solid waste
Learning Outcomes:
After completion of this unit, students should
 Learn composting and its types
 Determine the ways to produce more biogas from solid waste
 Understand the ways to dispose e-waste and plastic waste

UNIT –IV
Thermal treatment and Solid waste disposal
Thermal treatment of solid waste – Incineration, Thermal treatment of solid waste –
Pyrolysis and gasification, Solid waste disposal – Sanitary landfilling, Landfill leachate and
gas management, Landfill bioreactors, Fly ash- Generation and management
Learning Outcomes:
After completion of this unit, students should
• Design a sanitary landfill for a community
 Determine the ways to protect ground water from leachate contamination
 Learn about thermal treatment of solid waste.
UNIT – V
Solid waste management rules and Swachh Bharat Abhiyan
Fly ash management Solid waste management rules, 2016, Hazardous and other waste
amendment rules, 2016, Plastic waste management rules, 2016, e-waste management rules,
2016, Swachh Bharat Abhiyan and Recent advances in solid waste management
Learning Outcomes:
After completion of this unit, students should
 Know the rules and regulatory bodies details.
 Use latest standards and techniques to manage the solid waste and hazardous waste
 Adopt the recent advancements in solid waste management

144 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
CourseOutcomes (CO):
After studying this course, students will be able to:
 Understand various types of solid waste, sources and their collection methods.
 Identify various waste processing techniques and characteristics of hazardous waste
 Understand the process of management of biomedical waste and composting
 Apply various solid waste disposal techniques according to situation
 Obtain awareness on various solid waste management rules and Swachh Bharat
Abhiyan

Textbooks:
1. ArcadioSincero and GregoriaSincero“Environmental Engineering”, Second Edition,
Prentice -Hall India
2. George Tchobanoglous“Intigrated Solid Waste Management : Engineering Principles
and Management”, McGraw-Hill Publication 1993
3. M LaGrega and others “Hazardous Waste Management”, McGraw-Hill Publication2010
4. Tchobanoglous G, Theisen H and Vigil SA ‘Integrated Solid Waste Management,
Engineering Principles and Management Issues’ McGraw-Hill, 1993.
5. Vesilind PA, Worrell W and Reinhart D, ‘Solid Waste Engineering’ Brooks/Cole
Thomson Learning Inc., 2002.

Reference Books:
1. Peavy, H.S, Rowe, D.R., and G. Tchobanoglous, ‘Environmental Engineering’, McGraw
Hill Inc., New York, 1985.
2. Qian X, Koerner RM and Gray DH, ‘Geotechnical Aspects of Landfill Design and
Construction’ Prentice Hall, 2002

145 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech- V Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3

(ME20AOE501) INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

Pre-Requisite: Operation Research, Production & Operation Management
Course Objectives:

Course Objectives:
• To understand the basic concepts of Automation
• To understand the concepts of automation cycle and hardware components
• To gain knowledge about pneumatic and hydraulic devices
• To understand the concepts of sensors and actuators
• To know the use of Robotics used in industries automation
UNIT -I: Introduction to Automation Definition and fundamentals of automation, reasons for
Automating, basic elements of an automated system: Power, Program and control system,
safety, maintenance & repair diagnosis, error detection and recovery, Automation principles
and strategies: USA principle, strategies of automation and production system, automation
migration strategy
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the unit, students will be able to:
• To understand the fundamental concepts of automation and its basic elements
• To understand system safety requirements
• To understand about maintenance and repair strategies
• To know about production system automation
UNIT- II: Mechanization and Automation
Basic principles of Mechanization and automation, product cycle, hard Vs flexible automation,
Capital- intensive Vs low cost automation. Types of systems-mechanical, electrical, hydraulic,
pneumatic and hybrid systems, Automation using CAMS, Geneva mechanisms, gears etc.
Assembly line Automation: automated assembly systems, transfer systems, vibratory bowl
feeders, non-vibratory feeders, part orienting, feed track, part placing & part escapement
systems. Introduction to Material storage/ handling and transport systems, and its
automation using AS/RS, AGVS and conveyors etc.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the unit, students will be able to:
• To know about how to analyse the various automation methods
• To know about assembling and placing of various parts

146 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
• To distinguish between mechanization and automation of systems
• To know about material storage, handling and automation using various approaches
UNIT -III:
Pneumatics and hydraulics
Hydraulic and pneumatic devices-Different types of valves, Actuators and auxiliary elements
in Pneumatics & hydraulics , their applications and use of their ISO symbols. Synthesis and
design of circuits (up to 3 cylinders)–pneumatic, electro pneumatics and hydraulics. Design
of Electro-Pneumatic Circuits using single solenoid and double solenoid valves; with and
without grouping.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the unit, students will be able to:
• To know design of various pneumatic and hydraulic components
• To understand about synthesis and design of Pneumatic circuits
• To understand about electro pneumatic circuits
• To design using various solenoid valves with and without grouping
UNIT -IV: Sensors & Actuators Sensors Selection of sensors (Displacement, temperature,
acceleration, force /pressure) based on static and dynamic characteristics. Interfacing:
Concept of interfacing, bit accuracy and sampling speed, amplifying electronics, and
microcontroller. Actuators: Principle and selection of electro mechanical actuators (1) DC
motors (2) Stepper Motors (3) Solenoid Actuators (4) Servo Motors (5) BLDC
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the unit, students will be able to:
• To know about selection of sensors and actuators based on dynamic characteristics
• To understand about necessity of interfacing sensors with Microcontroller
• To understand principle and selection of actuators
• To apply various electro mechanical actuators to certain machines
UNIT- V:
Robots and their applications
Introduction to robots, Types, Classifications, Selection of robots, Robot Degrees of freedom,
Robot configuration, Accuracy and repeatability, Specification of a robot, Robot feedback
controls: Point to point control and Continuous path control, Control system for robot joint,
Adaptive control, Drives and transmission systems, End effectors, Industrial robot
applications of robots
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the unit, students will be able to:
• To know about Robots, classification, selection and specifications
• To understand the use of robotics in industrial applications
• To know about various feedback controls of Robot

147 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
• To understand how adaptive control strategies can be used in Robots

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stamatios Manesis and George Nikolakopoulos, “Introduction to Industrial
Automation”, CRC Press, 2018. 2. Frank Lamb, “Industrial Automation”, Hands on, Mc
Graw Hill Education, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Richerd L. Shell and Ernest L. Hall, “Hand Book of Industrial Automation”, CRC Press,
2000.

● Through reading the text, references and discussion of cases students should be able
to understand the fundamentals underlying the management of an Organization.
● Understand where the plant is to be located based on facilities available and what are
the important factors affecting the facilities location of a plant, and plant layout.
● Determine work measurement techniques for time study.
● Recognize the importance of Inventory control to ensure their availability with
minimum capital lock up.
● Understand the concepts of TQM, ISO, BIS etc.

Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the basic concepts of Industrial automation
2. Design and analysis of automation methods, placing and assembling of various parts
3. Design of various processing and control circuits using pneumatic and hydraulic elements
4. Selection of sensors based on the industrial application
5. Role of robotics in industrial applications

148 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech- V Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3

(EE20AOE502) PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS

Course Objectives:
The student will be able to:
 Understand the basic functions and types of PLCs, Easy Veep software, its applications
 Understand Classification of PLCs and applications
 Design PLC Programming for various applications
 Analyze PLC Troubleshooting aspects

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLCs

Introduction:Basic functions of PLCs, Mechanical relays versus PLC, Different types of PLC’s –
Allen-Bradley – Micrologix: ML1000, ML1100, SLC500, Compact Logix, Mitsubishi FX series,
HMI’s, Processor and I/O cards

UNIT II PLC COMPUTATIONAL TOOL

Introduction to Easy Veep software, Link between mechanical, electrical and programming
documentation, Logic diagrams, Flip-Flop Logic, M8000, M8001 internal bits interpretation,
Binary code, data table, manipulation and search engine in Mitsubishi environment
Communication between PC and PLC, Communication between PC and HMI, PLC and HMI
Serial Local network, Introduction to SLC500

UNIT III PLC DEVELOPMENT

PLC software and applications, Boolean algebra – understanding binary code, ADD and SUB
functions, UP and Down Counters, Introduction to k1Y0, MOV function, CPR and ZCP
functions, SHWT and SHRD instructions, Introduction to Absolutely Drum Instruction.

UNIT IV PLC PROGRAMMING

Programming instructions: Instructions and binary interpretation, Bit Instruction, Timers and
counters, Comparison instructions, Programming Instructions - Math instructions, Move and
Logical Instructions, Discussions of programming, communications for PLC-Robotic arm,
Exercise of setup and monitoring.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS

Analog and Digital parameters by using SLC5/03-VFD-Panel Mate series 1700, Practical
Troubleshooting, troubleshooting technique, Control system stability and tuning basics.
Applications: Process to rewind, test, and integrate with extrusion process for wiring and fibre
optic industries, Food industry – yeast, flour distribution and control. Process Medical
equipment Industry – Gas analyzer, Leak tester (using CO2), plastic wrapping machines etc.

149 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
CO1:Understand different types of PLCs, Its classification and the usage of Easy Veep
software
CO2: Analyze the Computation tool.
CO3: Illustrate the Boolean logic & basic PLC
CO4:Design PLC Programming for various applications
CO5:Apply PLC programming concepts in different fields of Science and Technology

Reference Books:
1. Programmable Logic Controllers by R. Bliesener, F Ebel, Festo. Didactic publishers, 2002.
2. Programmable Logic Controllers by W. Bolton, 4th Edition, Newnes, 2006.
3. Introduction to PLCs by Jay F. Hooper, 2nd Edition, Carolina Academic Press, 2006.

Online Learning Resources:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105088

150 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(AUTONOMOUS)

B. Tech V Sem L T P C

3 0 0 3

(AM20A0E501) Introduction to Operating Systems

Course Objectives:

● Understand basic concepts and functions of operating systems.

● Understand the processes, threads and scheduling algorithms.
● Provide good insight on various memory management techniques.
● Expose the students with different techniques of handling deadlocks.
● Explore the concept of file-system and its implementation issues.
● Implement various schemes for achieving system protection and security.
● Familiarize with the basics of Windows and Linux operating systems.
UNIT I

Operating Systems Overview: Operating system functions, Operating system structure,

operating systems Operations, protection and security, Kernel data Structures, Computing
Environments, Open-Source Operating Systems.

Operating System Structure: Operating System Services, User and Operating-System

Interface, system calls, Types of System Calls, system programs, operating system
structure, operating system debugging, System Boot.

Processes: Process concept, process Scheduling, Operations on processes, Inter process

Communication, Examples of IPC systems.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of this unit, the student will be able to

● Identify major components of operating systems and understand the types of

computing environments.(L1)
● Explore several open source operating systems.(L2)
● Recognize operating system services to users, processes and other systems.(L2)
● Understand the importance, features of a process and methods of communication
between processes.(L2)

151 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT II

Multithreaded Programming: Overview, Multi-core Programming, Multithreading Models,

Thread Libraries, Implicit threading, Threading Issues, Examples.

CPU Scheduling: Basic concepts, Scheduling-Criteria, Scheduling Algorithms, Thread

Scheduling, Multiple-Processor Scheduling, Real-Time CPU Scheduling, Algorithm Evaluation.

Inter-process Communication: Race conditions, Critical Regions, Mutual exclusion with

busy waiting, Sleep and wakeup, Semaphores, Mutexes, Monitors, Message passing,
Barriers, Classical IPC Problems - Dining philosopher’s problem, Readers and writers
problem.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of this unit, the student will be able to

● Improving CPU utilization through multi programming and multithreaded

programming. (L3)
● Examine several classical synchronization problems.(L2)
● Understand various process scheduling algorithms.(L2)
● Understand the importance, features of a process and methods of communication
between processes.(L2)

UNIT III

Memory Management: Swapping, contiguous memory allocation, segmentation, paging,

structure of the page table.

Virtual memory: demand paging, page-replacement, Allocation of frames, Thrashing,

Memory-Mapped Files, Allocating Kernel Memory, Examples

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of this unit, the student will be able to

● Examine the various techniques of allocating memory to processes. (L2)

● Summarize how segmentation and paging works in contemporary computer systems.
(L2)
● Understanding the benefits of virtual memory systems. (L2)

152 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT IV

Deadlocks: System Model, deadlock characterization, Ostrich algorithm, Methods of

handling Deadlocks, Deadlock prevention, Detection and Avoidance, Recovery from deadlock.

File Systems: Files, Directories, File system implementation, management and optimization,
Directory Implementation, Allocation Methods, Free-Space management.

Secondary-Storage Structure: Overview of disk structure, and attachment, Disk

scheduling,

RAID structure, Stable storage implementation.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of this unit, the student will be able to

● Investigate methods for preventing/avoiding deadlocks.(L3)

● Examine file systems and its interface in various operating systems.(L2)
● Analyze different disk scheduling algorithms.(L4)
● Understand the Stable-storage implementation and Free-Space management.(L2)

UNIT V

Protection: Goals of Protection, Principles of Protection, Domain of protection, Access

Matrix, Implementation of Access Matrix, Access control, Revocation of Access Rights,
Capability- Based systems, Language – Based Protection

Security: The Security problem, Program threats, System and Network threats,
Cryptography as a security tool, User authentication, Implementing security defenses,
Firewalling to protect systems and networks, Computer–security classifications.

Case Studies: Linux, Microsoft Windows.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of this unit, the student will be able to

● Identify various schemes available for achieving system protection.(L2)

● Acquiring knowledge about various countermeasures to security attacks.(L2)
● Outline protection and security in Linux and Microsoft Windows. (L2)
Course Outcomes:

● Understand theOS design structures, its services and basics of a Process. (L2)

153 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 ● Analyze various scheduling algorithms and examine concurrency mechanisms in
Operating Systems. (L4)
● Apply memory management techniques in the design of operating systems. (L3)

● Compare and contrast various structures and organization of the file system and
secondary storage structure. (L4)
● Apply different concepts of Protection and Security services in OS. (L3)
Text Books:

1. Operating System Concepts, Abraham Silberchatz, Peter B. Galvin, Greg Gagne, Ninth
Edition,2012, Wiley.
2. Modern Operating Systems, Andrew S Tanenbaum, Third Edition, Pearson Education,
2008
Reference Books:

1. Operating systems by A K Sharma, Universities Press.

2. Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles, Stallings, Sixth Edition, 2009,
Pearson Education.
3. Operating Systems, S. Haldar, A.A. Aravind, Pearson Education.
4. Operating Systems, A.S. Godbole, Second Edition, TMH.

Online Learning Resources:

● https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106144/
http://peterindia.net/OperatingSystems.html

154 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- V Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(CS20AOE502) COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE & ORGANIZATION
(ECE)

Course Objectives:
 The purpose of the course is to introduce principles of computer organization
and the basic architectural concepts.

UNIT I
Digital Computers: Introduction, Block diagram of Digital Computer, Definition of
Computer Organization, Computer Design and Computer Architecture. Register
Transfer Language and Micro operations: Register Transfer language, Register
Transfer, Bus and memory transfers, Arithmetic Micro operations, logic micro
operations, shift micro operations, Arithmetic logic shift unit. Basic Computer
Organization and Design: Instruction codes, Computer Registers Computer
instructions, Timing and Control, Instruction cycle, Memory Reference Instructions,
Input – Output and Interrupt.

UNIT II
Micro programmed Control: Control memory, Address sequencing, micro program
example, design of control unit.
Central Processing Unit: General Register Organization, Instruction Formats,
Addressing modes, Data Transfer and Manipulation, Program Control.

UNIT III
Data Representation: Data types, Complements, Fixed Point Representation, Floating
Point Representation.
Computer Arithmetic: Addition and subtraction, multiplication Algorithms, Division
Algorithms, Floating – point Arithmetic operations. Decimal Arithmetic unit, Decimal
Arithmetic operations.

UNIT IV
Input-Output Organization: Input-Output Interface, Asynchronous data transfer,
Modes of Transfer,
Priority Interrupt Direct memory Access.

155 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Memory Organization: Memory Hierarchy, Main Memory, Auxiliary memory, Associate
Memory,
Cache Memory.

UNIT V
Reduced Instruction Set Computer: CISC Characteristics, RISC Characteristics.
Pipeline and Vector Processing: Parallel Processing, Pipelining, Arithmetic Pipeline,
Instruction Pipeline, RISC Pipeline, Vector Processing, Array Processor. Multi
Processors: Characteristics of Multiprocessors, Interconnection Structures,
Interprocessor arbitration, Interprocessor communication and synchronization, Cache
Coherence.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Understand the basics of instructions sets and their impact on processor design.
CO2: Demonstrate an understanding of the design of the functional units of a
digital computer system.
CO3: Evaluate cost performance and design trade-offs in designing and Constructing
a computer processor including memory.
CO4:Design a pipeline for consistent execution of instructions with minimum
hazards.
CO5: Recognize and manipulate representations of numbers stored in digital
computers.

Textbook:
1. Computer System Architecture – M. Moris Mano, Third Edition, Pearson/PHI.

References:
1. Computer Organization – Car Hamacher, ZvonksVranesic, SafeaZaky, V th
Edition, McGraw Hill.
2. Computer Organization and Architecture – William Stallings Sixth Edition,
Pearson/PHI.
3. Structured Computer Organization – Andrew S. Tanenbaum, 4th Edition,
PHI/Pearson.

156 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech – V Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3

(CH20AOE501) CHEMISTRY OF POLYMERS AND ITS APPLICATIONS

Course Objectives:

• To understand the basic principles of polymers

• To synthesize the different polymeric materials and their characterization by
various instrumental methods.
• To impart knowledge to the students about fundamental concepts of Hydro gels
of polymer networks, surface phenomenon by micelles
• To enumerate the applications of polymers in engineering

Unit – I : Polymers-Basics and Characterization

Basic concepts: monomers, repeat units, degree of polymerization, linear, branched and
network polymers, classification of polymers, Polymerization: condensation, addition,
radical chain, ionic and coordination and copolymerization. Average molecular weight
concepts: number, weight and viscosity average molecular weights, polydispersity and
molecular weight distribution Measurement of molecular weight: end group, viscosity, light
scattering, osmotic and ultracentrifugation methods, analysis and testing of polymers.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of this unit, the students will be able to

• Classify the polymers (L3)

• Explain polymerization mechanism (L2)
• Differentiate addition, condensation polymerizations (L2)
• Describe measurement of molecular weight of polymer (L2)

Unit – II : Synthetic
Polymers
Addition and condensation polymerization processes – Bulk, Solution, Suspension
and Emulsion polymerization. Preparation and significance, classification of polymers based
on physical properties, Thermoplastics, Thermosetting plastics, Fibers and elastomers,
General Applications.

Preparation of Polymers based on different types of monomers, Olefin polymers, Diene

polymers, nylons, Urea - formaldehyde, phenol - formaldehyde and melamine Epoxy and
Ion exchange resins. Characterization of polymers by IR, NMR, XRD.

Learning
Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the students will be able to

157 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 • Differentiate Bulk, solution, Suspension and emulsion polymerization (L2)
• Describe fibers and elastomers (L2)
• Identify the thermosetting and thermo polymers (L3)
• Characterize the properties of polymers by IR, NMR, XRD etc.,

Unit – III : Natural Polymers & Modified cellulosics

Natural Polymers: Chemical & Physical structure, properties, source, important chemical
modifications, applications of polymers such as cellulose, lignin, starch, rosin, shellac,
latexes, vegetable oils and gums, proteins.

Modified cellulosics: Cellulose esters and ethers such as Ethyl cellulose, CMC, HPMC,
cellulose acetals, Liquid crystalline polymers; specialty plastics- PES, PAES, PEEK, PEAK.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the students will be able to

• Describe the properties and applications of polymers (L2)

• Interpret the properties of cellulose, lignin, starch, rosin, latex etc., (L2)
• Discuss the special plastics of PES, PAES, PEEK etc., (L3)
• Explain modified cellulosics (L2)

Unit-IV: Hydrogels of Polymer networks and Drug delivery

Definitions of Hydrogel, polymer networks, Types of polymer networks, Methods involved in

hydrogel preparation, Classification, Properties of hydrogels, Applications of hydrogels in
drug delivery.

Introduction to drug systems including, drug development, regulation, absorption and

disposition, routes of administration and dosage forms. Advanced drug delivery systems
and controlled release.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of this unit, the students will be able to

• Identify types of polymer networks (L3)

• Describe methods involve in hydrogel preparation (L2)
• Explain applications of hydrogels in drug delivery (L2)
• Demonstrate the advanced drug delivery systems and controlled release (L2)

Unit – V : Surface phenomena

Surface tension, adsorption on solids, electrical phenomena at interfaces including

electrokinetics, micelles, reverse micelles, solubilization. Application of photoelectron
spectroscopy, ESCA and Auger spectroscopy to the study of surfaces.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of this unit, the students will be able to

158 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 • Demonstrate electrical phenomena at interfaces including electrokinetics,
miselles, reverse micelles etc., (L2)
• Explain photoelectron spectroscopy (L2)
• Discuss ESCA and Auger spectroscopy to the study of surfaces (L3)
• Differentiate micelles and reverse micelles (L2)

Course Outcomes

At the end of the course, the student will be able to:

• Understand the state of art synthesis of Polymeric materials
• Understand the hydro gels preparation, properties and applications in drug
delivery system.
• Characterize polymers materials using IR, NMR, XRD.
• Analyze surface phenomenon fo micelles and characterise using
photoelectron spectroscopy, ESCA and Auger spectroscopy.

References :

1. A Text book of Polymer science, Billmayer

2. Organic polymer Chemistry, K.J.Saunders, Chapman and Hall
3. Advanced Organic Chemistry, B.Miller, Prentice Hall
4. Polymer Chemistry – G.S.Mishra
5. Polymer Chemistry – Gowarikar
6. Physical Chemistry –Galston
7. Drug Delivery- Ashim K. Misra

159 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech- V Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EE20APE502) CONTROL SYSTEM ENGINEERING

Course Objectives:
To make the students learn about:
 The effect of feedback, the use of block diagram algebra and Mason’s gain formula to
find the overall transfer function
 Transient and steady state response and time domain specifications
 The concept of stability by Routh’s stability criterion and Root loci
 Frequency domain specifications, Bode diagrams and Nyquist plots
 State space modeling of Control system and the concept of controllability and
observability.

UNIT – I

CONTROL SYSTEMS CONCEPTS

Open loop and closed loop control systems and their differences- Classification of control
systems, Feedback characteristics, Mathematical models – Differential equations of
translational and rotational mechanical systems and electrical systems, Analogous Systems,
Block diagram reduction methods – Signal flow graphs - Reduction using Mason’s gain
formula.

Principle of operation of DC and AC Servo motor, Transfer function of DC servo motor - AC

servo motor, Synchros.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the unit, the student will be able to
 Write the differential equations for mechanical and electrical systems(L3)
 Obtain the transfer function from block diagrams, servo motors and signal flow
graphs (L4)

UNIT-II

TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS

Step Response - Impulse Response - Time response of first order systems – Characteristic
Equation of Feedback control systems, Transient response of second order systems - Time
domain specifications – Steady state response - Steady state errors and error constants,
Basics of P, PI, PID Controllers.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the unit, the student will be able to
 Analyze the time domain specifications(L4)
 Calculate the steady state errors(L4)

160 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
  Understand about Proportional, Integral and Derivative controllers along with
combinations(L2)

UNIT– III

STABILITY ANALYSIS IN TIME DOMAIN

The concept of stability – Routh’s stability criterion – Stability and conditional stability –
limitations of Routh’s stability. The Root locus concept - construction of root loci-effects of
adding poles and zeros to G(s)H(s) on the root loci.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the unit, the student will be able to
 Analyze the concept of stability in time domain(L4)
 Apply the concept of Routh’s stability and Root locus in time domain (L5)

UNIT– IV

FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS

Introduction, Frequency domain specifications-Bode diagrams-Determination of Frequency
domain specifications and transfer function from the Bode Diagram-Stability Analysis from
Bode Plots. Polar Plots-Nyquist Plots- Phase margin and Gain margin-Stability Analysis.
Basics of Compensation techniques – Lag, Lead, Lag-Lead Compensator in frequency
Domain.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the unit, the student will be able to
 Evaluate the frequency domain specifications from Bode, Polar and Nyquist plots (L5)
 Design Compensators for various systems (L5)
 Deducing transfer functions from Bode Plots(L4)
 Understand difference between Phase and Gain margins (L2)

UNIT– V

STATE SPACE ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS

Concepts of state, state variables and state model, state models - differential equations &
Transfer function models - Block diagrams, Transfer function from state model, Solving the
Time invariant state Equations- State Transition Matrix and it’s Properties, The concepts of
controllability and observability.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the unit, the student will be able to
 Understand the concept of state space, controllability and observability (L2)
 Obtain the transfer function from sate space and vice versa (L4)
 Understand the state transition method of solving time invariant state equations (L2)

Text Books:

161 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 1. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, 5th edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd., 2010.
2. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, “Control Systems Engineering” 5th edition, New Age
International (P) Limited Publishers, 2007.

Reference Books:
1. M. Gopal, “Control Systems Principles & Design” 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Education,
2012.
2. B. C. Kuo and FaridGolnaraghi, “Automatic Control Systems” 8th edition, John wiley
and sons, 2003.
3. Joseph J Distefano III, “Feedback and Control Systems”, Allen R Stubberud& Ivan J
Williams, 2nd Edition, Schaum's outlines, McGraw Hill Education, 2013.
4. Graham C. Goodwin, “Control System Design” Stefan F. Graebe and Mario E. Salgado,
Pearson, 2000.
5. Gene F. Franklin, “Feedback Control of Dynamic Systems”, J.D. Powell and Abbas
Emami- Naeini, 6th Edition, Pearson, 2010.

Course Outcomes:
After completing the course, the student should be able to:
CO-1:Understand the concepts of control systems classification, feedback effect,
mathematical modelling, and and state space analysis. Apply the concepts of Block
diagram reduction, Signal flow graph
CO-2:Analyse time response analysis, error constants, and stability characteristics of
a given mathematical model using different methods.
CO-3:Apply the concepts of RH and Root locus for stability calculations
CO-4:Analyze system behavior of the system in frequency domain. frequency
response characteristics, Design and develop different compensators. Bode, Nyquist,
Polar plots for stability calculations
CO-5:Analyze system behavior based on the state space analysis of that system.
controllability and observability

162 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- V Sem
L T P C
3 0 0 3

(EC20APE501) MECHATRONICS

Course Objectives:
1. Learn about the operating principle of various sensors and its importance in real
time measurement applications.
2. Acquire the knowledge to model Electrical system and Mechanical system building
blocks.
3. Calculate the transfer function of both First–order and Second-order systems.
4. Learn about the interfacing procedure of Peripherals with Programmable Logic
Controllers.
5. Study some of the recent Real-time Mechatronics system Design and Modelling
solutions.

Unit I
Sensors and Transducers:
What is Mechatronics, Performance terminology, Microprocessor-based controllers, The
Mechatronics approach, Performance terminology, Displacement, Position and Proximity,
Velocity and Motion, Force, Fluid pressure, Liquid flow and level, Temperature and Light
sensors, Selection of sensors and Inputting data by switches.

Unit II
Electrical Actuation Systems and System Models:
Electrical Systems, Mechanical switches, Solid-state switches, Solenoids, DC Motors, AC
Motors and Stepper Motors, Mathematical models, Mechanical system building blocks,
Electrical system building blocks, Fluid system building blocks and Thermal system
building blocks.

Unit III
Dynamic Response and Transfer functions:
Modelling dynamic systems, First–order and Second-order systems, Performance
measures for second-order systems, The transfer function, First–order and Second-order
163 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 systems, Systems in series, Systems with feedback loops and Effect of Pole location on
transient response.

Unit IV
Programmable Logic Controllers:
Introduction, Basic structure, Input/output processing, Programming, Mnemonics,
Timers, Internal relays and Counters, Shift registers, Master and Jump controls, Data
Handling, Analogue input/output and Selection of PLC.

Unit V
Mechatronic Systems:
Traditional and Mechatronics designs, Possible Mechatronics design solutions and Case
studies of Mechatronic Systems.

Text Books:
3. W.Bolton, “Mechatronics-Electronic Control systems in Mechanical and Electrical
Engineering”, Third Edition, Pearson Education Limited, 2018.
4. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and Applications”,
McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2017.
References:
3. Davis G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and
Measurement systems”, Second edition, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2019.
4. Devdas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics System Design”, Second edition,
Cengage learning India Pvt. Ltd., 2012.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Decide the appropriate sensor for a given application of interest.
CO2: Develop a simulation model for simple physical systems and explain
mechatronics design process.
CO3: Summarize the effects of Pole location on system transient response.
CO4: Interface Peripheral devices with Programmable Logic Controllers.
CO5: Analyze possible solutions in the design of Mechatronic systems.

164 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- V Sem
L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20APE502) NANOELECTRONICS

Course Objectives:
1. To understand the evolution and basics of Nanoelectronics.
2. To understand various fabrication methods in nanotechnology (top down & bottom
up).
3. To analyze and discuss various characterization methods in nanotechnology (optical,
electrical, AFM, SEM, TEM, and nanoindentation).
4. To understand nano electronic systems and building blocks such as: low-
dimensional semiconductors, hetero structures, carbon nano tubes, quantum dots,
nano wires etc.
5. To familiarize students with the present research front in Nanoelectronics and to be
able to critically assess future trends.

Unit I
Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics:
Moore’s Law, Wave functions, wave packets, Schrodinger’s wave equation, potential
barriers and tunneling, Fermi-Dirac statistics, Density of states, Limitations of
conventional FET in nanoscales, Quantum Well, Quantum wire, Quantum dot, current
flow in two terminal Quantum dots, ballistic transport, Single Electron Transistor

Unit II
Introduction to methods of fabrication of Nano-Layers: Physical vapour
deposition- evaporation & Sputtering, Chemical vapour deposition, Molecular Beam
Epitaxy, Ion Implantation, Formation of Silicon Dioxide- dry and wet oxidation methods.
Fabrication of nanoparticles: grinding with iron balls, laser ablation, reduction
methods, sol gel, self-assembly, precipitation of quantum dots.

Unit III
Introduction to characterization of nanostructures: Principle of operation of
Scanning Tunneling Microscope, Atomic Force Microscope, Scanning Electron microscope
- specimen interaction, X-Ray Diffraction analysis

Unit IV

165 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Basic quantum structures: Quantum wells, quantum wires and quantum dots, Single
electron devices charge quantization, energy quantization, Coulomb blockade, Coulomb
staircase, Bloch oscillations.

Unit V
Nano electronic Devices: Carbon nanotubes based devices CNFET, characteristics;
Spin-based devices spin FET, characteristics, Applications of MOSFET, CNFET and Spin
FET devices.

Text Books:
1. George W Hanson, “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics”, Prentice Hall, 2008.
2. Karl Goser, “Nanoelectronics and Nano systems: From Transistors to Molecular and
Quantum Devices”, Springer, First edition, 2005.
References:
1. Rainer Waser (Ed), “Nanoelectronics and Information Technology”, Second Edition,
Wiley VCH, 2003.
2. Mary Eshaghian- Wilner, “Bio inspired and Nano Scale Integrated Computing”, Wiley,
2009.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Get an insight of quantum mechanical effects associated with low dimensional
semiconductors.
CO2: Explain the different processes involved in the fabrication of nanoparticles and
nanolayers.
CO3: Explain the different techniques for characterizing nanolayers and nanoparticles
CO4: Integrate and model the device with basic quantum structures.
CO5: Correlating device structures with type of materials, which are commonly used
for fabrication, defend the tunneling devices with several parameters of hetero
structures; compare characteristics study for the MOS/FET devices.

166 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- V Sem
L T P C
3 0 0 1.5

(EC20APC504)DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS LAB

Course Objectives:

1. To Develops skills for performance analysis of practical digital communication systems.

2. To understand the fundamental concepts on TDM, Pulse modulations& digital
modulation techniques.
3. To evaluate the performance of PCM, DPCM and DM in a digital communication system.
4. To learns how to use MATLAB software and hardware effectively and creatively to
synthesis digital communication systems.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

Minimum of Twelve experiments to be conducted

Part –A Hardware Experiment (All experiments)

1. Time Division Multiplexing

2. Pulse Code Modulation
3. Differential Pulse code Modulation
4. Delta Modulation
5. Frequency Shift Keying
6. Differential Phase Shift Keying
7. Verification of Sampling Theorem

Part –B Software Experiment (Any Seven experiments)

1. Sampling Theorem-Verification
2. Time Division Multiplexing
3. Delta Modulation
4. Pulse Code Modulation
5. Differential Pulse code Modulation
6. Amplitude Shift Keying
7. Frequency Shift Keying
8. Phase Shift Keying
9. Differential Phase shift Keying

167 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 10. QPSK Modulation and Demodulation
Course Outcomes:

CO1: Understand real time behavior of different digital modulation schemes and technically
visualize spectra of different digital modulation schemes.

CO2: Design and implement different modulation and demodulation techniques.

CO3: Analyze digital modulation & demodulation techniques.

CO4: Simulate all digital modulation and demodulation techniques in MATLAB.

Equipment:

1. Regulated Power Supply (0-30) V .

2. CROs (0-20)MHz.

3. Function Generators (0-3)MHz

4. RF Signal Generators (0-1000)MHz

5. Multimeters.

6. Required Electronic components (active and passive) for the conduction of experiments
from 1-7

7. Radio Receiver Demo kits or Trainers.

8. RF power meter frequency range (0 – 1000)MHz

9. Spectrum Analyzer

Software Required:
1. Computer Systems with latest specifications

2. Connected in LAN (Optional)

3. Operating system (Windows XP)

4. Simulations software (MATLAB).

168 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- V Sem
L T P C
3 0 0 1.5

(EC20APC505)MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LAB

Course Objectives:
1. To study programming based on 8086 microprocessor and 8051 microcontrollers.
2. To study 8086 microprocessor based ALP using arithmetic, logical and shift
operations.
3. To study modular and Dos/Bios programming using 8086 microprocessor.
4. To study to interface 8086 with I/O and other devices.
5. To study and interface 8051 micro controller with I/O and other devices.
Part- A
8086 Microprocessor Programs using MASM/TASM/8086 kit.
(Any Six Experiments)
1. Introduction to MASM/TASM Programming
2. Arithmetic operations.
3. Multiplication and Division.
4. Logical operations.
5. String operations and Instruction prefix: Move Block, Reverse string, Sorting,
String comparison.
6. Code conversion.
7. Multi byte arithmetic operations.
8. DOS/BIOS Programming, reading keyboard -Display characters
Part-B
8086 Interfacing:
(Any Two Experiments)
9. 8259 – Interrupt Controller and its interfacing programs
10. 8255 – PPI and its interfacing programs (A /D, D/A,)
11. 8255 – PPI and its interfacing programs (stepper motor,)
12. 7-Segment Display.

Part-C:

169 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Microcontroller 8051 Trainer kit:
(Any Four Experiments)
1. Addition and Subtraction– Signed and unsigned Arithmetic operation.
2. Multiplication and Division – Signed and unsigned Arithmetic operation.
3. Logic operations – Shift and rotate.
4. Sorting- Ascending and descending order.
5. Timer/Counter in 8051
6. Interrupt handling in 8051

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Demonstrate ability to handle arithmetic and Logical operations using assembly
language programming in MASM/TASM.
CO2: Demonstrate ability to handle string instructions using assembly language
programming in MASM/TASM.
CO3: Demonstrate ability to handle sorting operations and using assembly language
programming in MASM/TASM.
CO4: Demonstrate ability to handle Arithmetic and Logical operations using 8051
trainer kits.
CO5: Demonstrate ability to handle sorting operations using 8051 trainer kits.
CO6: To interface the Microprocessor/Microcontroller with various peripherals for
various applications.

170 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- V Sem L T P C
1 0 2 2

(EC20ASC501) PCB DESIGN AND PROTOTYPE DEVELOPMENT

Course Objectives:
• To know the various component and symbols in basic electronic circuit
• To understand the PCB in detail
• To analyze the PCB design using KICAD tools

UNIT I
Fundamental of basic electronics:
Fundamental of basic electronics: Component identification, Component symbols & their
footprints, basic electronic circuits, understand schematic, Introduction PCB, Difference
between PWB and PCB, Types of PCBs: Single Layer, Multi-Layer, Surface Mount, PCB
Materials, Electronic Component packaging.

Learning Outcomes:
● Identification basic electronic circuit symbols and their footprints
● Understand the different types of PCB

UNIT II
Making Printed Circuit Boards: Layout Design, Copper Clad Preparation, Etching the PCB,
drilling and soldering the PCB, Introduction to Electronic Design Automation (EDA): History
of EDA, Different EDA Tools, Creating new PCB, Browsing footprints libraries, sets up the PCB
layers, Design rule checking, Track width selection, Component selection, Routing and
completion of the design. Design Issues: Transmission line, Cross talk and Thermal
management.

Learning Outcomes:
● Understand the EDA Tools
● Analyze Design Issues: Transmission line, Cross talk and Thermal management.

UNIT III
Introduction to Development Tools: Introduction to PCB Design using KiCad tools.

171 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
PCB Design Process: PCB Design Flow, Placement and routing, Steps involved in layout
design, General design factors for digital and analogue circuits, Layout and Artwork making
for Single-side, double-side and Multilayer Boards, Design for manufacturability, Design-
specification standards.

Learning Outcomes:
● Implement digital and analog circuits using PCB design
● Understand the Artwork making of Single-side, double-side and Multilayer Boards
Practice Exercises: Any Ten experiments are to be done (13th Experiment is
Mandatory)

1. Practice following PCB Design steps

● Schematic Design: Familiarization of the Schematic Editor, Schematic creation,

Annotation, and Netlist generation.
● Layout Design: Familiarization of Footprint Editor, Mapping of components, Creation
of PCB layout Schematic.
● Create new schematic components.
● Create new component footprints.

2. Regulator circuit using 7805.

3. Inverting amplifier using op-amp.

4. Full-wave rectifier .

5. Astable multivibrator using IC555.

6. RC phase shift oscillator using BJT.

7. Full adder circuit.

8. RS flip flop with logic circuit.

9. Four-bit comparator.

10. LED Flashing / Blinking Circuit using 555 Timer IC.

11. Automatic street light controller using LDR & Transistor.

12. Two way traffic light controller using 555 timers.

13. Fabricate a Single sided PCB, Mount the components and assemble them in a cabinet for
anyone of the circuits mentioned in the above listed.

References:
1. Jon Varteresian, Fabricating Printed Circuit Boards, Newnes, 2002
2. R. Tummala, Fundamentals of Microsystems Packaging, McGraw-Hill 2001

172 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
3. C. Robertson. PCB Designer´s Reference. Prentice Hall, 2003
4. Open-source EDA Tool KiCad Tutorial: http://kicad-pcb.org/help/tutorials
http://www.wikihow.com/Create-Printed-Circuit-Boards
http://www.siongboon.com/projects/2005-09-07_home_pcb_fabrication/
http://reprap.org/wiki/MakePCBInstructions#Making_PCBs_yourself
5. Open-source EDA Tool Eagle Tutorial: https://en.freedownloadmanager.org/users
choice/Eagle_Pcb_Design_For_32bit_Windows_7.html
6. Open-source EDA Tool proteus Tutorial: https://softfamous.com/proteus

Course Outcomes:

CO1: Learn how to design schematic and layout using PCB.

CO2: Design and implement experiments using PCB.
CO3: Test and analyze the working of PCB.
CO4: Identify different components required in PCB Design.
CO5: Aware of PCB Making Process.
CO6: Able to design different circuits using design tools.
Software Required:
1. Computer Systems with latest specifications
2. Connected in LAN
3. Operating system (Windows10)
4. Simulations software (Eagle, kicad).

173 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech – V Sem L T P C
2 0 0 0
(BA20AMC501) CONSTITUTION OF INDIA
Course Objectives:
 To enable the student to understand the importance of constitution

 To understand the structure of executive, legislature and judiciary

 To understand philosophy of fundamental rights and duties

 To understand the autonomous nature of constitutional bodies like Supreme Court

and high court controller and auditor general of India and Election Commission of
India.

 Tounderstandthecentral-staterelationinfinancialandadministrativecontrol

UNIT-I

Introduction to Indian Constitution – Constitution -Meaning of the term - Indian Constitution-

Sources and constitutional history - Features– Citizenship – Preamble - Fundamental Rights
and Duties-Directive Principles of State Policy.

Learning Outcomes:-

After completion of this unit student will

 Understand the concept of Indian constitution

 Apply the knowledge on directive principle of state policy

 Analyze the History and features of Indian constitution

 Learn about Preamble, Fundamental Rights and Duties

UNIT-II

Union Government and its Administration Structure of the Indian Union-Federalism -Centre-
State relationship–President’s Role, power and position-PM and Council of ministers - Cabinet
and Central Secretariat–LokSabha–RajyaSabha - The Supreme Court and High Court-Powers

Learning Outcomes:-

After completion of this unit student will

 Understand the structure of Indian government

 Differentiate between the state and central government

 Explain the role of President and Prime Minister

 Know the Structure of Supreme Court and High court

UNIT-III

174 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
State Government and its Administration - Governor - Role and Position -CM and Council of
ministers –State Secretariat-Organization Structure and Functions

Learning Outcomes:-

After completion of this unit student will

 Understand the structure of state government

 Analyze the role of Governor and Chief Minister

 Explain the role of State Secretariat

 Differentiate between structure and functions of state secretariat

UNIT-IV

Local Administration-District’s Administration Head-Role and Importance-Municipalities -

Mayor and role of Elected Representatives -CEO of Municipal Corporation Pachayati Raj -
Functions– PRI –Zilla Parishath - Elected officials and their roles – CEO, Zilla Parishath –Block
level Organizational Hierarchy-(Different departments)-Village level –Role of Elected and
Appointed officials-Importance of grass root democracy

Learning Outcomes:-

After completion of this unit student will

 UnderstandthelocalAdministration

 Compareandcontrastdistrictadministration’sroleandimportance

 AnalyzetheroleofMayor andelectedrepresentativesofMunicipalities

 LearnabouttheroleofZillaParishathblocklevelorganization

UNIT-V

Election Commission-Election Commission-Roleof Chief Election Commissioner and Election

Commissionerate -State Election Commission -Functions of Commissions for thewelfare
ofSC/ST/OBC andWomen

Learning Outcomes:-

After completion of this unit student will

 KnowtheroleofElectionCommission

 Contrast and compare the role of Chief Election commissioner and Commissionerate

 Analyzetheroleofstateelectioncommission

 EvaluatevariouscommissionsvizSC/ST/OBCandwomen

Course Outcomes:-

 At the end of the course, students will be able to

175 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
  Understand historical background of the constitution making and its importance for

 Building a democratic India.

 Understand the functioning of three wings of the government ie., executive,

legislative and judiciary.

 Understand the value of the fundamental rights and duties for becoming good citizen
of India.

 Analyze the decentralization of power between central, state and local self-
government

 Apply the knowledge in strengthening of the constitutional institutions like CAG,

 Election Commission and UPSC for sustaining democracy.

Textbooks:

 J.A. Siwach,“DynamicsofIndianGovernment&Politics”.

 H.M.Sreevai,“ConstitutionalLawofIndia”,4theditionin3volumes(UniversalLawPublication)

 J.C.Johari, “IndianGovernment andPolitics”, HansIndia

 M.V.Pylee, “IndianConstitution”, DurgaDasBasu,

HumanRightsinConstitutionalLaw,Prentice–Hallof India Pvt. Ltd. NewDelhi

References:

 J.A. Siwach,“DynamicsofIndianGovernment&Politics”.

 H.M.Sreevai,“ConstitutionalLawofIndia”,4theditionin3volumes(UniversalLawPublication)

 J.C.Johari, “IndianGovernment andPolitics”,HansIndia

 M.V.Pylee, “IndianConstitution”, DurgaDasBasu,

HumanRightsinConstitutionalLaw,Prentice–Hallof India Pvt. Ltd. NewDelhi

E-RESOURCES:

 nptel.ac.in/courses/109104074/8

 nptel.ac.in/courses/109104045/

 nptel.ac.in/courses/101104065/

 www.hss.iitb.ac.in/en/lecture-details

www.iitb.ac.in/en/event/2nd-lecture-institute-lecture-series-indian-constitution

176 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

L T P C
B.Tech-V Sem 2 0 0 0

(IT20AMC501) PROBLEM SOLVING AND PROGRAMMING

(Lateral Entry Students Only)

Course Objectives:

 To learn how to solve a given problem.

 To illustrate the basic concepts of C programming language.
 To discuss the concepts of Functions, Arrays, Pointers and Structures.
 To familiar with Dynamic memory allocation concepts.
 To apply concepts of structures and files to solve real word problems.

UNIT-1:

Introduction to Problem Solving: Problem Solving Aspect, Problem

Identification, Problem Understanding, Algorithm Development, Solution
Planning, Flowcharts, flowgorithm.
Overview of C: History Of C, C Language Elements, Basic Structure of C
Program, C Tokens-Variables and Data Types, Operators, Expressions and Type
Conversions.

Learning Outcomes:
The students will be able to
 Develop solution through problem understanding and decomposition (L6).
 Develop basic flowcharts for performing input and output and
computations(L3).
 Solve Numerical Problems using Flowgorithm (L3).
 Use C basic concepts to write simple C programs (L3).

UNIT-2:

Control Statements: Selection Statements- if and switch statements.

Iterative Statements: for, while and do-while statements.

Jump Statements: break and continue statements.

177 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Learning Outcomes:

The students will be able to

 Implement C program using Conditional statements (L2).
 Implement C program using Iterative statements (L2).

UNIT-3:
Arrays: Declaration, accessing array elements, Storing values, Operations on
arrays, Multi-dimensional arrays.
Functions: Introduction, Using Functions, Function declaration, Function
definition and Function call, Parameter passing, Passing arrays to functions,
Recursion, Storage classes.

Learning Outcomes: The students will be able to

 Writing Structured programs using Functions (L5).

 Apply arrays concepts on real time applications (L6).

UNIT-4:
Pointers: Declaration and Initialization of pointer variables, Pointer
arithmetic, Pointers and arrays, Pointer to pointer, Array of pointers, Pointers
and functions, Dynamic Memory Allocation.
Strings: Introduction to Strings, String handling functions, Preprocessor Directives.

Learning Outcomes: The students will be able to

 Use pointers to write c Programs (L3).

 Understand the concepts of preprocessors (L2).
 Apply Dynamic Memory Allocation concepts on real time applications (L6).

UNIT-5:

Structures: Introduction, Nested Structures, Array of Structures, Structures and

Functions, Unions.
Files in C: Using Files in C, Read data from Files, Writing data to Files,
Randomaccess to files, Command-line Arguments

178 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Learning Outcomes:
The students will be able to
 Use the concepts of Structures and Unions to write C programs (L3).
 Apply various operations on Files (L6).

Text Books:

1. Reema Thareja, Programming in C, Oxford University Press, AICTE

Edition,2018.
2. R.G. Dromey, “How to Solve it by Computer”. 2014, Pearson.

Reference Books:

1. Jeri R. Hanly, Ellot B. Koffman, Problem Solving and Program Design in

C, 5/e,Pearson
2. B. A. Forouzan and R. F. Gilberg, Computer Science: A Structured
Programming Approach Using C, 3/e, Cengage Learning, 2007.
3. Brian W Kernighan and Dennis M Ritchie, The C Programming
Language,Second Edition, Prentice Hall Publication.
4. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel -C How to Program with an introduction to
C++,Eighth Edition

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
 Solve computational problems (L3).
 Select the features of C language appropriate for solving a problem (L4)
 Design computer programs for real world problems (L6)
 Organize the data which is more appropriated for solving a problem (L6).

179 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VI Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20APC601)DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
Course Objectives:
1. To summarize and analyze the concepts of signals, systems in time and
frequency domain.
2. To learn properties of DFT and its application to linear filtering.
3. To understand the designs of IIR and FIR filters.
4. To outline need of Multi-rate DSP.
5. To introduce the concepts of DSP architecture and its applications.
UNIT- I
Frequency analysis of Signals and Systems:
Review of Discrete time signals and systems, Discrete Fourier transform, Relationship of
the DFT to other transforms, Properties of DFT, Linear filtering based on the DFT-
Filtering of long data sequences - overlap save and overlap add method.
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT): Efficient computation of DFT - Radix-2 - Decimation-
in-time (DIT), Decimation-in-frequency (DIF) algorithms, Inverse FFT.
UNIT- II
Infinite Impulse Response Filters:
Design of IIR filters from Analog filters –Approximation of derivatives, Impulse
invariance method, and bilinear transformation. Frequency transformation in the
analog domain, Illustrative Problems.
Realization of IIR Filter: Structures for IIR system- Direct-Form-I, Direct-Form-II,
Transposed form, Cascade-Form, and Parallel-Form Structures.
UNIT- III
Finite Impulse Response Filters:
Design of linear phase FIR filters using Fourier series method - FIR filter design using
windows (Rectangular, Hamming and Hanning window), Frequency sampling
method, Illustrative Problems.
Realization of FIR Filter: Structures for FIR system–Direct-Form, Cascade-Form and
Linear Phase Structure.

Unit -IV
Multi-rate Digital Signal Processing:
Introduction, Decimation, and interpolation, sampling rate conversion by a rational
factor, Implementation of sampling rate conversion, Multi-stage implementation of

180 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 sampling rate conversion, sampling rate conversion of band-pass signals,
Applications of multi-rate signal processing.

UNIT- V
Architectures for Programmable DSP Devices:
Basic Architectural features, DSP computation Building Blocks, Bus Architectures and
Memory, Data Addressing Capabilities, Address Generation Unit, Programmability
and Program Execution, Speed Issues.

Text Books:
1. John G. Proakis & Dimitris G.Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing – Principles,
Algorithms & Applications, 4th Edition, Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2007.
2. A.V. Oppenheim, R.W. Schafer and J.R. Buck, Discrete-Time Signal Processing,
8th Indian Reprint, Pearson, 2004.
References:
1. Emmanuel C. Ifeachor & Barrie. W. Jervis, Digital Signal Processing, 2 nd
Edition, Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2002.
2. P.Ramesh Babu, Digital Signal Processing, SCITECH, 7 th Edition, 2019.
3. Sanjit K. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing – A Computer Based Approach, Tata
Mc Graw Hill, 2007.
Course Outcomes:

CO1: Analyze DFT computation using fast algorithms.

CO2: Design & Implementation of IIR filters using different techniques.

CO3: Design of FIR filters based on windowing methods.

CO4: Analyse multi-rate signal processing techniques.

CO5: Understanding the architecture details and instruction sets of fixed and

Floating point DSP’s.

181 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VI Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20APC602) MICROWAVE ENGINEERING AND
OPTICAL COMMUNICATIONS
Course Objectives:
1. To develop the knowledge on transmission lines for microwaves, cavity resonators
and waveguide components and applications.
2. To understand the scattering matrix parameters and its use.
3. To differentiate Linear beam tubes and crossed field tubes in terms of operation
and performance.
4. To remember various types of fibers, modes, configurations and signal
degradations.
5. To analyze signal degradation in optical fibers and compare the performance of
various optical sources and detectors.

Unit I
Introduction: Introduction to Microwaves, Microwave spectrum and bands,
applications of Microwaves.
Rectangular Waveguides- Solution of Wave Equation in Rectangular Coordinates,
TE/TM mode analysis, Expressions for fields, Characteristic equation and cutoff
frequencies, filter characteristics, dominant and degenerate modes.
Circular Waveguides- Introduction, Expression for cut off frequencies

Learning Outcomes:
• Know the importance of waveguides (L1).
• Derive field expressions for different modes of propagation in the waveguides(L3).

Unit II
WAVEGUIDE COMPONENTS AND APPLICATIONS: Introduction to scattering
parameters and their properties, Terminations, Attenuators, Phase shifters, Hybrid
Tees (H-plane, E-plane, Magic Tees), Hybrid ring, Directional Couplers – Bethe hole
and Two hole Couplers, Microwave propagation in Ferrites, Microwave devices
employing Faraday rotation – Isolator, Circulator, Deriving Scattering matrix for
Microwave passive devices.
182 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Learning Outcomes:
• Understand principle of operation of all passive microwave devices (L1).
• Know the importance of Scattering parameters and their properties (L1)

Unit III
MICROWAVE TUBES
Linear Beam Tubes – Two cavity Klystron amplifier -velocity modulation, bunching
process, output power, Reflex Klystron oscillator, power output and efficiency,
Travelling Wave Tube (TWT) – Bunching process and amplification process.
Crossed Field Tubes – Magnetron oscillator, pi-mode operation, power output and
efficiency, Hartree Condition, Mode jumping in Magnetron, Principle of operation of
Cross Field Amplifier (CFA).

Learning Outcomes:
• Understand principle of operation of Microwave Tubes and semiconductor devices
(L1).
• Derive the expressions power output and efficiency of all microwave devices (L3).

Unit IV
OPTICAL COMMUNICATIONS:
Overview of Optical Fiber Communications, optical fibers – Structures, Optical fiber
modes and configurations, Signal degradation in optical fibers – Signal attenuation,
absorption, scattering losses, Bending Losses, Core and Cladding losses, Signal
distortion in optical waveguides, Information capacity determination, Group delay,
waveguide dispersion, Inter model dispersion.

Learning Outcomes:
• Remember the optical fiber types, modes, configurations, and signal degradation
types (L1).
• Analyze the signal degradation in optical fibers (L4).

Unit V
OPTICAL SOURCES AND DETECTORS: Introduction, LEDs – structure – Light
source, Quantum efficiency, Modulation of an LED, LASER diodes, Source to Fiber
power launching, LASER diode to fiber coupling, LED coupling to single mode fibers,
Fiber, Splicing, Optical Fiber connectors, Photo diodes – Principle of Photo diodes,
Avalanche Photodiodes, Photo detector noise, detector response time, Comparison of
Photo diodes.

183 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Learning Outcomes:
• Understand the working principle of optical sources, detectors and power coupling
(L2)
• Compare the performance of various optical source and detectors (L4)
Text Books:
1. Samuel Y. Liao, “Microwave Devices and Circuits”, PHI publications, Third Edition,
1997. (For Units 1,2 and 3)
2. Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communications”, McGraw Hill, Third Edition, 2000.
(For Units 4, and 5)
References:
1. Om. P. Gandhi, “Microwave: Engineering and Applications”, Kai Fa Book Company,
1981.
2. R. E. Collin, “Foundations for Microwave Engineering”, Wiley Student
Edition, Second Edition, 2009.
3. F E Terman, “Electronic and Radio Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 4 th Edition,1984.

Course Outcomes:
CO1:Analyze micro-wave circuits incorporating hollow, dielectric and planar
waveguides, transmission lines, filters and other passive components, active
devices.
CO2: Understand microwave transmission lines and how to Use microwave
components such as isolators, Couplers, Circulators, Tees, Gyrators etc.
CO3: Differentiate Linear bean tubes and crossed field tubes in terms of operation
and performance.
CO4: Understand various types of fibers, modes, configurations and signal
degradations.
CO5: Analyze signal degradation in optical fibers and compare the performance of
various optical sources and detectors.

184 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VI Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20APC603) VLSI DESIGN
Course Objectives:
6. Learn about the various processing steps involved in the fabrication of a nMOS,
pMOS and CMOS transistors.
7. Learn about the various Design rules and Layout of MOS transistors.
8. Enable the students to learn about the Scaling Models and Scaling factors of MOS
transistors.
9. Study the various examples of structured design.
10. Learn about the Testing concepts in VLSI Chip design.

Unit I
Review of Microelectronics and Introduction to MOS technology:
The IC era, Basic MOS transistors- Enhancement mode and Depletion mode transistor
action, nMOS fabrication, CMOS fabrication-P-Well, N-Well and Twin-tub process,
Thermal Aspects of processing and Bi-CMOS. Drain-to-Source current versus Voltage
VDS relationships, MOS transconductance, output conductance and Figure of Merit.

Unit II
MOS and Bi-CMOS circuits and Design process:
The Pass transistor, nMOS inverter, Pull-up to Pull-down ratio of different cases, CMOS
inverter and Latch-up in CMOS circuits. MOS layers, Stick diagrams-nMOS and CMOS
design styles, Design rules and Layout- Lambda-based design rules, Contact cuts,
Double Metal MOS process rules and CMOS Lambda-based design rules, 2µm Double
Metal, Double Poly. CMOS/BiCMOS rules and Layout diagrams.

Unit III
Circuit Concepts and Scaling of MOS circuits:
Sheet resistance concept, Area Capacitance of layers and calculations, The Delay unit,
Inverter delay, Driving large capacitance loads, Propagation delays and Wiring
capacitances, Scaling Models and Scaling factors, Scaling factors for various device
parameters and its summary.

185 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit IV
Subsystem Design and Layout:
Architectural issues, Switch logic, Gate restoring logic-The inverter, Two-input nMOS,
CMOS and BiCMOS NAND and NOR gates, Other forms of CMOS logic, Examples of
Structured design- Parity generator, Multiplexers, Four-Line Gray code to Binary
code converter, Clocked Sequential circuits-Two-phase clocking and Charge storage,
System considerations- Bipolar drivers for Bus lines, Basic arrangements for Bus
lines and Precharged bus concept.

Unit V
Test and Testability:
System partitioning, Layout and Testability, Reset/Initialization, Design for Testability,
Testing Combinational Logic and Sequential Logic, Practical Design for Test
guidelines, Scan Design Techniques and Built-In-Self-Test (BIST).

Text Books:
1 K.Eshraghian, D.A. Pucknell and S.Eshraghian, “Essentials of VLSI Circuits and
Systems”, Third Edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2019.
2 W.Wolf “Modern VLSI Design IP based design” Fourth edition, PHI Learning Pvt.
Ltd., 2020.
References:
1 Mead, C.A and Conway, L.A., “Introduction to VLSI Systems”, Addison –Wesley,
USA, 1980.
2. Neil H. E. Weste & D.M.Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design-A Circuits and Systems
Perspective”, Fourth edition, Pearson Edition, 2020.

Course Outcomes:

CO1: Outline the processing steps in the fabrication of a nMOS, pMOS and CMOS
structure.
CO2: Illustrate the Layout procedure of simple MOS circuit using Lambda based design
rules.
CO3: Summarize the scaling effects of various key parameters of MOSFET devices.
CO4: Design various MOS based logic circuits.
CO5: Develop algorithms for automatic test generation for combinational and sequential
circuits.

186 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VI Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3

(EC20APE601) ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS AND

INSTRUMENTATION

Course Objectives:

1. To understand various measurement metrics for performance analysis and

basic principles of various measurements like voltage, current, Resistance.
2. To familiarize the characteristics, operations, calibrations and applications of
the different oscilloscopes.
3. To explain principles of operation and working of different electronic
instruments like signal generators, wave analyzers etc.
4. Understand the basic principle of various DC/AC bridges for the measurement
of unknown passive elements like R, L and C.
5. To provide exposure to working principles of different sensors and transducers.

UNIT-I
Performance characteristics of Instruments: Static characteristics, Accuracy, Precision,
Resolution, Sensitivity, static and dynamic calibration, Errors in Measurement, and their
statistical analysis, dynamic characteristics-speed of Response, fidelity, Lag and dynamic
error. DC ammeters, DC voltmeters-multirange, range extension/solid state and
differential voltmeters, AC voltmeters –multirange, range extension. Thermocouple type RF
ammeter, ohm meters, series type, shunt type, multimeter for voltage, current and
resistance measurements.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Define different terms used for characterizing the performance of an
instrument/measurement system (L1).
 Understand the principle of operation of various meters (L1).
UNIT-II
Oscilloscopes: Standard specifications of CRO,CRT features, vertical and horizontal
amplifiers, horizontal and vertical deflection systems, sweep trigger pulse, delay line, sync
selector circuits, probes for CRO – active, passive, and attenuator type, dual trace/beam
CRO, Principles of sampling oscilloscope, storage oscilloscope, and digital storage
oscilloscope, Digital frequency counters, time & Period measurements.
187 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Understand the basic blocks of analog and digital CROs (L1)
 Measure amplitude and frequency utilizing oscilloscopes (L2)

UNIT-III
Signal generators & Analyzers: Specifications & principles of working (Block diagram
approach) Signal generators-fixed and variable, AF oscillators, function generators, pulse,
random noise, sweep, and Wave analyzers, Harmonic distortion analyzers, Spectrum
analyzers.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Understand the basic principle of various signal generators and analyzers (L1).
 Describe characteristics of signal generators and analyzers (L2).
UNIT-IV
Review of DC Bridges: Wheatstone bridge, Kelvin Bridge, errors and precautions in using
bridges.
AC bridges: Measurement of inductance-Maxwell’s bridge, Anderson Bridge. Measurement
of capacitance- Schering Bridge. Measurement of frequency- Wein Bridge, Q-meter.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Understand principles of measurements associated with different DC/AC bridges(L2)
 Ability to derive balance condition of various bridges to find unknown values (L2)

UNIT-V
Sensors and Transducers - Active and passive transducers: Measurement of displacement
(Resistance, capacitance, inductance; LVDT) Force (strain gauges) Pressure (piezoelectric
transducers) Temperature (resistance thermometers, thermocouples, and thermistors),
Velocity, Acceleration.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Explain basic principle of the different types of sensors and Transducers (L2)
 Select the appropriate sensor/transducer for the measurement of physical parameters
(L5)

188 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 TEXT BOOKS:
1. A.D. Helfrick and W.D. Cooper, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and
th
Measurement Techniques”, PHI, 5 Edition,2002.
2. H.S.Kalsi, “Electronic instrumentation”, second edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Robert A. Witte, “Electronic Test Instruments, Analog and Digital
Measurements”, Pearson Education, 2nd Ed., 2004.
2. David A. Bell, “Electronic Instrumentation & Measurements”, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2003.
3. K. Lal Kishore, “Electronic Measurements & Instrumentations”, Pearson
Education,2009.

Course Outcomes:

CO 1: Describe the basic principles involved in the meters for measuring voltage, current,
resistance and frequency (L2).
CO 2: Analyze CRO for measuring signal characteristics (L4)
CO3: Analyze different waveforms using advanced instruments such as signal generators,
logic analyzer & Spectrum analyzer (L4)
CO4: Apply the principles of various DC/AC bridges to solve various measurement
parameters (L3)
CO5: Analyze various parameters using sensors and transducers (L4)

189 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VI Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3

(EC20APE602) INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING

Course Objectives:

1. To teach basic parameters of Information, concepts of source coding techniques,

and error control coding techniques.
2. To transmit knowledge on Information theory and error control coding techniques
for solving problems.
3. To Introduce various source coding and channel coding techniques for error
detection and error correction in the information-bearing signals.
4. To dissimilate block to variable length coding and variable to block length coding
techniques for merits and demerits.
5. To describe various systems for linear block codes and convolutional codes.
Unit I
Information Theory:
Introduction, Definition of Entropy, Conditional Entropy, Relative Entropy, Basic
Properties of Entropy, Mutual Information, Information Inequalities, Kraft Inequality,
optimal codes, bounds on optimal Code length, Shanon-Fano Coding, Huffman Coding,
Related Problems.

Unit II

Asymptotic Equipartition Property: Introduction, Block to Block Coding of DMS:

Consequences of Asymptotic Equipartition Property, Problem-solving.
Universal Source Coding: Lempel-Ziv Algorithm, LZ -77 Encoding, and Decoding,
Lempel- Ziv Welch (LZW) Algorithm, LZW Encoding, and Decoding.

Unit III

Error Control Coding:

Introduction to Error Control Codes, Error Probability with Repetition in the Binary
Symmetric Channel, Parity Check Bit Coding for Error Detection, Block Coding for Error
Detection and Correction, The Hamming Distance,

190 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Unit IV

Linear Block Codes:

Introduction to Linear Block Codes, Syndrome and Error Detection, Encoding Block
Codes, Decoding of Block Codes, Single Parity Check bit Code, Repeated Codes,
Hadamard Code, Hamming Code, Cyclic Codes, Generator and Parity-Check Matrices of
Cyclic Codes, Encoding and Decoding of Cyclic Codes, BCH codes.

Unit V

Convolutional Coding:
Convolutional Coding, Code Generation, Decoding Convolutional Code, the Code Tree,
Decoding in the presence of Noise, State and Trellis Diagrams, The Viterbi Algorithm.

Textbooks:

1. Thomas M.Cover, Joy A. Thomas, Elements of Information Theory, John Wiley &
Sons,2nd Edition, 2006.
2. Shu Lin, Daniel J. Costello Jr., Error Control Coding, Pearson, Second Edition,
2013.
References:
1. Herbert Taub, Donald L Shilling, Goutam Saha, Principles of Communication
Systems, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2017.
2. Simon Haykin, Communication Systems, John Wiley, 4th Edition, 2010.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Describe basic parameters of Information, the concepts of source coding
techniques, and Error Control coding techniques.
CO2: Apply knowledge of Information theory and error control coding techniques to
solve problems.
CO3: Analyze various source coding and channel coding techniques for error
detection and error correction in the information-bearing signals.
CO4: Compare various block to variable length coding and variable to block length
coding techniques for merits and demerits.
CO5: Design various systems for linear block codes and convolutional codes

191 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VI Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20APE603)INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
(EEE)
Course Objectives:
1. To summarize and analyze the concepts of signals, systems in time and
frequency domain.
2. To learn properties of DFT and its application to linear filtering.
3. To understand the designs of FIR filters.
4. To understand the design of IIR filters.
5. To outline need of Multi-rate DSP.

UNIT- I
Frequency analysis of Signals and Systems:
Review of Discrete time signals and systems, Discrete Fourier transform, Relationship of
the DFT to other transforms, Properties of DFT, Linear filtering based on the DFT-
Filtering of long data sequences - overlap save and overlap add method.
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT): Efficient computation of DFT - Radix-2 - Decimation-
in-time (DIT), Decimation-in-frequency (DIF) algorithms, Inverse FFT.

UNIT- II
Infinite Impulse Response Filters:
Design of IIR filters from Analog filters –Approximation of derivatives, Impulse
invariance method, and bilinear transformation. Frequency transformation in the analog
domain, Illustrative Problems.
Realization of IIR Filter: Structures for IIR system- Direct-Form-I, Direct-Form-II,
Transposed form, Cascade-Form, and Parallel-Form Structures.

UNIT- III
Finite Impulse Response Filters:
Design of linear phase FIR filters using Fourier series method - FIR filter design using
windows (Rectangular, Hamming and Hanning window), Frequency sampling
method, Illustrative Problems.
Realization of FIR Filter: Structures for FIR system–Direct-Form, Cascade-Form and
Linear Phase Structure.

192 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit -IV
Multi-rate Digital Signal Processing:
Introduction, Decimation, and interpolation, sampling rate conversion by a rational
factor, Implementation of sampling rate conversion, Multi-stage implementation of
sampling rate conversion, sampling rate conversion of band-pass signals,
Applications of multi-rate signal processing.
UNIT- V
Architectures for Programmable DSP Devices:
Basic Architectural features, DSP computation Building Blocks, Bus Architectures and
Memory, Data Addressing Capabilities, Address Generation Unit, Programmability
and Program Execution, Speed Issues.
Text Books:
1. John G. Proakis & Dimitris G.Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing – Principles,
Algorithms & Applications, 4th Edition, Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2007.
2. A.V. Oppenheim, R.W. Schafer and J.R. Buck, Discrete-Time Signal Processing, 8th
Indian Reprint, Pearson, 2004.
References:
1. Emmanuel C. Ifeachor & Barrie. W. Jervis, Digital Signal Processing, 2 nd Edition,
Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2002.
2. P.Ramesh Babu, Digital Signal Processing, SCITECH, 7 th Edition, 2019.
3. Sanjit K. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing – A Computer Based Approach, Tata Mc
Graw Hill, 2007.
Course Outcomes:

CO1: Analyze DFT computation using fast algorithms.

CO2: Design & Implementation of IIR filters using different techniques.

CO3: Design of FIR filters based on windowing methods.

CO4: Analyse multi-rate signal processing techniques.

CO5: Understanding the architecture details and instruction sets of fixed and

Floating point DSP’s.

193 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VI Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20APE604)RADAR SYSTEMS

Course Objectives:
1. Make student to acquire the knowledge on types of Radars, working principles,
applications.
2. Make student to acquire the knowledge on tracking a target and understand phased
array antennas, navigational aids.

Unit I
Basics of Radar: Introduction, Maximum Unambiguous Range, Simple form of Radar Equation,
Radar Block Diagram and Operation, Radar Frequencies and Applications, Prediction of Range
Performance, Minimum Detectable Signal, Receiver Noise, Modified Radar Range Equation,
Illustrative Problems.
Radar Equation: SNR, Envelope Detector, False Alarm Time and Probability, Integration of
Radar Pulses, Radar Cross Section of Targets (simple targets - sphere, cone-sphere),
Transmitter Power, PRF and Range Ambiguities, System Losses (qualitative treatment),
Illustrative Problems.
Unit II
CW and Frequency Modulated Radar: Doppler Effect, CW Radar – Block Diagram,
Isolation between Transmitter and Receiver, Non-zero IF Receiver, Receiver Bandwidth
Requirements, Applications of CW radar, Illustrative Problems.
FM-CW Radar: Range and Doppler Measurement, Block Diagram and Characteristics
(Approaching/ Receding Targets), FM-CW altimeter, Multiple Frequency CW Radar.

Unit III
MTI and Pulse Doppler Radar: Introduction, Principle, MTI Radar with - Power Amplifier
Transmitter and Power Oscillator Transmitter, Delay Line Cancellers – Filter Characteristics,
Blind Speeds, Double Cancellation, and Staggered PRFs. Range Gated Doppler Filters, MTI
Radar Parameters, Limitations to MTI Performance, MTI versus Pulse Doppler radar.

Unit IV
Tracking Radar: Tracking with Radar, Sequential Lobing, Conical Scan, Mono pulse Tracking

194 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Radar – Amplitude Comparison Mono pulse (one- and two-coordinates), Phase Comparison
Mono pulse, Tracking in Range, Acquisition and Scanning Patterns, Comparison of Trackers.
Detection of Radar Signals in Noise: Introduction, Noise Figure and Noise Temperature,
Matched Filter Receiver – Response Characteristics and Derivation, Correlation detection,
Detection criteria, Detector Characteristics, Automatic Detection, Constant False Alarm Rate
Receiver.
Unit V
Phased Array Antennas and Navigational Aids: Introduction to Phased Array Antennas -
Basic Concepts, Radiation Pattern. Beam Steering and Beam Width changes. Navigational
Aids: Direction Finder, VOR, ILS and Loran.

Text Books:
1. Merrill I. Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar Systems”, 2nd Edition, TMH Special Indian
Edition, 2007.
2. Byron Edde, “Radar Principals, Technology, Applications”, Pearson Education, 1992.
Reference Books:
1. F.E. Terman, “Radio Engineering”, Mc Graw Hill Book Co. (for Chapter 7 only), Fourth
Edition 1955
2. Simon Kingsley & Shaun Quegan, “Understanding RADAR Systems”, McGraw Hill Book
Co., 1993.
Course Outcomes:
CO1. Learn the basic working principle of Radar and target detection procedure.
CO2. Know the working and applications of CW and Frequency Modulated Radar.
CO3. Gain the knowledge of MTI and Pulse Doppler Radar.
CO4. Understand different methods of tracking a target and analyze the effect of noise at
the receiver.
CO5. Learn about the phased array antennas and different navigational aids.

195 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

L T P C
B.Tech –VI Sem
3 0 0 3

(CE20AOE601) Disaster Management

CourseObjectives:
The objective of this course is to:
 Give the basic knowledge of Natural Hazards and disasters.
 Develop an awareness of the chronological phases of natural disaster response and
rescue relief operations.
 Understand the ‘relief system’ and the ‘disaster victim.’
 Describe the three planning strategies useful in mitigation.
 Identify the regulatory controls used in hazard management.
 Understand the tools of post-disaster management.

UNIT –I
Introduction:
Hazards, Disasters, Disaster Management, Disaster Management cycle – Five priorities for
action.
Natural Hazards and Disaster Management:
Floods, droughts, Earthquakes, global warming, cyclones & Tsunamis, landslides, Post
Tsunami hazards along the Indian coast, landslides.
Learning outcomes:
At the end of unit, students will be able to
 Gain the basic knowledge about hazards and disasters.
 Know about the natural hazards and its management.
 Understand about the global warming, cyclones and tsunamis

UNIT II
Man-Made Disaster and Management:
Case study methods of the following: Fire hazards, transport hazards, biological hazards,
waste management, post disaster, bio terrorism -threat in mega cities.
196 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Learning outcomes:
At the end of unit, students will be able to
 Know about the fire hazards and solid waste management.
 Gain knowledge about transport and biological hazards.

UNIT – III
Risk and Vulnerability:
Building codes and land use planning, social vulnerability, environmental vulnerability, and
sustainable development, climate change risk rendition, financial management of disaster –
related losses.
Learning outcomes:
At the end of unit, students will be able to
 Know about the regulations of building codes and land use planning related to risk
and vulnerability.
 Understand about the financial management of disaster and related losses

UNIT – IV
Role of Technology in Disaster Managements:
Disaster management for infra structures, taxonomy of infra-structure – treatment plants
and process facilities-electrical substations- roads and bridges- mitigation programme for
earth quakes –multimedia technology in disaster risk management and knowledge in disaster
reduction.
Learning outcomes:
At the end of unit, students will be able to
 Know about the technological aspects of disaster management.
 Understand the multimedia technology in disaster risk management.
 Get knowledge about the factors for disaster reduction.

UNIT –V
Emerging approaches in Disaster Management
 Pre- disaster stage (preparedness)
 Emergency Stage
 Post Disaster stage-Rehabilitation.
Learning outcomes:
At the end of unit, students will be able to
 Gets knowledge about three planning strategies useful in mitigation?
 Understand about preparedness and rehabilitation stage.

197 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
CourseOutcomes (CO):
On completion of the course the students will able to
 Know the different types of disasters and their effects on environment.
 Have the knowledge about Causes of disasters.
 Gain knowledge about disaster management through engineering applications.
 Explain the process of risk management
 Distinguish between the different approaches needed to manage pre- during and post
disaster periods

Textbooks:
1. Rajib shah & R R Krishnamurthy “Disaster Management” – Global Challenges and
Local Solutions’ Universities press. (2009),
2. Tushar Bhattacharya, “Disaster Science & Management” Tata McGraw Hill
EducationPvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Jagbir Singh “Disaster Management” – Future Challenges and Opportunities’ I K
International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. (2007),

Reference Books:
1. Harsh. K .Gupta “Disaster Management edited”, Universities press, 2003
2. Donald Hyndman & David Hyndman “Natural Hazards & Disasters” – Cengage
Learning

198 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech - VI Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(ME20AOE601) FUNDAMENTALS OF ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING
Pre-requisite: Manufacturing Processes
Course Objectives:
● Familiarize of additive manufacturing / rapid prototyping and its applications in
various fields.
● Impart reverse engineering techniques.
● Explain different processes available in additive manufacturing.
● Bring awareness on mechanical properties of materials and geometric issues related
to additive manufacturing applications.

UNIT – 1:
Introduction to Additive Manufacturing (AM) Systems :
History and Development of AM, Need of AM, Difference between AM and CNC, Classification
of AM Processes: Based on Layering Techniques, Raw Materials and Energy Sources, AM
Process Chain, Benefits and Applications of AM, Representation of 3D model in STL format.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
● Learn the importance of AM process and development process cycle of AM.
● Distinguish the difference between CNC and AM.
● Identify the role of AM in the industrial applications.
● Understand the different formats to represent the 3D Model.

UNIT – 2:
CAD & Reverse Engineering:
Basic Concept, Digitization techniques, Model Reconstruction, Data Processing for Additive
Manufacturing Technology: CAD model preparation, Part Orientation and support generation,
Model Slicing, Tool path Generation, Software’s for Additive Manufacturing Technology.
Reverse Engineering (RE) –Meaning, RE – The Generic Process, Phase of RE Scanning,
Contact Scanners, Noncontact Scanners, Point Processing.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to

199 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 ● Learn the different process steps of Additive Manufacturing.
● Understand the role of software tools for Additive Manufacturing Technology
● Build the CAD model and generate support forrequired 3D printing Component.

UNIT – 3:
Solid & Liquid Based AM Systems
Stereolithography (SLA) and Solid Ground Curing (SGC): Principle, Process, Materials,
Advantages, Limitations and Applications.Fusion Deposition Modeling (FDM). Laminated
Object Manufacturing (LOM).

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
● Learn the Additive Manufacturing process of Stereolithography (SLA) and Solid
Ground Curing (SGC)
● Distinguish the differences between FDM and SLA processes.
● Analyze the limitations and the opportunities of current AM processes to develop the
future AM technologies.

UNIT – 4:
Powder Based AM Systems:
Principle and Process of Selective Laser Sintering (SLS), Advantages, Limitations and
Applications of SLS, Principle and Process of Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS),
Advantages, Limitations and Applications of LENS, Principle and Process of Electron Beam
Melting (EBM), Advantages, Limitations and Applications of EBM.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
● Learn the Additive Manufacturing process of SLS, LENS, EBM.
● Distinguish the differences between SLS and EBM processes.
● Analyze the limitations and the opportunities of SLS, EBM, LENS AM processes to
develop the future AM technologies.
● Distinguish the various AM processes and use them for specific problem-based
applications.

200 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT – 5:
Other Additive Manufacturing Systems:
Three Dimensional Printing (3DP): Principle, Process, Advantages, Limitations and
Applications. Ballistic Particle Manufacturing (BPM). Shape Deposition Manufacturing (SDM):
Principle, Process, Advantages, Limitations, Applications.

Learning Outcomes:
● Learn the Additive Manufacturing process of BPM, SDM.
● Understand the differences between BPM and SDM processes.
● Analyze the limitations and the opportunities of BPM, SDM processes to develop the
future AM technologies.

Textbooks:
1. Ian Gibson, David W. Rosen, Brent Stucker, Additive Manufacturing Technologies:
Rapid Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing, 1/e Springer, 2010.
2. Chua C.K., Leong K.F. and Lim C.S., Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications,
2/e World Scientific Publishers, 2003.

Reference Books:
1. Liou W. Liou, Frank W., Liou, Rapid Prototyping and Engineering Applications: A Tool
Box for Prototype Development, CRC Press, 2007.
2. Pham D.T. and Dimov S.S., Rapid Manufacturing; The Technologies and Application
of RPT and Rapid Tooling, Springer, London 2001.
3. Gebhardt A., Rapid prototyping, Hanser Gardener Publications, 2003.
4. Hilton P.D. and Jacobs P.F., Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications,
CRC Press, 2005.
5. Rafiq Noorani, Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications in Manufacturing, John
Wiley & Sons, 2006.

Online Learning Resources:

● NPTEL Course on Rapid Manufacturing
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104265/
● https://www.hubs.com/knowledge-base/introduction-fdm-3d-printing/
● https://slideplayer.com/slide/6927137/
● https://www.mdpi.com/2073-4360/12/6/1334
● https://www.centropiaggio.unipi.it/sites/default/files/course/material/2013-11-
29%20-%20FDM.pdf
● https://lecturenotes.in/subject/197

201 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 ● https://www.cet.edu.in/noticefiles/258_Lecture%20Notes%20on%20RP-ilovepdf-
compressed.pdf
● https://www.vssut.ac.in/lecture_notes/lecture1517967201.pdf
● https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NkC8TNts4B4

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
● Apply the fundamentals concepts of additive manufacturing to develop of effective
process steps.
● Analyse the various fabrication techniques and apply them to manufacture a 3D
printed part.
● Develop a 3D model in standard tessellation language format.
● Build the feasible designs of support structure to the 3D printing models.
Analyse the limitations of various additive manufacturing techniques for the selective
applications.

202 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech- VI Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3

(EE20AOE603) OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES THROUGH MATLAB

Course Objectives
● Introduce basics of MATLAB
● Familiarize the fundamentals of optimization
● Explain single variable optimization using various methods
● Implement multi variable optimization using various methods
● Train various evolutionary algorithms.

UNIT -I
Introduction to MAT LAB: Overview, MATLAB Preliminaries, Basics of MATLAB, Beyond the
Basics of MATLAB, Popular Functions and Commands, Plotting using MATLAB, Optimization
with MATLAB.

UNIT -II
Introduction to Optimization: Statement of an optimization problem, Classifications of
optimization Problems: Single variable optimization, Multi variable optimization with no
constraints, Multi variable optimization with equality constraints, Multi variable optimization
with inequality constraints, Convex and Concave programming.

UNIT -III
Single Variable Optimization: Finite difference method, Central difference method, Runge-
Kutta method, interval halving method, golden section method with MATLAB code.

UNIT- IV
Multi Variable Optimization: Conjugate gradient method, Newton's method, Powell's
method, Flectcher- Reeves method, Hook and Jeeves method, interior penalty function with

UNIT -V
Evolutionary Algorithms: Overview, Genetic Algorithms: Basics of Genetic Algorithms,
Options in MATLAB, Multi Objective Optimization using Genetic Algorithms, Ant Colony
Optimization, Simulated Annealing, Particle Swarm Optimization.

203 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Course Outcomes:
After completion of this course the student can be able to
CO1:Use optimization terminology and concepts, and understand how to classify an
optimization problem.
CO2:Apply optimization methods to engineering problems.
CO3:Implement optimization algorithms.
CO4:Compare different genetic algorithms.
CO5:Solve multivariable optimization problems.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rao V.Dukkipati, MATLAB: “An Introduction with Applications”, Anshan, 2010.
2. Achille Messac, “Optimization in practice with MATLAB”, Cambridge University
Press, 2015.
3. Jasbir S Arora, “Introduction to optimum design”, 2nd edition. Elsevier, 2004.

REFERENCES:
1. Cesar Perez Lopez, “MATLAB Optimization Techniques”, Academic press, Springer
publications, 2014.
2. Steven C.Chapra, “Applied Numerical Methods with MATLAB for Engineers and
scientists”: 4th edition, McGraw-Hill Education, 2018.

204 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(AUTONOMOUS)

B. Tech- VI SEM L T P C

3 0 0 3

(CS20A0E602) JAVA Programming

Course Objectives:

● To understand object-oriented concepts and problem-solving techniques

● To obtain knowledge about the principles of inheritance and polymorphism
● To implement the concept of packages, interfaces, exception handling and
concurrencymechanism.
● To design the GUIs using applets and swing controls.

UNIT - I

Introduction to OOP: OOP principles, Java Buzzwords, Implementing Java program, JVM,
Data Types, Variables, Type conversions and Casting, Operators, Control statements, Arrays.
Classes, Objects, Methods, Constructors, this keyword, static keyword, Overloading Methods
and Constructors, Argument passing, Exploring String class.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of this unit, the student will be able to

● Understand the syntax, semantics and features of Java Programming Language (L1).
● Learn object-oriented features and understanding type conversion and casting (L2).
● Understand different types of string handling functions and its usage (L1).
UNIT – II

Inheritance: Basics, Using Super, Creating Multilevel hierarchy, Method overriding,

Dynamic Method Dispatch, Using Abstract classes, Using final with inheritance

Interfaces: Definition, Implementing Interfaces, Extending Interfaces, Nested Interfaces,

Applying Interfaces, Variables in Interfaces.

Packages: Basics, finding packages and CLASSPATH, Access Protection, Importing

packages.

205 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Learning Outcomes:

At the end of this unit, the student will be able to

● Implement types of Inheritance and developing new classes based on existing

classes(L3)
● Demonstrate features of interfaces to implement multiple inheritances (L2).
● Distinguish between system packages and user defined packages (L2).

UNIT – III

Exception handling - Fundamentals, Exception types, uncaught exceptions, using try and
catch,Multiple catch clauses, nested try statements, throw, throws and finally, built- in
exceptions,creating own exception sub classes.

I/O and Other Topics: – I/O basics, Reading Console input, Writing console Output, The
PrintWriter class, Reading and writing files, Automatically closing a file, enumerations, type
wrappers.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of this unit, the student will be able to

● Learn what exceptions are and how they are handled (L1).
● Learn when to use exception handling and how to create user defined exceptions(L3)
● Learn the difference between various files and streams (L1).
UNIT - IV

Multithreading: The Java thread model, Creating threads, Thread priorities, Synchronizing
threads, Inter thread communication.

The Collections Framework (java.util): Collections overview, Collection Interfaces, The

Collection classes- Array List, Linked List, Hash Set, Hash table, Properties, Stack, Vector,
String Tokenizer, Date, Calendar, Random, Scanner.

Applets- Definition, Life Cycle and Execution.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of this unit, the student will be able to

● Understand concurrency, parallelism and multithreading(L1).

● Learn the importance of collections and use prebuilt generic data structures from
Framework (L1).
● Develop applets for web applications(L5)

206 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT – V

Event Handling-Delegation Event Model, Event Sources, Event Classes, Event Listener
Interfaces, Handling Mouse and Keyboard Events, Adapter classes.

AWT AND Swings: AWT: AWT Hierarchy, AWT controls, Layout Managers: FlowLayout,
BorderLayout, GridLayout, CardLayout, and Limitations of AWT. SWINGS: JFrame, JPanel,
JComponent- JLabel and ImageIcon, JTextField,JTabbedPane , Swing Buttons, JScrollPane,
JComboBox, JTable.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of this unit, the student will be able to

● Understand the GUI programming (L1).

Course Outcomes:

After completion of the course the student will be able

● To solve real world problems using OOP techniques (L3).

● To apply code reusability through inheritance, packages and interfaces(L3)
● To solve problems using java collection framework and I/O classes (L3).
● To develop applications by using parallel streams for better performance (L4).
● To build GUIs and handle events generated by user interactions (L4).
Text Books:

1. Java The complete reference, 9th edition, Herbert Schildt, McGraw Hill Education (India)
Pvt. Ltd.
2. Java How to Program, 10th Edition, Paul Dietel, Harvey Dietel, Pearson Education.
Reference Books:
1. T. Budd “Understanding Object-Oriented Programming with Java”, updated edition,
Pearson Education.
2. Cay S. Horstmann “Core Java Volume – 1 Fundamentals”,Pearson Education.
3. Sagayaraj, Dennis, Karthik and Gajalakshmi “Java Programming for core and advanced
learners, University Press.
4. Y. Daniel Liang, “Introduction to Java programming”, Pearson Education.
5. P. Radha Krishna “Object Oriented Programming through Java”, University Press.
6. S. Malhotra, S. Chudhary, “Programming in Java”, 2nd edition, Oxford Univ. Press.
7. R.A. Johnson, “Java Programming and Object-oriented Application Development”,
Cengage Learning.

207 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(AUTONOMOUS)

B.Tech - VI Sem LT PC
3003
(AM20A0E502) Web Technologies
Course Objectives:

 Giving the students the insights of the Internet programming and how to design
andimplementcomplete applications over the web.
 It covers the notions of Web servers and Web Application Servers,
DesignMethodologieswithconcentrationonObject-Orientedconcepts, Client-Side
 Programming, Server-Side Programming, Active Server Pages, Database Connectivity
to web applications, Adding Dynamic Content to web applications, Programming
Common Gateway Interfaces, Programming the User Interface for theweb applications

UNITI:

Web Basics and Overview: Introduction to Internet, World Wide Web, Web Browsers,
URL,MIME,HTTP, Web Programmers Tool box.HTML Common tags: List, Tables, images,
forms, frames, Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) &its Types. Introduction to Java Script,
Declaring variables, functions, Event handlers (on click, on submit, etc.,) and Form
Validation.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of the unit students will be able to:

 Create standard tags of HTML tags and Knowing the features of designing static web
pages.(L6)
 List different types of CSS to design web page attractively.(L1)
 UtilizedifferenttoolslikeAdobeDreamweaverandMicrosoftFrontpage.(L3)

UNITII:

Introduction to XML: Document type definition, XML Schemas, Presenting XML, Introduction
to XHTML, Using XML Processors: DOM and SAX. PHP: Declaring Variables, Data types,
Operators, Control structures, Functions.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of the unit, students will be able to:

208 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
  Explaindifferenttypesofclientsidescripting.(L2)
 ConstructdynamicwebpagesusingDHTML.(L6)
 Illustratevalidationforwebpages.(L2)

UNIT III:

Web Servers and Servlets: Introduction to Servlets, Life cycle of a Servlet, JSDK, Deploying
Servlet, The Servlet API, The javax. Servlet Package, Reading Servlet parameters, Reading
Initialization parameters. The javax. Servlet HTTP package, Handling Http Request &
Responses, Cookies and Session Tracking.

LearningOutcomes:

Attheendofthe unit,students will be able to:

 AnalyzetheimportanceofServersidescripting.(L4)
 Demonstratedeploymentof theapplicationusingTomcatServer.(L2)
 ExperimentwithStoringandRetrievingdatafromJDBC.(L3)

UNIT IV:

Database Access: Database Programming using JDBC, JDBC drivers, Studying

Javax.sql.*package, Connecting todatabase inPHP,Execute Simple Queries,Accessinga
Databasefroma Servlet.Introductionto struts frameworks.

LearningOutcomes:

Attheendofthe unit,students will be able to:

 Understand how XML interacts with different applications.(L1)

 Develop PHP Programs using WAMP and XAMPP Server.(L3)
 Examine background applications using XSL and XSLT.(L4)

UNIT V:

JSP Application Development: The Anatomy of a JSP Page, JSP Processing. JSP Application
Design and JSP Environment, JSPD eclarations, Directives, Expressions, Scripting Elements,
implicit objects.

JavaBeans: Introduction to Beans, Deploying java Beans in a JSP page.

LearningOutcomes:

 ExplaintheimportanceofAJAXArchitecture.
 Integrateandtestweb services.
209 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
CourseOutcomes:

 Analyze aweb pageandidentifyits elementsand attributes.

 CreatewebpagesusingXHTMLandCascadingStyles sheets.
 Installationandusageof Server software‘s.
 DatabaseConnectivityto web applications
 BuildwebapplicationsusingServletand JSP

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Web Programming, building internet applications, Chris Bates 2nd edition,

WILEYDreamtech(UNITs 1,2)
2. Core SERVLETS ANDJAVASERVER PAGES VOLUME 1: CORE
TECHNOLOGIESByMartyHall andLarryBrown Pearson (UNITs3, 4,5)

REFERENCEBOOKS:

1. Programmingworldwideweb-Sebesta,PearsonEducation,2007.
2. Internet and World Wide Web – How to program by Dietel and Nieto PHI/
PearsonEducation Asia

210 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech– VI SEM L T P C
3 0 0 3

(EG20AOE601) TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION AND PRESENTATION

SKILLS

Course Objectives:

• To develop awareness in students of the relevance and importance of

technical communication and presentation skills.
• To prepare the students for placements
• To sensitize the students to the appropriate use of non-verbal communication
• To train students to use language appropriately for presentations and interviews
• To enhance the documentation skills of the students with emphasis on formal
and informal writing

SYLLABUS

UNIT -1:

Basics of Technical Communication – Introduction – Objectives & Characteristics of

Technical Communication – Importance and need for Technical communication - LSRW
Skills – Barriers to effective communication

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
• Understand the importance of LSRW skills
• Identify and overcome the barriers to effective communication
• Realize the need and importance of technical communication

UNIT -II

Informal and Formal Conversation - Verbal and Non-verbal communication –Kinesics,

Proxemics, Chronemics, Haptics, Paralanguage

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
• State the difference between formal and informal conversation.
• Apply the knowledge of the difference between the verbal and non-
verbal communication
• Evaluate the different aspects of non-verbal communication.

211 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT -III
Written communication – Differences between spoken and written communication –
Features of effective writing –Advantages and disadvantages of spoken and written
communication- Art of condensation- summarizing and paraphrasing

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
• Know the difference between written and spoken communication
• Apply the awareness of features of effective writing.
• Implement the understanding of summarizing and paraphrasing.

UNIT -IV
Presentation Skills – Nature and importance of oral presentation – Defining the
purpose – Analyzing the audience - Planning and preparing the presentation, organizing
and rehearsing the presentation –Individual and group presentations - Handling stage fright

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
• State the importance of presentation skills in corporate climate.
• Analyze the demography of the audience.
• Plan, prepare and present individual and group presentations.

UNIT -V
Interview Skills – The Interview process –Characteristics of the job interview – Pre-
interview preparation techniques – Projecting the positive image – Answering Strategies

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
• Identify the characteristics of the job interview.

• Understand the process of Interviews.

• Develop a positive image using strategies in answering FAQs in interviews

Course Outcomes
• Understand the importance of effective technical communication
• Apply the knowledge of basic skills to become good orators

• Analyze non-verbal language suitable to different situations in professional life

• Evaluate different kinds of methods used for effective presentations

• Create trust among people and develop employability skills

212 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 TEXT BOOKS:

1. Ashrif Rizvi, “Effective Technical Communication”, TataMcGrahill, 2011

2. Meenakshi Raman &Sangeeta Sharma, “Technical Communication”, 3 rd Edition, O U
Press 2015

REFERENCES:

1. Pushpalatha & Sanjay Kumar, “Communication Skills”, Oxford Univsesity Press

2. Barron’s/Books on TOEFL/GRE/GMAT/CAT/IELTS DELTA/Cambridge University
Press. 2012.
3. Butterfield Jeff, “Soft Skills for Everyone”, Cengage Publications, 2011.
4. Universities Press (India) Pvt Ltd., “Management Shapers Series”, Himayatnagar,
Hyderabad 2008.
5. John Hughes & Andrew Mallett, “Successful Presentations” Oxford.
6. Edgar Thorpe and Showick Thorpe, “Winning at Interviews” Pearson
7. Munish Bhargava, “Winning Resumes and Successful Interviews”, McGraw Hil

213 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VI Sem L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
(EC20APC604)DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB

Course Objectives:
1. Ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering Construction of
tools for visualizing the basic concepts of discrete signal representation such as Fourier
Transforms, discrete time representations.
2. Students will learn numerous programming tools for design and Implementations of
filtering algorithms.
3. Understand the concept of Multi-rate signal processing and sample rate Conversion.
4. Develop and Implement DSP algorithms in software using CCS with DSP Floating Point
Processor.

The Programs shall be implemented in Software (Using MATLAB / Lab View / C

Programming/ Equivalent) and Hardware (Using TI / Analog Devices / Motorola /
Equivalent DSP processors).

List of Experiments:
1. Find energy and power of any given signal.
2. Generate random signals and plot its PSD.
3. Generate sum of two sinusoidal signals and find the frequency response (magnitude
and phase).
4. Find frequency response of a system given by difference equation form.
5. Compute and implement the N-point DTFT of a given sequence and compute the
power density spectrum of the sequence.
6. Compute and implement the N-point DFT of a given sequence and compute the power
density spectrum of the sequence.
7. Implement and verify N-point FFT of a given sequence and find the frequency
response (magnitude and phase).
8. Design IIR Butterworth filter and compare their performances with different orders
(Low Pass Filter /High Pass Filter)
9. Design IIR Chebyshev filter and compare their performances with different orders
(Low Pass Filter /High Pass Filter).
10. Design and implementation of IIR filter using bilinear transformation & Impulse
invariant method.

214 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 11. Design FIR filter (Low Pass Filter /High Pass Filter) using windowing technique.
i. Using rectangular window
ii. Using hamming window
iii. Using Kaiser window
12. Design and verify Filter IIR frequency response by using Filter design and Analysis
Tool.
13. Design and verify Filter FIR frequency response by using Filter design and Analysis
Tool.
14. Compute the Decimation and Interpolation for the given signal.

Note: Any TWELVE of the experiments are to be conducted.

References:
1. Matlab Simulink For Digital Signal Processing by Won,Y.Yang, Tbh/Yes Dee, 2014,
Paperback
2. Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing Using MATLAB 1 st Edition (English, Paperback,
Schilling Robert J.)
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Implement various DSP Algorithms using software packages.
CO2: Implement DSP algorithms with Digital Signal Processor.
CO3: Analyze and observe magnitude and phase characteristics (Frequency response
Characteristics) of digital IIR-Butterworth, Chebyshev filters.
CO4: Analyze & observe magnitude and phase characteristics (Frequency response
Characteristics) of digital FIR filters using window techniques.
CO5: Analyze digital filters using Software Tools.

215 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VI Sem L T P C
0 0 3 1.5

(EC20APC605) MICROWAVE AND OPTICAL COMMUNICATIONS LAB

Course Objectives:
1. To Understand microwave waveguides, passive & active devices, tubes and
network analysis.
2. To design microwave matching networks.
3. To Understand the S-matrix of Tee Junctions

4. To perform microwave measurements.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

Minimum of Ten experiments to be conducted (Any seven from Part-A)

Part –A (Microwave Experiments)

1. Reflex Klystron Characteristics.

2. Gunn Diode Characteristics.
3. Attenuation Measurement.
4. Directional Coupler Characteristics.
5. VSWR Measurement.
6. Impedance Measurement.
7. Frequency and Wavelength Measurement using slotted line section.
8. Scattering parameters of Magic Tee.
9. Scattering parameters of Isolator.
10. Scattering Parameters of Circulator.

Part –B (Optical Experiments)

1. Measurement of Numerical Aperture of the given fiber.

2. Measurement of Data rate for Digital Optical link.
3. Measurement of losses for Analog Optical link.
4. Characterization of LED.
5. Characterization of Laser Diode.

Course Outcomes:
216 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
CO1: Understand the mode characteristics of Reflex Klystron oscillator and negative
resistance characteristics of Gunn Oscillator.
CO2: Determine the Scattering matrix of given passive device experimentally and verify the
same theoretically.
CO3: Determine numerical aperture and bending losses of a given optical fiber.

CO4: Establish optical link between transmitter and receiver experimentally to find
attenuation and signal strength of the received signal.

Equipment’s Required:
1. Regulated Klystron Power Supply : 6 Nos
2. VSWR Meter : 6Nos

3. Milli/Micro Ammeters : 10Nos

4. Multimeters : 10Nos

5. CROs : 8Nos

6. GUNN power supply &

PIN modulator : 4Nos

7. Relevant Microwave Components : ---

8. Fiber Optic Analog Trainer Based LED : 3Nos

9. Fiber Optic Analog Trainer Based Laser : 2Nos

10. Fiber Optic Digital Trainer : 1No
11. Fiber Cables : (Plastic, Glass)

217 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VI Sem L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
(EC20APC606)VLSI DESIGN LAB
Course Objectives:
1. To understand and develop HDL source code for the given problem/experiment
2. To analyze the obtained results of the given experiment/problem
3. To simulate the given circuit with suitable simulator and verify the results
4. To understand how to use FPGA/CPLD hardware tools in the lab
5. To design and implement the experiments using FPGA/CPLD hardware tools

List of Experiments:
PART (A): FPGA Level Implementation (Any Seven Experiments)
Note 1: The students need to develop VHDL/ Verilog Source code, perform simulation
using relevant simulator and analyze the obtained simulation results using
necessary synthesizer.
Note 2: All the experiments need to be implemented on the latest FPGA/CPLD Hardware in
the Laboratory.
Design and Implementation of the following
1. Implementation of Universal logic gates
2. 4-bit Parallel Adder/Subtractor circuit
3. 4-bit Carry Look Ahead Adder circuit
4. (2X2) Multiplexer
5. (16:1) Multiplexer through (4:1) Multiplexer
6. 8:3 Priority Encoder
7. 8-bit parity generator and checker
8. Ring Counter
9. Binary counter

EDA Tools/Hardware Required:

1. EDA Tool that supports FPGA Programming including Xilinx Vivado / Altera (Intel) /
Cypress / Equivalent Industry Standard tool along with corresponding FPGA Hardware.
2. Desktop Computer with appropriate Operating system that supports the EDA tools.

218 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
PART (B): Back-end Level Design and Implementation (Any Three Experiments)

Note: The students need to design the following experiments at schematic level using
CMOS logic and verify the functionality. Further students need to draw the
corresponding layout and verify the functionality including parasitics. Available state of
the art technology libraries can be used while simulating the design using Industry
standard EDA Tools.

Design and Implementation of the following

1. Universal Gates
2. CMOS Inverter
3. Full Adder
4. Decoder
5. D-Flip-Flop

EDA Tools/Hardware Required:

1.Mentor Graphics Software / Cadence/Synopsys/Tanner or Equivalent Industry

Standard Software/CAD Tool.
2.Desktop Computer with appropriate Operating system that supports the EDA tools.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Understand how to use FPGA/CPLD hardware tools in the lab.
CO2: Develop HDL source code for the given problem/experiment, and simulate the
given circuit with suitable simulator and verify the results.
CO3: Analyze the obtained results of the given experiment/problem.
CO4: Design and implement the experiments using FPGA/CPLD hardware tools.

219 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VI Sem L T P C
1 0 2 2
(EC20ASC601)GRAPHICAL SYSTEM DESIGN USING Lab VIEW

Course Objectives:
1. To acquire familiarity with the LabVIEW Programming language and to know what is
meant by ‘Graphical Programming Language’.
2. To be able to write LabVIEW programs incorporating pre-written and new code.
3. To build graphical user interfaces (GUIs) for laboratory instrumentation.

Unit I
NAVIGATING LabVIEW:
Introducing LabVIEW environment, Comparison with Text Based Programming, Creating and
using LabVIEW projects, Parts of VI-Front Panel-Block Diagram-Icon And Connector Panel-
Controls Pallete-Functions Pallete.
LabVIEW ENVIRONMENT:
Indicators-Controls- wiring the controls and indicators- building VIs- run modes data, Types
in labVIEW- development of GUIs- labVIEW help. Searching controls, VIs and functions-
implementing a VI- basic arithmetics in LabVIEW, Understanding the dataflow programming
model of LabVIEW, Recognizing different data types.

Unit II
LabVIEW FOUNDATION:
Arithmetic functions- Expression node- Formula node-Compound arithmetic-Comparison
pallet, Boolean pallete, Arrays -Various functions of arrays-strings- various functions of
strings-clusters -various functions of clusters.

Unit III
PROGRAMMING EXECUTION WITH STRUCTURES:
Case structure, For Loop - The While Loop - Placing Objects inside Objects - Counting the Loops
- Shift Registers, Introduction to MyDAQ.

Practice Exercises: Any ten experiments are to be done

1. Verification of basic arithmetic operations.

220 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 2. Perform Boolean operations.
3. Verify even or odd of a given numbers.
4. Verify application using expression node, formula node.
5. Construct array maximum and minimum.
6. Verify applications of string functions.
7. Find the sum of ‘n’ numbers using loop.
8. Find the factorial of a give number using loop.
9. Verify applications of shift register.
10. Design traffic light control using case structure.
11. Design water level indicator (Nested loop).
12. Data acquisition using MyDAQ.

References:
1. https://www.ni.com/pdf/training/us/core-1-sample-course-manual
2. https://ptolemy.berkeley.edu/eecs20/labs/LabVIEW_Labs/Lab01/Lab01.pdf
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Able to develop and edit functional block diagrams and front panels.
CO2: Able to utilize composite data in the form of Arrays and Clusters.
CO3: Able to control program execution through structures such as ‘For-While’
loops and ‘Case Structures’.
CO4: Able to utilize features which will reconfigure the general physical and
software layouts of the LabVIEW programming environment.

221 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech – VI Sem L T P C
3 0 0 0

(BA20AMC502) INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS AND PATENTS

Course Objectives:
This course introduces the student to the basics of Intellectual Property Rights, Copy Right
Laws,Cyber Laws, Trade Marks and Issues related to Patents. The overall idea of the course
is to help and encourage the student for startups and innovations

UNIT-I

Introduction to Intellectual Property Law – Evolutionary past – Intellectual Property Law

Basics –Types of Intellectual Property – Innovations and Inventions of Trade related
Intellectual Property Rights – Agencies Responsible for Intellectual Property Registration –
Infringement – Regulatory –Overuse or Misuse of Intellectual Property Rights–Compliance
and Liability Issues.

UNIT-II

Introduction to Copyrights–Principles of Copyright–Subject Matters of Copy right–Rights

Afforded by Copyright Law –Copyright Ownership– Transfer and Duration – Right to Prepare
Derivative Works–Rights of Distribution–Rights of performers–Copy right Formalities and
Registration – Limitations – Infringement of Copyright – International Copyright Law-
Semiconductor Chip Protection Act.

UNIT-III

Introduction to Patent Law–Rights and Limitations–Rights under Patent Law–Patent

Requirements– Ownership and Transfer– Patent Application Process and Granting of Patent–
Patent Infringement and Litigation–International Patent Law–Double Patenting–Patent
Searching–Patent Cooperation Treaty – New developments in Patent Law- Invention
Developers and Promoters.

222 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT-IV

Introduction to Trade Mark – Trade Mark Registration Process – Post registration procedures
– Trade Mark maintenance – Transfer of rights – Inter parties Proceedings – Infringement –
Dilution of Ownership of Trade Mark – Likelihood of confusion – Trade Mark claims – Trade
Marks Litigation –International Trade Mark Law.

UNIT-V

Introduction to Trade Secrets – Maintaining Trade Secret – Physical Security – Employee

Access Limitation – Employee Confidentiality Agreement – Trade Secret Law – Unfair
Competition – Trade Secret Litigation–Breach of Contract–Applying State Law. Introduction
to Cyber Law–Information Technology Act – Cyber Crime and E-commerce – Data Security –
Confidentiality –Privacy–International aspects of Computer and Online Crime.

Course Outcomes:

 Understand IPR law & Cyber law

 Discuss registration process, maintenance and litigations associated with trademarks
 Illustrate the copy right law
 Enumerate the trade secret

Textbooks:

 DeborahE.Bouchoux:“IntellectualProperty”.Cengagelearning,NewDelhi
 KompalBansal&ParishitBansal“FundamentalsofIPRforEngineers”,BSPublications(Press)
 CyberLaw. Texts &Cases, South-Western’s Special Topics Collections

References:

 PrabhuddhaGanguli:‘IntellectualPropertyRights”TataMcGraw–Hill,NewDelhi
 Richard Stim:“Intellectual Property”, Cengage Learning, NewDelhi.
 R.RadhaKrishnan,S.Balasubramanian:“IntellectualPropertyRights”,ExcelBook.NewDelhi.
 M.AshokKumar and Mohd. IqbalAli: “Intellectual Property Right” Serials Pub .

223 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(AUTONOMOUS)

B. Tech – VI Sem L T P C
2 0 00

(AM20AMC601) AI TOOLS TECHNIQUES & APPLICATIONS

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, a student will be able to:

CO1: Demonstrate various AI applications, languages and Intelligent Agents.

CO2: Solve problems using search strategies and understand the basic process of Machine
Learning. CO3: Apply classification and regression algorithms on real world data.

CO4: Develop an expert system.

CO5: Comprehend the structure of an artificial neural network and identify the building
blocks of a convolutional neural network.

UNIT-I:

ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE: Introduction, Definition of AI, Goals of AI, Turing Test,

Applications of AI, AI Programming Languages; Introduction, Intelligent Systems, the
Concept of rationality, types of Agents, Environments and its properties, PEAS.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of the unit, student will be able to

1. classify various AI Applications. (L2)

2. list the AI Languages. (L1)

3. explain various types of Agents. (L2)

UNIT-II:

SEARCH STRATEGIES: Introduction, Brute Force or Blind Search, Breadth-First Search,

Depth-First Search, Hill Climbing, Best-First Search.

224 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
MACHINE LEARNING: Introduction, Machine Learning Process, Feature Engineering-Feature
Extraction, Feature Selection, Feature Engineering Methods, Feature Engineering, Data
VisualizationLine Chart, Bar Chart, Pie Chart, Histograms, Scatter Plot, Seaborn-Distplot,
joint plot.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of the unit, student will be able to

1. apply informed search techniques to problems. (L3)

2. interpret the features using feature engineering. (L2)

3. analyse the data using different visualization techniques. (L4)

UNIT-III:

REGRESSION: Simple Regression, Multiple Regression, Model Assessment-Training Error,

Generalized Error, Testing Error, Bias-Variance Tradeoff

CLASSIFICATION: Linear Classification, Logistic Regression, Decision Trees

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of the unit, student will be able to

1. analyse different classification models and make recommendations towards learning. (L4)

2. solve real world data using classification techniques. (L3)

3. understand different regression models and about its problems. (L2)

UNIT-IV:

CLUSTERING: K-Means Clustering. EXPERT SYSTEMS: Introduction, Need and Justification of

ES, Knowledge Representation, Knowledge Acquisition and Variation, Utilisation and
Functionality, Basics of Prolog.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of the unit, student will be able to

1. Understand the concept of clustering over classification. (L2)

2. Distinguish between expert systems and traditional systems. (L2)

3. Identify different applications of expert systems. (L3)

225 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT-V:

ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS (ANNs): Biological Neuron, Types of ANN, Optimization

Techniques, Vanishing Gradient Problem, Exploding Gradient Problem, Weight Initialization.

CONVOLUTION NEURAL NETWORKS(CNNs): Introduction, Components of CNN Architecture

Convolution Layer(with example), Pooling/Down sampling Layer, Flattening Layer, Fully
Connected Layer; Rectified Linear Unit Layer, Exponential Linear Unit, Unique Properties of
CNN, Architectures of CNNs, Applications of CNN.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of the unit, student will be able to

1. Understand the architecture of an artificial neuron. (L2)

2. Illustrate different artificial neural network architecture. (L2)

3. Analyse the effect of different activation functions of a CNN unit. (L4)

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Dr.Nilakshi Jain, Artificial Intelligence, As per AICTE: Making a System Intelligent, Wiley
Publications, 1st Edition,2019.

2. Vijayvargia, Abhishek, Machine Learning with Python: An Approach to Applied Machine

Learning, BPB Publications; 1st edition,2018.

3. Dr.S.Lovelyn Rose, Dr. L.Ashok Kumar, Dr.D.Karthika Renuka, Deep Learning using
Python, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd 2019.

REFERENCES:

1. Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach, Pearson
Publications, 4th Edition, 2020.

2. Saroj Kaushik, Artificial Intelligence, Cengage Learning India, 2011.

WEB REFERENCES: 1. https://keras.io/ 2. https://ai.google/ 3.

https://www.coursera.org/learn/neural-networks-deep-learning#syllabus 4.
https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_me71/preview

226 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20APE701) ANALOG & DIGITAL IC DESIGN
Course Objectives:
1. Learn the operation of MOS transistor in Triode, Saturation and Cut-off regions.
2. Learn about the use of Current mirror circuits as resistive loads in the
implementation of CMOS amplifier circuits.
3. Study the importance of Compensation circuits in the design of CMOS operational
amplifiers.
4. Learn about the working principle of two, three and four input CMOS logic circuits.
5. Study the working cycles of DRAM and SRAM cells.

Unit I
MOS transistor and its Modelling:
Basic Operation, Large-Signal Modelling, Body Effect, p-Channel Transistors, Low-
Frequency and High-Frequency Small-Signal Modelling in the Active Region, Small-
Signal Modelling in the Triode and Cutoff Regions, Analog Figures of Merit and Trade-
offs, MOS transistor equations and Advanced MOS Modelling concepts.

Unit II
Current Mirrors and Single-Stage Amplifiers:
Simple CMOS Current Mirror, Common-Source Amplifier, Source-Follower or Common-
Drain Amplifier, Common-Gate Amplifier, Source-Degenerated Current Mirrors,
Cascode Current Mirrors and Cascode Gain Stage.

Unit III
Operational Amplifier (OPAMP)Design and Compensation:
Two-Stage CMOS Opamp, Opamp Gain, Frequency Response, Slew Rate, n-Channel or
p-Channel Input Stage, Systematic Offset Voltage, Opamp Compensation-Dominant-
Pole Compensation and Lead Compensation, Compensating the Two-Stage Opamp,
Making Compensation Independent of Process and Temperature.
Unit IV
Combinational and Sequential MOS Logic Circuits:
MOS logic circuits with Depletion nMOS loads, CMOS logic circuits, Complex logic
circuits, Behavior of Bistable elements, SR Latch circuit, Clocked latch and Flip-Flop
circuits, CMOS D-Latch and Edge–Triggered Flip-Flop.

227 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit V
Semiconductor Memories:
Overview of Semiconductor memories, RAM array organization, DRAM-Cell types,
Operation of Three-Transistor DRAM cell and One-Transistor DRAM cell, Leakage
currents and Refresh operation, SRAM- Various configurations, Full CMOS SRAM cell,
Memory structure of SRAM Cell array and Leakage currents.

Text Books:
1. T.C.Carusone, D.A.Johns & K.W.Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”,
Second Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2019.
2. S.M.Kang & Y.Leblebici,“CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits-Analysis and Design”
Third edition, McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2020.
References:
1. Neil H. E. Weste & D.M.Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design-A Circuits and Systems
Perspective”, Fourth edition, Pearson Edition, 2020.
2. Kiat Seng Yeo and Kaushik Roy, “Low- Voltage, Low-Power VLSI Subsystems”,
McGraw Hill Professional Engineering Education, 2018.
Course Outcomes:

CO1:Interpret the various Modelling effects encountered in a MOSFET

CO2:Evaluate the various parameters of CG, CD and CS amplifier circuits.
CO3:Summarize the various steps in the design of a Compensated CMOS
Operational amplifier circuit.
CO4:Design two, three and four input CMOS logic circuits.
CO5: Illustrate the working cycles of DRAM and SRAM cells.

228 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20APE702)FPGA DESIGN
Course Objectives:
1. Introduce digital design concepts through various Programmable Logic Devices
2. Understand the FPGA architectures in detail
3. Analyze the physical design cycle in FPGA
4. Know the various applications of FPGAs

Unit I
Introduction to Programmable Logic Devices: Programmable logic devices (PLD)-
Programmable Read Only Memory, Programmable Logic Arrays (PLA), Programmable Array
Logic (PAL), Digital design using PLDs. Complex Programmable Logic Devices - Features and
applications of complex programmable logic devices, Altera Max - 7000 series and Altera
FLEX logic- 10K series CPLD.
Unit II
Field Programmable Gate Arrays: Features and applications of FPGAs, advantages and
disadvantages of FPGA, architecture of FPGA, recent technology trends, programming
technologies, commercially available FPGAs.

Unit III
SRAM Field Programmable Gate Arrays: SRAM Programming Technology, SRAM
Programmable FPGAs: Xilinx XC4000, Spartan-3 FPGA Architectures.
Unit IV
Anti-Fuse Programmed FPGAs: Anti-fuse Programming technology, The Actel ACT1, ACT2
and ACT3 architectures.

Unit V
Physical Design Implementation on FPGAs: FPGA Design flow, Physical Design cycle for
FPGAs, Partitioning, Routing-non-segmented, segmented and staggered models.

Design Applications: General design issues, Counter design using FPGA, Designing Adders
with the ACT Architecture.

229 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Text Books:
1. Field Programmable Gate Array Technology, Stephen M. Trimberger, Springer
International Edition, 1994.
2. Field-Programmable Gate Arrays, Stephen D. Brown, Springer, 1992
3. Fundamentals of digital logic with verilog design, Stephen Brown and Zvonko Vranesic,
McGraw-Hill, 2002.
References:
1. Algorithms for VLSI Physical Design Automation, Naveed Sherwani, 3rd Edition, Springer
International Edition, 2005
2. Fundamentals of Logic Design, Charles H. Roth Jr, 5th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2004.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Design digital applications using PLDs.
CO2: Analyze the architectural features of FPGAs.
CO3: Analyze the SRAM programming technology of FPGAs.
CO4: Analyze the Anti-Fuse Programmed FPGA.
CO5: Analyze Physical Design cycle for FPGA and implement various applications using FPGA.

230 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3

(EC20APE703)LOW POWER VLSI CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS

Course Objectives:
1. Learn the operation of MOS transistor in Triode, Saturation and Cut-off regions.
2. Learn about the implementation of MOS dynamic circuits.
3. Learn the various types of power dissipations in a MOS transistor.
4. Enable the students to learn about the Scaling Models and Scaling factors.
5. Study in detail about the various approaches for minimizing leakage power MOS
transistor circuits.

Unit I
MOS Transistors:
Introduction, Historical background, why low power, sources of power dissipations, low-
power design methodologies, Structure of MOS Transistor, the Fluid model, Modes of
operation of MOS Transistor and Electrical characteristics of MOS Transistors, MOS
Transistors as a switch.

Unit II
MOS Inverters: Introduction, inverter and its characteristics, configurations, inverter
ratio in different situations, switching characteristics.

MOS Combinational Circuits: introduction, Pass-Transistor logic, Gate logic, MOS

Dynamic Circuits: Single-phase, Two-phase and CMOS dynamic circuits, Domino
CMOS circuits and NORA logic.

Unit III
Sources of Power Dissipation:
Introduction, Short-circuit power dissipation, Switching power dissipation, Glitching
power dissipation and Leakage power dissipation.

231 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit IV
Supply voltage scaling for low power:
Introduction, device features size scaling, architecture-level approaches, voltage scaling,
multilevel voltage scaling, challenges, dynamic voltage and frequency scaling and
adaptive voltage scaling.

Unit V
Leakage Power Minimization:
Introduction, fabrication of multiple threshold voltages, approaches for minimizing
leakage power, VTCMOS approach, Transistor stacking, MTCMOS approach, Adiabatic
Logic Circuits-Adiabatic Charging, Adiabatic Amplification and Adiabatic logic gates.

Text Books:
1. Ajit Pal, “Low Power VLSI Circuits and Systems”, Springer New Delhi, 2019.
2. W.Wolf “Modern VLSI Design IP based design” Fourth edition, PHI Learning Pvt.
Ltd., 2020.
References:
1. K.Eshraghian, D.A. Pucknell and S.Eshraghian, “Essentials of VLSI Circuits and
Systems”, Third Edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2019.
2. Neil H. E. Weste & D.M.Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design-A Circuits and Systems
Perspective”, Fourth edition, Pearson Edition, 2020.

Course Outcomes:
CO1:Interpret the structure and various electrical characteristics of MOS
transistor.
CO2:Compare Voltage–Current and transfer characteristics of inverters of
different configurations
CO3:Evaluate the Power dissipation both at circuit level and system level.
CO4:Summarize the scaling effects of various key parameters of MOSFET devices.
CO5:Distinguish between standby and run-time leakage power dissipation.

232 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20APE704)DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

Course Objectives:
1. To introduce fundamentals of Image Processing.
2. To expose various transforms in frequency domains.
3. To descript various intensity transformations in spatial and frequency domains.
4. To dissimilate various segmentation and compression techniques for image
processing.
5. To discuss various color models and to introduce the concepts of color image
processing.

Unit I
Digital Image Fundamentals:
A simple image model, Fundamental Steps in Digital Image Processing, Elements of
visual perception, image sensing and acquisition, image sampling and quantization,
basic relationships between pixels – neighborhood, adjacency, connectivity and
distance measures

Unit II
Image Transforms:
Two dimensional Discrete Fourier transform, Walsh Transform, Discrete Cosine
Transform, Hadamard transform, Haar transform, Slant transform, Wavelet
Transforms – Introduction, continuous vs Discrete wavelet Transform, Discrete
wavelet transform – Haar wavelet Transform.

Unit III
Image Enhancement and Filtering:
Gray level transformations, Histogram Processing, Histogram equalization and
Specifications, Spatial Filtering, Smoothing filters, Sharpening filters, Enhancement
in Frequency domain - Low-pass, High-pass and Homomorphic filtering.

233 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit IV
Image Segmentation:
Point, Line and Edge Detection, Canny Edge Detection, Laplacian of Gaussian Edge
Detection, Thresholding, Region Growing, Region Splitting and Merging

Image Compression:
Fundamentals of Compression, Image compression model, Types of Redundancy –
Coding, Inter pixel and Psycho visual, Lossless compression – Huffman coding,
Shannon-Fano coding, Lossy Compression - Transform coding.

Unit V
Color Image Processing:
Color Fundamentals, Color Models - RGB, YUV, HIS, Pseudo Color, Full Color image
processing, Color transformations – formulation, Color complements, Color slicing,
tone and Color corrections. Color image smoothing and Sharpening.

Text Books:
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E woods and Steven L. Eddins, “Digital Image
processing using MATLAB”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. K.P Soman, “Insight Into Wavelets : from Theory to Practice”, PHI Learning Pvt.
Ltd., 2010

References:
1. Milan Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac, Roger Boule, Image Processing, Analysis, and
Machine Vision, Third Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. S Jayaraman, S Esakkirajan, T Veerakumar, “Digital Image processing”, Tata
McGraw Hill.
3. William K. Pratt, “Digital Image Processing”, John Wiley, 3rd Edition, 2004.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Understand fundamentals of digital image processing and apply
engineering mathematics in processing of digital image.
CO2: Compute 2D transforms in frequency domains w.r.t digital image
processing
CO3: Analyze different image enhancement techniques in spatial and frequency
domains
CO4: Describe various techniques in image segmentation and apply various
algorithms to perform image compression.
CO5: Illustrate various color models and apply color models in image processing.
234 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20APE705) ELECTRONIC DEFENSE SYSTEMS

Course Objectives:
1. Study about the need for Weapon systems.
2. Learn about various Artillery Systems and its performance parameters.
3. Learn about the operation of Radar Warning Receivers.
4. Study about the various Electronic Countermeasures in Defense systems.
5. Know about the Antistealth Techniques and State of the Art and its Perspectives.

Unit I
Electronic Defense:
Introduction, Systems in use in the Armed Forces, The main weapon systems,
Objectives of Electronic Defense-Organization of Electronic Defense, Electronic
Defense Systems and their Operational Objective, Information Operation (IO),
Information Warfare (IW) and Need for the Study of Weapon Systems.
Unit II
Sensors:
Infrared Sensors: Review of Radiant Energy, Infrared Radiation Produced by Targets of
Interest, IR Range Equation, Suppression of Background Effects and IR Systems

Weapon Systems:
Introduction, Artillery Systems-Firing Accuracy, Susceptibility to Jamming of an Artillery
System, Missile Systems-Command Missiles, Beam-Riding Missiles, Semiactive
Homing Missiles, Active Homing Missiles, Track-Via-Missile (TVM) Systems, Passive
IR-Guided Missiles, Sea-Skimming Missiles and Passive Antiradiation Missiles

Unit III
Electronic Intercept Systems:
Introduction, Equation of a Passive System, Radar Warning Receivers-RWR Sensitivity,
Electronic Support Measures-Omnidirectional Antennas, Antennas for Direction
Finding and Frequency Measurement Receiver, Electronic Intelligence (ELINT)
Systems- ELINT Sensors, Surveillance Network and ELINT Processing Center
(EWAC), Infrared Intercept Systems- Missile Launch Warner/Missile Approach
235 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Warner, Forward-Looking Infrared Systems, Communications ESM and
Communication Intelligence- Communications ESM and COMINT.

Unit IV
Electronic Countermeasures Systems:
Introduction, Operational Jamming Modes: SPJ, SOJ, and EJ, Onboard ECM Systems-
Passive Systems, Active Systems, The Jammer Equations, The DRFM, Transmitters,
ECM Antennas, The Pod, ECM Techniques-Spot Noise, Barrage Noise, Swept
Noise/CW and Gated Noise, High-Resolution Radar Jamming, Infrared
Countermeasures(IRCM)-Modulated Sources, Laser IRCM, Off-Board ECM Systems-
Passive Systems, Active Systems and Communications Countermeasures

Unit V
New Electronic Defense Techniques and Technologies:
Introduction, New Electronic Defense Architectures, ED Basic Technology Advances,
Shared Apertures, HPM Weapons, Anti-Antiradiation Missile Techniques, Antistealth
Techniques and State of the Art and Perspectives.
Text Books:
1. Filippo Neri, “Introduction to Electronic Defense Systems”, Second Edition, Artech
House, Boston,2017.
2. Ray Tricker, “Defence Electronics” Second edition, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2015.
References:
1. Warren J. Boord and John B. Hoffman, “Air and Missile Defense Systems
Engineering”, First Edition, CRC Press, Taylor and Francis Group, 2018.
2. William P. Delaney, “Perspectives on Defense Systems Analysis”, MIT Lincoln
Laboratory Series, 2019.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Summarize the objectives of Electronic Defense Systems.
CO2: Interpret the operating principles of various Artillery Systems.
CO3: Analyze Radar warning receivers, Electronic support systems and Electronic
intelligence systems.
CO4: Illustrate the working principle of various jamming techniques in different
operational modes.
CO5: Discuss newly designed systems to counter the recent threat embodied in
stealth aircrafts.

236 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20APE706) SMART SENSOR NETWORKS
Course Objectives:
1. Study about the Sensor systems and its various characteristics.
2. Learn about Transduction Mechanisms and its Application range in Biosensors.
3. Learn about the parameters of interest related to Chemical sensors, Capacitive
and Inductive Sensors for use in real-time applications.
4. Study the working principle and applications of Temperature and Nanotechnology-
Enabled Sensors.
5. Understand the issues pertaining to sensor networks and the challenges involved
in managing a sensor network.

Unit I
Sensor Fundamentals:
Introduction, Sensor Systems, Sensor Characteristics, System Characteristics,
Instrument Selection, Data Acquisition and Readout, Installation and Conditioning Bridge
Circuits

Unit II
Sensors-I:
Introduction, Technology Fundamentals, Selecting and Specifying Accelerometers,
Applicable Standards, Interfacing and Designs.
Biosensors: What is a Biosensor, Applications of Biosensors, Origin of Biosensors,
Bioreceptor Molecules, Transduction Mechanisms in Biosensors, Application Range of
Biosensors and Future prospects.

Unit III
Sensors-II:
Chemical Sensors: Technology Fundamentals and Applications.
Capacitive and Inductive Displacement Sensors: Introduction, Capacitive Sensors,
Inductive Sensors, Capacitive and Inductive Sensor Types, Selecting and Specifying
Capacitance and Inductive Sensors, Comparing Capacitive and Inductive Sensors,
Applications, Latest Developments.

237 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit IV : Sensors-III
Temperature Sensors: Sensor Types and Technologies, Selecting and Specifying
Temperature Sensors.
Nanotechnology-Enabled Sensors: Possibilities, Realities and Applications.
Unit V
Introduction to Wireless Sensor Networks: Challenges for Wireless Sensor
Networks, Applications for Wireless Sensor Networks, Enabling Technologies for
Wireless Sensor Networks, Single Node Architecture-Hardware Components, Energy
Consumption of Sensor Nodes.(Only Operation Stats With Different Power
Consumption of Sensor and Actuators is Included), Deployment Environments
Sensor Network Architecture-Sensor network scenarios, Optimization Goals and
Figures of Merit, Design Principles of WSN, Service Interfaces of WSNs and Gateway-
Concepts.
Text Books:
1. John S. Wilson, “Sensor Technology Handbook”, Elsevier Inc., 2012.
2. Holger Karl and Andreas Willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor
Networks”, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 2016.
References:
1. Alan S Morris, “Measurement and Instrumentation Principles”, Third Edition,
Butterworth-Heinemann, 2016.
2. John R.Taylor, “Introduction to Error Analysis: The Study of Uncertainties in
Physical Measurements”, Second Edition, University Science Books, California,
2014.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Discuss the various characteristics of Sensors and Systems.
CO2: Interpret the various Transduction Mechanisms in Biosensors.
CO3: Decide the appropriate sensor for a given application of interest.
CO4: Outline the Possibilities and Realities of Nanotechnology-Enabled Sensors.
CO5: Explore the Physical layer, Transceiver design considerations and Assignment
of MAC addresses.

238 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3

(EC20APE707) DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING

Course Objectives:
1. Provide a solid conceptual understanding of the fundamentals of data communication.
2. Explore the various layers of TCP/IP and OSI network models and protocols.
3. Explore the various protocols used in data communication networks.
4. Make students to understand related to computer networks.

Unit I
Data Communication: Advantages and applications of Computer Networks, Components,
Networks, Protocols and Standards, ISO-OSI and TCP/IP Network Models.
Physical Layer: Transmission media-guided and Unguided, Switching systems - Circuit
switching, Packet switching - Datagram switching & Virtual circuit switching.
Unit II
Data link layer: Framing, Flow and Error control, Protocols - Stop-and-wait Protocol, Stop-and-
wait ARQ, Sliding window protocol, Go-Back-N ARQ, Selective Repeat ARQ, HDLC, Point to
Point Protocol.

Unit III
Medium Access Sub layer: Multiple access techniques - random access and controlled
access, Channelization, multiple access protocols, IEEE standard 802.3 & 802.11 for LANS
and WLAN, Connecting Devices - repeaters, hubs, bridges, switches, routers, Gateway,
Backbone networks, Virtual LANs.

Unit IV
Network Layer: Addressing types - Physical, Logical & port address, Internetworking, IP
addressing (Class full & Classless), Network layer protocols - ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP,
IPV4, ICMP, IPV6, ICMPV6, IGMP, Unicast and Multicast Routing protocols.
Unit V
Transport Layer: Process to process delivery, Connection oriented & Connectionless
Transport, UDP, TCP, congestion control and Quality of Service.
Application Layer: Application layer protocols – DNS, WWW and HTTP, FTP, SMTP.
Introduction to streaming Audio/Video.
239 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Text Books:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, McGraw Hill, 4 th Edition.
th
2. S. Tannenbum, D. Wetherall, “Computer Networks”, Prentice Hall, Pearson, 5 Edition.

Reference Books:
1. Fred Halsall, “Computer Networks”, Addison – Wesley Pub. Co. 1996.
2. Larry L, Peterson and Bruce S. Davie, “Computer Networks: A system Approach”,
Elsevier, 4th Edition.
3. Tomasi, “Introduction To Data Communications & Networking”, Pearson 7th impression,
2011
4. William Stallings, “Data and Computer Communications”, Prentice Hall, Imprint of
Pearson, 9th Edition.

Course Outcomes:
CO1. Choose the appropriate technology for data transmission based on the requirement by
analysing various computer networks.
CO2. Analyze different flow and error control protocols.
CO3. Analyze different multiple access protocols and network standards, connecting
devices.
CO4. Configure simple networks and assign IP addresses to hosts.
CO5. Apply the concept of different application layer protocols and provide congestion free
quality service.

240 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20APE708) SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable the student to become familiar with satellites and satellite services.
2. Study the satellite orbits and launching.
3. Study the earth segment and space segment components
4. Study the satellite access by various users.

UNIT I
SATELLITE ORBITS
Kepler’s Laws, Newton’s Law, Orbital Parameters, Orbital Perturbations, Station Keeping, Geo
Stationary and Non Geo-Stationary Orbits, Look Angle Determination, Limits of Visibility,
Eclipse, Sub Satellite Point, Sun Transit Outage, Launching Procedures Launch Vehicles and
Propulsion.

UNIT II
SPACE SEGMENT
Spacecraft Technology, Structure, Primary Power, Attitude and Orbit Control, Thermal
Control and Propulsion, Communication Payload and Supporting Subsystems, Telemetry,
Tracking and Command, Transponders, The Antenna Subsystem.

UNIT III
SATELLITE LINK DESIGN
Basic Link Analysis, Interference Analysis, Rain Induced Attenuation and Interference,
Ionospheric Characteristics, Link Design with and without Frequency Reuse.

UNIT IV
SATELLITE ACCESS AND CODING METHODS
Modulation and Multiplexing: Voice, Data, Video, and Analog, Digital Transmission System,
Digital Video Broadcast, And Multiple Accesses: FDMA, TDMA, CDMA, DAMA Assignment
Methods, Compression, Encryption, Coding Schemes.

241 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT V
SATELLITE APPLICATIONS
INTELSAT Series, INSAT, VSAT, Mobile Satellite Services: GSM, GPS, INMARSAT, LEO, MEO,
Satellite Navigational System. GPS Position Location Principles, Differential GPS, Direct
Broadcast satellites (DBS/DTH).

TEXT BOOKS
1.Dennis Roddy, “Satellite Communication”, 4 th Edition, Mc Graw Hill International, 2006.
2. Timothy, Pratt, Charles, W.Bostain, Jeremy E. Allnutt,"Satellite Communication”, 2 nd
Edition, Wiley Publications, 2002.

REFERENCES
1. Wilbur L.Pritchard, Hendri G. Suyderhoud, Robert A. Nelson, “Satellite Communication
Systems Engineering”, Prentice Hall/Pearson, 2007.
2. N.Agarwal, “Design of Geosynchronous Space Craft”, Prentice Hall, 1986.
3. Bruce R. Elbert, “The Satellite Communication Applications”, Hand Book, Artech House
Bostan London, 1997.

COURSEOUTCOMES
CO1: Define orbital mechanics and launch methodologies.
CO2: Describe satellite subsystems.
CO3: Design link power budget for satellites.
CO4: Compare competitive satellite services.
CO5: Explain satellite access techniques and DTH and compression standards.

242 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20APE709)WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To make students understand the basics of Wireless sensor Networks.
2. To familiarize with learning of the Architecture of WSN.
3. To understand the concepts of Networking and Networking in WSN.
4. To study the design consideration of topology control and solution to the various
problems.
5. To introduce the hardware and software platforms and tool in WSN.

UNIT I
OVERVIEW OF WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS
Single Node Architecture- Hardware Components- Network Characteristics- unique
constraints and challenges, Enabling Technologies for Wireless Sensor Networks-Types of
wireless sensor networks

UNIT II
ARCHITECTURES
Network Architecture - Sensor Networks Scenarios - Design Principle, Physical Layer and
Transceiver Design Considerations, Optimization Goals and Figures of Merit, Gateway
Concepts, Operating Systems and Execution Environments - introduction to Tiny OS and
nesC - Internet to WSN Communication.

UNIT III
NETWORKING SENSORS
MAC Protocols for Wireless Sensor Networks, Low Duty Cycle Protocols And Wakeup
Concepts-SMAC, B-MAC Protocol, IEEE 802.15.4 standard and Zigbee, the Mediation Device
Protocol, Wakeup Radio Concepts, Address and Name Management, Assignment of MAC
Addresses, Routing Protocols Energy Efficient Routing, Geographic Routing.

UNIT IV
INFRASTRUCTURE ESTABLISHMENT

243 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Topology Control, Clustering, Time Synchronization, Localization and Positioning, Sensor
Tasking and Control.

UNIT V
SENSOR NETWORK PLATFORMS AND TOOLS
Sensor Node Hardware-Berkeley Motes, Programming Challenges, Node level software
platforms, Node- level Simulators, State centric programming

BOOKS:
1. Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli, & Taieb Znati, “Wireless Sensor Networks ­ Technology,
Protocols, and Applications”, John Wiley, 2007.
2. Anna Hac, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley, 2003

COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Understand challenges and technologies for wireless networks.
CO2: Understand architecture and sensors.
CO3: Describe the communication, energy efficiency, computing, storage and transmission.
CO4: Establishing infrastructure and simulations.
CO5: Explain the concept of programming the in WSN environment.

244 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRIVENKATESWARACOLLEGEOFENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

L T P C
B.Tech- VIISem
3 0 0 3

(CE20AOE701) Air Pollution and Quality Control

CourseObjectives:
After studying this course, students will be able to:
 The objectives of the course are to understand the Air pollution Concepts
 Identify the source of air pollution
 To know about Air pollution Control devices and distinguish the Air quality monitoring
devices
UNIT –I
Introduction to Air Pollution
Introduction: Sources, effects on ecosystems, classification and characterization of air
pollutants, Air Pollution Episodes of environmental importance. Indoor air pollution –sources,
Effects.
Learning outcomes:
 Understanding the basic Air pollution concepts
 Identifying the source of air pollution
 To understand the character of atmospheric pollutants and their effects
UNIT II
Effects of Air Pollution
Effects of Air pollutants on man, material and vegetation: Global effects of air pollution –
Green House effect, Heat Islands, Acid Rains, Ozone Holes etc.
Learning outcomes:
 To know effects of air pollution on man
 To know effects of air pollution on material and vegetation
UNIT – III
Plume Behavior
Meteorology and plume Dispersion; properties of atmosphere; Heat, Pressure, Wind forces,
Moisture and relative Humidity, Influence of Meteorological phenomena on Air Quality-wind
rose diagram.
Learning outcomes:
 Understand the composition and structure of atmosphere
 To Understand the wind rose diagram
245 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT – IV
Control Techniques
Particulate matter and gaseous pollutants- settling chambers, cyclone separators, scrubbers,
filters & ESP.
Learning outcomes:
 Learning about air pollution control techniques
 Study on latest devices and advancements in existing devices
 Choose and design control techniques for particulate and gaseous emissions.

UNIT –V
Noise Pollution
Noise pollution–Sources, Measurements, effects and control, noise standards. Environmental
issues, global episodes, laws, acts, protocols.
Learning outcomes:
 Learning about noise pollution.
 Understand the laws, acts and protocols related to noise pollution &control

Course Outcomes (CO):

After studying this course, students will be able to:
 Identify the major sources of air pollution
 Understand their effects on health and environment.
 Evaluate the dispersion of air pollutants in the atmosphere and to develop air quality
models.
 Choose and design control techniques for particulate and gaseous emissions.
 Understand the noise pollution and control methods.

Textbooks:
1. Noel De Nevers, “Air Pollution Control Engineering” , Waveland PrInc 2016
2. Anjaneyulu Y, “Text book of Air Pollution and Control Technologies”, Allied Publishers
3. M.N. Rao and HVN Rao, Air Pollution, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers 2017

Reference Books:
1. Nevers, “Air Pollution Control Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, Inc., 2000.
2. Dr. B.S.N. Raju, “Fundamentals of Air Pollution” Oxford & I.B.H.
3. T. Holgate, Hillel S. Koren, Jonathan M. Samet, Robert L. “Air Pollution and Health”
Maynard publisher Academic Press.

246 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech - VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(ME20AOE703) INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING
Pre-Requisite: Operation Research, Production & Operation Management
Course Objectives:
 Through reading the text, references and discussion of cases students should be able
to understand the fundamentals underlying the management of an Organization.
 Understand where the plant is to be located based on facilities available and what are
the important factors affecting the facilities location of a plant, and plant layout.
 Determine work measurement techniques for time study.
 Recognize the importance of Inventory control to ensure their availability with
minimum capital lock up.
 Understand the concepts of TQM, ISO, BIS etc.

UNIT – 1:
Concepts of Management-Administration and Organization – Functions of Management–
Schools of Management Thought: Taylor‟s Scientific Management, Fayol‟s Principles of
Management, Douglas Mc-Gregor‟s Theory X and Y, Mayo's Hawthorne Experiments,
Hertzberg‟s Two factor Theory of Motivation, Maslow‟s Hierarchy of Human needs – Systems
Approach to Management. Organizational Structures- Functional- Divisional- Matrix etc.,Basic
Concepts Related to Organization.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Understand the concepts of Management, Scientific management, management
theories etc. (L2)
 Define the types of structures of an organization. (L2)

UNIT – 2:
Plant Location: Definition, Factors affecting the Plant Location, Comparison of Rural and
Urban sites, Selection of Plant Location, Plant Layout: Definition, Objectives, Types of Plant
Layout.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
247 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
  Understand where the plant is to be located based on facilities available and what are
the important factors affecting the facilities location of a plant, and plant layout. (L2)
 Analyze plant layout design to facilitate material flow and processing of a product in
the most efficient manner through the shortest possible time. (L4)

UNIT – 3:
Work Study – Definition, Objectives, Method Study – Steps Involved – Various Types of
Process Charts –Micro motion and Memo motion Studies. Work Measurement - Definition,
Time Study, Steps involved - Equipment, Different Methods of Performance Rating -
Allowances, Standard Time Calculation. Work Sampling - Definition, Steps Involved,
Standard Time Calculations - Applications.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Understand the concepts of Work study, Method study, steps, process charts etc. (L2)
 Determine work measurement techniques for time study (L3)
 Evaluate Work sampling methods to calculate standard time. (L4)

UNIT – 4:
Inventory Models- Deterministic models- EOQ Models – With and Without Shortages Models;
Inventory Models with Price Breaks -Probabilistic Models –Discrete Variable, Continuous
Variable. Inventory Control Systems
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Understand the concepts of Inventory, Classification, Functions, it’s associated costs
etc., (L2)
 Determine the Economic order quantity. (L2)

UNIT – 5:
Inspection & Quality Control: Statistical Quality Control- Techniques-Variables and
Attributes- Control Charts: X and R Charts; P Charts and C Charts. Introduction to TQM-
Quality circles-BIS & ISO Standards-Importance.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 Understand the Inspection and Quality control concepts. (L2)
 Apply SQC techniques of Variables and attribute charts for effective inspection. (L3)
 Understand the concepts of TQM, ISO, BIS etc. (L2)

248 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Textbooks:
1. Manufacturing Organization and Management, T.Amrine/ Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2004
2. Industrial Engineering and Management ,O.P.Khanna, DhanpatiRai, 18th edition, 2013.
3. Industrial Engineering and Management, Dr. C.Nadamuni Reddy, New Age
International Publishers, 1st edition, 2011.

Reference Books:
1. Industrial Engineering and production management, MartindTelsang S.Chand..
2. Work Study by ILO(International Labour Organization)
3. Management by James AF Stoner, Freeman 6th Ed, Pearson Education, New
Delhi,2005
4. Production and Operations management, PanneerSelvam, PHI,2004.
5. Statistical Quality Control by EL Grantt, McGrawhil
6. Motion and time studies by Ralph M Barnes, John Wiley and Sons,2004

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
 Understand the various concepts, principles and theories of management. (L2)
 Understand the structure of an organization through understanding various
structures of organizations. (L2)
 Understand where the plant is to be located based on facilities available and what
are the important factors affecting the facilities location of a plant, and plant layout.
(L2)
 Understand the concepts of Work study, Method study, steps, process charts etc.
(L2)
 Define Work sampling and methods of work sampling to calculate standard time.
(L4)
 Understand the concepts of Inventory, Classification, Functions, it’s associated costs
etc., (L2)
 Recognize the importance of Inventory control to ensure their availability with
minimum capital lock up. (L1)
Apply SQC techniques of Variables and attribute charts for effective inspection. (L4)

249 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
L T P C
B.Tech- VII Sem
3 0 0 3

(EE20AOE701) EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

Course Objectives:
The objective of this course is to
1. To understand the basics of an embedded system and RTOS.
2. To introduce the typical components of an embedded system and different
communication interfaces.
3. To provide knowledge on the design process of embedded system
UNIT I - Introduction to Embedded Systems
Definition of Embedded System, Embedded Systems Vs General Computing Systems,
History and classification of Embedded Systems, Major Application Areas, Characteristics
and Quality Attributes of Embedded Systems.
UNIT II - Typical Embedded System
Core of the Embedded System - General Purpose and Domain Specific Processors, ASICs,
PLDs, Commercial Off-The-Shelf Components (COTS), Memory - ROM, RAM, Memory
according to the type of Interface, Memory Shadowing, Memory selection for Embedded
Systems, Sensors and Actuators, Communication Interface: Onboard and External
Communication Interfaces
UNIT III - Embedded Firmware
Fundamental issues in hardware software co-design, Embedded Firmware Design
Approaches and Development Languages.

UNIT-IV - RTOS based Embedded System Design

Operating System Basics, Types of Operating Systems, Tasks, Process and Threads,
Multiprocessing and Multitasking, Task Scheduling.
UNIT-V - Task Communication
Task Communication - Shared Memory, Message Passing, Remote Procedure Call and
Sockets, Task Synchronization - Task Communication/Synchronization Issues, Task
Synchronization Techniques, Device Drivers, Methods to Choose an RTOS.

Text Books:
1. Introduction to Embedded Systems - Shibu K.V, Mc Graw Hill.
2. An Embedded software primer - David E. Simon, Pearson Ed. 2005.
References:

250 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 1. Embedded Systems - Raj Kamal, TMH.
2. Embedded System Design - A Unified Hardware/Software Introduction - Frank Vahid,
Tony d. Givargis, John Wiley, 2002.

Course Outcomes:
After completion of the course, student will be able to:
CO1: Understand the selection procedure of Processors in the embedded domain.
CO2: Explain different components of embedded system.
CO3: Design Procedure for Embedded Firmware.
CO4: Describe the role of Real time Operating Systems in Embedded Systems.
CO5: Evaluate the Correlation between task synchronization and latency issues.

251 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech VII Sem L T P C

3 0 0 3
(AM20A0E601)Machine Learning Tools & Techniques

UNIT I

Introduction: Introduction to Machine Learning: Introduction. Different types of

learning, Hypothesis space and inductive bias, Evaluation. Training and test sets, cross
validation, Concept of over fitting, under fitting, Bias and Variance.

Linear Regression: Introduction, Linear regression, Simple and Multiple Linear

regression, evaluating regression fit.

UNIT II

Decision tree learning: Introduction, Decision tree representation, appropriate

problems for decision tree learning, the basic decision tree algorithm, hypothesis space
search in decision tree learning, inductive bias in decision tree learning, issues in decision
tree learning, Python exercise on Decision Tree.

(Principal Component Analysis) ,Python exercise on kNN and PCA.

UNIT III

Instance based Learning: K nearest neighbor, the Curse of Dimensionality, Feature

Selection: forward search, backward search, univariate , multivariate feature selection
approach, Feature reduction.

Probability and Bayes Learning(Move to Data Mining): Bayesian Learning, Naïve

Bayes, Python exercise on Naïve Bayes, Logistic Regression.

UNIT IV

Support Vector Machine: Introduction, the Dual formulation, Maximum margin with
noise, nonlinear SVM and Kernel function, solution to dual problem.

252 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Artificial Neural Networks: Introduction, Biological motivation, ANN representation,
appropriate, problem for ANN learning, Perceptron, multilayer networks and the back
propagation algorithm;

UNIT V

Ensembles: Introduction, Bagging and boosting, Random forest, Clustering:

Introduction, K-mean clustering, agglomerative hierarchical clustering, Python exercise
on k-mean clustering.

TEXTBOOKS

1.Machine Learning. Tom Mitchell. First Edition, McGraw- Hill, 1997.

2.Alpaydin, Ethem. Introduction to machine learning. MIT press, 2020.

REFERENCES

1.Kevin P. Murphy, “Machine Learning: A Probabilistic Perspective”, MIT Press, 2012

253 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(AUTONOMOUS)

B.Tech - VII SEM L T P C

3 0 0 3

(CS20A0E503)Structured Query Language

Course Objectives:

 To be able to write SQL statements that edit existing data. Be able to write SQL
statements that create database objects.
 To understand the structure and design of relational databases and understand the
importance and major issues of database security and the maintenance of data
integrity.
 To add, update, or delete records within a database.
 SQL can create new databases.
 SQL users can add new tables to an existing database.
 SQL can create views or stored procedures in a database.

UNIT-I

Introduction to Database and RDBMS, Introduction to SQL, Database Engine, SQL Syntax,
Introduction to mysql workbench, mysql workbench usage. SQL Datatypes and operators.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of the unit, students will be able to:

1.Distinguish between DBMS and RDBMS

2.Explain about mysql.

3.Know usage of mysql workbench.

4.List datatypes of sql for different workbench.

254 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT-II

SQL Database: create database, use database, drop database, rename database, delete
database.

SQL table: create table,droptable,deletetable,rename table, truncate table,copy table and

alter table.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of the unit, students will be able to:

1.Create databases and tables

2.Perform operations on database as well as table.

3.Explain Databases and its usage.

UNIT-III

SQL SELECT: Select statement , select IN, Select Multiple, Select Date.

SQL WHERE clause, SQL AS, SQL HAVING clause.

DDL(data definition language) commands in sql.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of the unit, students will be able to:

1.Use select statement to retrieve data.

2.List DDL commands

UNIT-IV

DML(Data manipulation Langugae) commands in SQL.

SQL Keys:Primarykey,foreign key, unique key.

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of the unit, students will be able to:

1.List DML commands

2.Construct key relationships on a table.

255 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
3.Explain types of keys and its uses

UNIT-V

SQL Insert: INSERT statement, INSERT INTO statement, INSERT multiple rows.

SQL joins:Types of joins(four types along with an examples).

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of the unit, students will be able to:

1.Insert data into the table.

2.Explain how to join more than one table..

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Getting Started with SQL Author: Thomas Nield ,Edition: 1st Edition
2. SQL: A Step-by-Step Guide for Beginners , by Daniel Bell.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1.SQL Quickstart Guide: The Simplified Beginner's Guide to SQL Paperback – 11 March 2015

Online Learning Resources:

1.https://www.guru99.com/sql.html

2.https://www.w3schools.com/sql/

256 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EE20AOE704) INTRODUCTION TO SMART GRID & ELECTRIC VEHICLES

COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To understand various aspects of smart grid.
 To Study about Smart Grid technologies, different smart meters and advanced
metering infrastructure.
 To familiarize the power quality management issues in Smart Grid.
 To familiarize the high performance computing for Smart Grid applications.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO SMART GRID

Evolution of Electric Grid, Concept, Definitions and Need for Smart Grid, Smart grid drivers,
functions, opportunities, challenges and benefits, Difference between conventional & Smart
Grid, Concept of Resilient & Self Healing Grid, Present development & International policies
in Smart Grid.

UNIT 2 SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES AND SMART METERS

Components and Architecture of Smart Grid Design, Smart Grid Communication, Introduction
to Smart Meters, Advanced Metering infrastructure (AMI) drivers and benefits, AMI protocols,
standards and initiatives, AMI needs in the smart grid, Phasor Measurement Unit(PMU),
Intelligent Electronic Devices(IED)

UNIT 3 POWER QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN SMART GRID

Power Quality & EMC in Smart Grid, Power Quality issues of Grid connected Renewable
Energy Sources, Power Quality Conditioners for Smart Grid, Web based Power Quality
monitoring, Power Quality Audit. Need of CLOUD Computing and Cyber Security for Smart
Grid.

UNIT 4 Hybrid Electric Vehicles

Concepts of hybrid electric drive train, types, architecture of series and parallel hybrid
electric drive train, merits and demerits, series and parallel hybrid electric drive train design.

UNIT 5 Energy Storages

Electrochemical batteries – lead acid batteries and lithium based batteries, Ultra capacitors,
Flywheels. Basic principles of Fuel Cell and Solar Cell.

257 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
COURSE OUTCOMES

On completion of the course, student will be able to

CO1 - Illustrate the concepts of Smart Grid and its present developments.
CO2 - Analyze the various Smart Grid technologies.
CO3 - Realize the power quality management in Smart Grids.
CO4 - Analyze the concepts of Hybrid Electric Vehicles.
CO5 – Apply the Concepts of Energy Storage system technologies in Smart Grid.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stuart Borlase “Smart Grid: Infrastructure, Technology and Solutions”, CRC Press 2012.
2. Janaka Ekanayake, Nick Jenkins, Kithsiri Liyanage, Jianzhong Wu, Akihiko Yokoyama,
“Smart Grid: Technology and Applications”, Wiley, 2012.
3. Larminie, J. and Lowry, J. (2012) Electric Vehicle Technology Explained, Second
Edition.John Wiley & Sons, Chichester
4. Alfred Rufer, Energy Storage: Systems and Components, CRC Press, 2017

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Vehbi C. Güngör, Dilan Sahin, Taskin Kocak, Salih Ergüt, Concettina Buccella, Carlo
Cecati, and Gerhard P. Hancke, “Smart Grid Technologies: Communication Technologies and
Standards”, IEEE Transactions On Industrial Informatics, Vol. 7, No. 4, November 2011.
2. Xi Fang, Satyajayant Misra, Guoliang Xue, and Dejun Yang “Smart Grid – The New and
Improved Power Grid: A Survey”, IEEE Transaction on Smart Grids,Vol.14, No.4, pp.944-
980, 2012.
3. Denton, T. (2013) Automobile Electrical and Electronic Systems. Routledge, London.

258 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech– VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3

(MA20AOE701) NUMERICAL METHODS FOR ENGINEERS

Course objectives:

This course aims at providing the student with the knowledge on various numerical methods for
solving equations, interpolating the polynomials, evaluation of integral equations and solution of
differential equations.

UNIT-I:

Solution of Algebraic & Transcendental Equations:

Introduction-Bisection method-Iterative method-Regula falsi method-Newton Raphson method.

System of Algebraic equations: Gauss Jordan method-Gauss Siedal method.

Learning Outcomes:

Students will be able to

• Calculate the roots of equation using Bisection method and Iterative method.
• Calculate the roots of equation using Regula falsi method and Newton Raphson method.
• Solve the system of algebraic equations using Gauss Jordan method and Gauss Siedal
method.

UNIT-II:

Curve Fitting

Principle of Least squares- Fitting of curves- Fitting of linear, quadratic and

exponential curves.

Learning Outcomes:

Students will be able to

• understand curve fitting
• understand fitting of several types of curves

UNIT-III:

Interpolation

Finite differences-Newton’s forward and backward interpolation formulae – Lagrange’s

formulae. Gauss forward and backward formula, Stirling’s formula, Bessel’s formula.

259 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Learning Outcomes:

Students will be able to

• Understand the concept of interpolation.
• Derive interpolating polynomial using newton’s forward and backward formulae.
• Derive interpolating polynomial using lagrange’s formulae.
• Derive interpolating polynomial using gauss forward and backward formulae.
UNIT-IV:
Numerical Integration
Numerical Integration: Trapezoidal rule – Simpson’s 1/3 Rule – Simpson’s 3/8 Rule

Learning Outcomes:

Students will be able to

• Solve integral equations using Simson’s 1/3 and Simson’s 3/8 rule.
• Solve integral equations using Trapezoidal rule.

UNIT-V:

Solution of Initial value problems to Ordinary differential equations

Numerical solution of Ordinary Differential equations: Solution by Taylor’s series-Picard’s
Method of successive Approximations-Modified Euler’s Method-Runge-Kutta Methods.

Learning Outcomes:

Students will be able to

• Solve initial value problems to ordinary differential equations using Taylor’s method.
• Solve initial value problems to ordinary differential equations using Euler’s method
and Runge Kutta methods.

Course Outcomes:

After the completion of course, students will be able to

• Apply numerical methods to solve algebraic and transcendental equations.
• Understand fitting of several kinds of curves.
• Derive interpolating polynomials using interpolation formulae.
• Solve differential and integral equations numerically.

Text Books:
1. B.S.Grewal, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna publishers.
2. Ronald E. “Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists”, Walpole,PNIE.
3. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Wiley India
Reference Books:
1. B.V.Ramana, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Mc Graw Hill publishers.
2. Alan Jeffrey, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Elsevier.

260 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

L T P C
B.Tech- VII Sem
3 0 0 3

(CE20AOE704) Environmental Impact Analysis & Management

Course Objectives:
 To impart knowledge on different concepts of Environmental Impact Assessment.
 To teach procedures of risk assessment.
 To teach the EIA methodologies and the criterion for selection of EIA methods.
 To teach the procedures for environmental clearances and audit.
 To know the impact quantification of various projects on the environment.

UNIT –I
Concepts and methodologies of EIA
Initial environmental Examination, Elements of EIA, - Factors affecting E-I-A Impact
evaluation and analysis, preparation of Environmental Base map, Classification of
environmental parameters- Criteria for the selection of EIA Methodology, E I A methods, Ad-
hoc methods, matrix methods.
Learning outcomes:
After completion of this unit student will
 Understand the elements of EIA.
 Explain the criteria for selection of EIA methodology

UNIT II
Impact of Developmental Activities and Land Use
Introduction and Methodology for the assessment of soil and ground water, EIA in surface
water, Air and Biological environment: Methodology for the assessment of Impacts on
surface waterenvironment, Air pollution sources, Generalized approach for assessment of Air
pollution Impact
Learning outcomes:
After completion of this unit student will
 Study the factors causing impact of development activities
 Decide mitigation measures of pollution on environment

261 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT – III
Assessment of Impact on Vegetation& Wildlife
Introduction - Assessment of Impact of development Activities on Vegetation and wildlife,
environmental Impact of Deforestation – Causes and effects of deforestation.
Learning outcomes:
After completion of this unit student will
 Understand effect of development activities on environment.
 Know the design procedures for assessment of environmental risk

UNIT – IV
Environmental Audit
Introduction - Environmental Audit & Environmental legislation objectives of Environmental
Audit, Types of environmental Audit, Audit protocol, stages of Environmental Audit, onsite
activities, evaluation of Audit data.
Learning outcomes:
After completion of this unit student will
 Learn about the process of environmental auditing.
 Understand procedures for preparation of environmental audit report

UNIT –V
Environmental Acts and Notifications
The Environmental protection Act, The water preservation Act, The Air (Prevention & Control
of pollution Act), Wild life Act - Provisions in the EIA notification, procedure for environmental
clearance, procedure for conducting environmental impact assessment report- Evaluation of
EIA report. Concept of ISO and ISO 14000.
Learning outcomes:
After completion of this unit student will
 Understand the importance of environmental protection acts
 Explain acts and notifications in Environmental legislation

CourseOutcomes (CO):
 To prepare EMP, EIS, and EIA report.
 To identify the risks and impacts of a project.
 To choose an appropriate EIA methodology.
 To evaluation the EIA report.
 To Estimate the cost benefit ratio of a project

262 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Textbooks:
1. Canter Larry W., “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw-Hill education Edi
(1996)
2. Y. Anjaneyulu, “Environmental Impact Assessment Methodologies”, B. S. Publication,
Hyderabad 2nd edition 2011
Reference Books:
1. Peavy, H. S, Rowe, “Environmental Engineering”, D. R, Tchobanoglous, G.Mc-Graw
Hill International Editions, New York 1985
2. J. Glynn and Gary W. Hein Ke, “Environmental Science and Engineering”, Prentice Hall
Publishers 1988
3. Suresh K. Dhaneja, S.K., “Environmental Science and Engineering”, Katania& Sons
Publication, ND

263 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech - VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(ME20AOE704) INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCT MARKETING
Pre-Requisite: Managerial Economics & Financial Analysis
Course Objectives:
● Introduce the basic concepts of Product marketing.
● Familiarize with market information systems and research.
● Understand the nature and importance of industrial market.
● Discuss the major stages in new product development.
● Identify the factors affecting pricing decisions.
UNIT – 1:
Historical development of marketing management, Definition of Marketing, Core marketing
concepts, Marketing Management philosophies, Micro and Macro Environment,
Characteristics affecting Consumer behaviour, Types of buying decisions, buying decision
process.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
● Understand the concepts of Marketing management, philosophies etc. (L2)
● Classification of consumer products, types of buying decisions. (L2)
UNIT – 2:
Components of marketing information system–benefits & uses marketing research system,
marketing research procedure, Demand Estimation research, Test marketing, Sales
forecasting: objective and subjective methods. Nature and importance of the Industrial
market, major factors influencing industrial buying behavior, characteristics of industrial
market demand.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
● Apply skills and techniques in designing data collection instruments including surveys.
(L3)
● Sales Forecast of objective and subjective methods to analyze market demand. (L4)

UNIT – 3:

264 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
The concept of a product, features of a product, classification of products, product policies –
product planning and development, product line, product mix – factors influencing change in
product mix, product mix strategies, meaning of “New – product; major stages in new –
product development product life cycle.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
● Demonstrate an understanding of fundamental concepts related to product and
branding. (L2)
● Evaluate new product and branding ideas. (L5)

UNIT – 4:
Importance of Price, pricing objectives, factors affecting pricing decisions, procedure for price
determination, kinds of pricing, pricing strategies and decisions Labeling: Types, functions
advantages and disadvantages, Packaging: Meaning, growth of packaging, function of
packaging, kinds of packaging.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
● Distinguish relevant from irrelevant costs when setting prices. (L3)
● Analyze competition for pricing decisions. (L3)

UNIT – 5:
Advertising and sales promotion: Objectives of advertisement, function of advertising,
classification of advertisement copy, advertisement media – kinds of media, advantages of
advertising. Objectives of sales promotion, advantages sales promotion. Personal Selling :
Objectives of personal selling, qualities of good salesman, types of salesman, major steps in
effective selling.

Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
● Understand the concepts of Advertisement and their classifications. (L2)
● Analyze a firm’s marketing and promotional situation. (L4)

Textbooks:
1. Philip Kotler, Principles of Marketing, Prentice – Hall.
2. Philip Kotler, Marketing Management, Prentice – Hall.

265 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Reference Books:
1. Wiliam J Stanton, Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw Hill
2. R.S.N. Pillai and Mrs.Bagavathi, Marketing, S. Chand & Co. Ltd.
3. Rajagopal, Marketing Management Text & Cases, Vikas Publishing House.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
● Understand basic marketing management concepts and their relevance to business
development. (L2)
● Prepare a questionnaire for market research. (L5)
● Design marketing research plan for business organizations. (L5)
● Optimize marketing mix to get competitive advantage. (L4)

266 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3

(EE20AOE703) IOT APPLICATIONS IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

(OPEN ELECTIVE)
COURSE OBJECTIVES
• To program Arduino to control lights, motors, and other devices.
• To learn Arduino's architecture, including inputs and connectors for add-on devices.
• To add third-party components such as LCDs, accelerometers, gyroscopes, and GPS
trackers to extend Arduino's functionality.
• To understand various options in programming languages, from C to drag-and-drop
languages.
• To test, debug, and deploy the Arduino to solve real world problems.
UNIT 1: Introduction to sensors
Transducers, Classification, Roles of sensors in IOT, Various types of sensors, Design of
sensors, sensor architecture, special requirements for IOT sensors, Role of actuators, types
of actuators.
UNIT 2: Hardware
Physical device – Arduino Interfaces, Hardware requirement for Arduino, Connecting
remotely over the network using VNC, GPIO Basics, Controlling GPIO Outputs Using a Web
Interface, – Programming, APIs / Packages- Quark SOC processor, programming, Arduino
Boards using GPIO (LED, LCD, Keypad, Motor control and sensor)
UNIT 3: Platforms
History - Creative Coding Platforms - Open Source Platforms – PIC - Arduino, Sketch,
Iterative coding methodology – Python Programming - Mobile phones and similar devices -
Arm Devices - Basic Electronics (circuit theory, measurements, parts identification) Sensors
and Software: Understanding Processing Code Structure, variables and flow control,
Interfacing to the Real World
Unit 4 Programming an Arduino IoT
Preparing the development environment (Arduino IDE), Exploring the Arduino language
(C/C++) syntax, Coding, compiling, and uploading to the microcontroller, Working with
Arduino Communication Modules: Bluetooth Modules, WiFi Modules and I2C and SPI,
Interfacing arduino and Blynk via USB : LED Blinking, Controlling a Servomotor.

Unit 5 DOMAIN SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS OF IoT

267 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Home automation, Industry applications, Surveillance applications, Other IoT applications –
Introduction to different IoT tools, Developing applications through IoT tools, Developing
sensor based application through embedded system platform – case studies: Soil moisture
monitoring, Weather monitoring, Air quality Monitoring, Movement Detection

TEXT BOOKS :
1.Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, ―Designing the Internet of Things‖, John Wiley
and Sons Ltd, UK, 2014.
2.Vijay Madisetti, Arshdeep Bahga, ―Internet of Things (A Hands-on Approach),
Universities Press, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Florian Michahelles, ―Architecting the Internet of
Things‖, Springer, New York, 2011.
2.John H. Davies, ―MSP430 Microcontroller Basics‖, First Edition, Newnes Publication.
2010.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Recall the basics of sensors, its functioning.
CO2: Execute basic and advanced assembly language programs.
CO3: Learn the ways to interface I/O devices with processor for task sharing.
CO4: Recall the basics of co-processor and its ways to handle float values by its instruction
set.
CO5: Apply the IOT technology in various fields.

268 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(AUTONOMOUS)

B.Tech- VII Sem L T P C

3 0 0 3

(AM20A0E701) Cyber Security Techniques

Course Objectives:
This course is designed to:

 Understand essential building blocks and basic concepts of cyber security

 Explore Web security and Network security
 Explain the measures for securing the network sand cloud
 Understand privacy principles and policies
 Describe the legal issues and ethics in computer security

UNITI

Introduction: Introduction to Computer Security, Threats, Harm, Vulnerabilities, Controls,

Authentication, Access Control, and Cryptography, Authentication, Access Control,
Cryptography.

Programs and Programming: Unintentional (Non-malicious) Programming Oversights,

Malicious Code—Malware, Countermeasures.

Learning Out comes:

AftercompletingthisUnit, studentswill beableto

 Explain Vulnerabilities, threats and. Counter measures for computer security[L2]

 Interpret the design of the malicious code [L2]

UNIT II

Web Security: User Side, Browser Attacks, Web Attacks Targeting Users, Obtaining User or
Website Data, Email Attacks. Operating Systems Security: Security in Operating Systems,
Security in the Design of Operating Systems, Rootkit.

LearningOutcomes:

AftercompletingthisUnit, studentswill beableto

 Outline the attacks on browser, Web and email. [L2]

 Explain the security aspects of Operating Systems. [L3]

269 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT III

Network Security: Network Concepts, Threatsto Network Communications, Wireless Network

Security, Denial of Service, Distributed Denial-of service Strategic Defenses:Security Counter
measures, Crypto graphy in Network Security, Firewalls, Intrusion Detection and Prevention
Systems, Network Management. Cloud Computing and Security: Cloud Computing Concepts,
Moving to the Cloud, Cloud Security Tools and Techniques, Cloud Identity Management,
SecuringIaaS.

LearningOutcomes:

AftercompletingthisUnit, studentswill beableto

 Identify the network securitythreatsand attacks.[L3]

 Design the Counter measures to defend the network security attacks.[L6]
 Analyze the security tools and techniques for Cloud computing[L4]

UNIT IV

Privacy: Privacy Concepts, Privacy Principles and Policies, Authentication and Privacy,
DataMining, Privacy on the Web, Email Security, Privacy Impacts of Emerging
Technologies,Where theFieldIs Headed.

ManagementandIncidents:Security Planning, Business Continuity Planning, Handling

Incidents, Risk Analysis,Dealing with Disaster.

Learning Outcomes:

AftercompletingthisUnit, studentswill beableto

 Interpret the need for Privacy and its impacts of Emerging Technologies.[L2]
 Explain how to handle incidents and deal with Disaster.[L2]

UNIT V

Legal Issues and Ethics: Protecting Programs and Data, Information and the Law, Rights
ofEmployees and Employers, Redress for Software Failures, Computer Crime, Ethical Issues
inComputer Security, Incident Analysis with Ethics, Emerging Topics: The Internet of
Things,Economics,ComputerizedElections,CyberWarfare.

LearningOutcomes:

AftercompletingthisUnit, studentswill beableto

 Adaptlegalissuesandethics incomputersecurity.[L6]
 ElaborateontheEmerging topics.[L6]

270 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Course Outcomes:

Uponcompletionofthe course,the studentsshouldbe able to:

 Illustrate the broad set of technical, social & political aspects of Cyber
Securityandsecuritymanagementmethodstomaintainsecurityprotection(L2)
 Assessthevulnerabilitiesandthreatsposedbycriminals,terroristandnationstatestonationali
nfrastructure(L5)
 Identifythenatureofsecuresoftwaredevelopmentandoperatingsystems(L3)
 Demonstratethe rolesecuritymanagementincybersecuritydefense(l2)
 Adaptthelegalandsocialissuesatplayindevelopingsolutions.(L6)

TextBooks:

1. Pfleeger,C.P.,SecurityinComputing,PrenticeHall,2010,5thedition.
2. Schneier,Bruce.AppliedCryptography, SecondEdition,JohnWiley&Sons,1996

ReferenceBooks:

1. Rhodes-Ousley, Mark. Information Security: The Complete Reference,

SecondEdition,Information Security Management: Concepts and Practice, McGraw-
Hill,2013.
2. Whitman, Michael E. and Herbert J. Mattord. Roadmap to Information Security for IT
and Info sec Managers.Boston, MA:Course Technology,2011.

271 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(AUTONOMOUS)

B. Tech – VII Sem L T P C

3 0 0 3

(CS20AOE601) Data Analysis Using R

Course Objectives:

 Understand the R Programming Language.

 Exposure on Solving of data science problems.
 Understand The Regression Model
Unit 1: INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTING

Installation of R , The basics of R syntax, workspace , Matrices and lists, Sub setting,
System-defined functions; the help system, Errors and warnings; coherence of the
workspace, Viewing and manipulating Data, Viewing and manipulating Data, Plotting
data, Reading the data from console, file (.csv) local disk and web, Working with larger
datasets

Unit 2: SHAPE OF DATA AND DESCRIBING RELATIONSHIPS

Tables, charts and plots, Univariate data, measures of central tendency, frequency
distributions, variation, and Shape Multivariate data, relationships between a
categorical and a continuous variable, Relationship between two continuous variables –
covariance, correlation coefficients, comparing multiple correlations, Visualization
methods – categorical and continuous variables, two categorical variables, two
continuous variables.

Unit 3: PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONS

Sampling from distributions – Binomial distribution, normal distribution, tTest, zTest,

Chi Square test, . Density functions, Data Visualization using ggplot – Box
plot,histograms, scatter plotter, line chart, bar chart, heat maps.

EXPLORATORY DATA ANALYSIS Demonstrate the range, summary, mean, variance,

median, standard deviation, histogram, box plot, scatter plot using population
dataset.

272 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Unit 4: TESTING HYPOTHESES

Null hypothesis significance testing, Testing the mean of one sample, Testing two means,
Linear models, Simple linear regression, Multiple regression, Bias-variance trade-off –
cross-validation

Unit 5: CORRELATION

How to calculate the correlation between two variables, How to make scatter plots, Use the
scatter plot to investigate the relationship between two variables, Perform tests of hypotheses
about the mean when the variance is known, Compute the p-value, . Explore the connection
between the critical region, the test statistic, and the p-value, Least Squares Estimates, The R
Function lm, scrutinizing the Residuals

Course Outcomes:

 Install and use R for simple programming tasks (L3).

 Extract data from files and other sources and perform various data manipulation
tasks on them (L3).
 Explore statistical functions in R (L4).
 Use R Graphics and Tables to visualize results of various statistical operations on data
(L3).
 Apply the knowledge of R gained to data Analytics for real-life applications (L3).

Reference Books:

1. SandipRakshit, “Statistics with R Programming”, McGraw Hill Education, 2018.

2. Gareth James, Daniela Witten, Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, “AN Introduction to
Statistical Learning: with Applications in R”, Springer Texts in Statistics, 2017.

3. Joseph Schmuller, “Statistical Analysis with R for Dummies”, Wiley, 2017.

4. K G Srinivasa, G M Siddesh, ChetanShetty, Sowmya B J, “Statistical Programming in R”,

Oxford Higher Education, 2017

Web References:

● http://www.r-bloggers.com/how-to-perform-a-logistic-regression-in-r/
● http://www.ats.ucla.edu/stat/r/dae/rreg.htm
● http://www.coastal.edu/kingw/statistics/R-tutorials/logistic.html
● http://www.ats.ucla.edu/stat/r/data/binary.csv

SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS:

SOFTWARE: R Software, R Studio Software

273 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(PH20AOE701) NANOMATERIALS
Course Objectives:
 To understand synthetic principles of Nanomaterials by various methods
 To characterize the synthetic nanomaterials by various instrumental methods
 To enumerate the applications of nanomaterials in engineering

Course Outcomes:
 Understand the state of art synthesis of nano materials
 Characterize nano materials using ion beam, scanning probe methodologies, position
sensitive atom probe and spectroscopic ellipsometry.
 Analyze nanoscale structure in metals, polymers and ceramics
 Analyze structure-property relationship in coarser scale structures
 Understand structures of carbon nano tubes

UNIT I
Introduction: Scope of nanoscience and nanotecnology, nanoscience in nature, classification
of nanostructured materials, importance of nano materials.
Synthetic Methods: Bottom-Up approach: Sol-gel synthesis, microemulsions or reverse
micelles, co-precipitation method, solvothermal synthesis, hydrothermal synthesis,
microwave heating synthesis and sonochemical synthesis.
UNIT II
Top-Down approach: Inert gas condensation, arc discharge method, aerosol synthesis,
plasma arc technique, ion sputtering, laser ablation, laser pyrolysis, and chemical vapour
deposition method, electrodeposition method, high energy ball milling.
UNIT III
Techniques for characterization: Diffraction technique, spectroscopy techniques, electron
microscopy techniques for the characterization of nanomaterials, BET method for surface
area analysis, dynamic light scattering for particle size determination.
UNIT IV
Studies of Nano-structured Materials: Synthesis, properties and applications of the following
nanomaterials, fullerenes, carbon nanotubes, core-shell nanoparticles, nanoshells, self-
assembled monolayers, and monolayer protected metal nanoparticles, nanocrystalline
materials, magnetic nanoparticles and important properties in relation to nanomagnetic
materials, thermoelectric materials, non-linear optical materials, liquid crystals.

274 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT V
Engineering Applications of Nanomaterials

Textbooks:
1. NANO: The Essentials: T Pradeep, MaGraw-Hill, 2007.
2. Textbook of Nanoscience and nanotechnology: B S Murty, P Shankar, BaldevRai, BB
Rath and James Murday, Univ. Press, 2012.

References:
1. Concepts of Nanochemistry; Ludovico Cademrtiri and Geoffrey A. Ozin& Geoffrey A.
Ozin, Wiley-VCH, 2011.
2. Nanostructures & Nanomaterials; Synthesis, Properties & Applications: Guozhong
Cao, Imperial College Press, 2007.
3. Nanomaterials Chemistry, C. N. R. Rao, Achim Muller, K.Cheetham, Wiley-VCH, 2007.

275 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(BA20AHS703) ENTREPRENEURSHIP & INCUBATION

Course Objectives:
 To make the student underst and about Entrepreneurship

 Toenable the student in knowing various sources of generating new ideas in setting
up of new enterprise

 To facilitate the student in knowing various sources off in acne in starting up of a

business

 To impart knowledge about various government sources which provide financial

assistance toentrepreneurs / women entrepreneurs?

 To encourage the student in creating and designing business plans

UNIT-I

Entrepreneurship-Concept, knowledge and skills requirement - Characteristics of

successfulentrepreneurs - Entrepreneurship process - Factors impacting emergence of
entrepreneurship -Differences between Entrepreneur and Intrapreneur - Understanding
individual entrepreneurial mindset and personality-Recent trends in Entrepreneurship.

Learning Outcomes:

AttheendiftheUnit, thelearnerswillbeableto

 Understandthe concept ofEntrepreneur andEntrepreneurshipinIndia

 KnowEntrepreneurshipprocessandemergenceofEntrepreneurship

 AnalyzethedifferencesbetweenEntrepreneurandIntrapreneur

 Developacreative mindsetandpersonality

 Understandrecenttrends inEntrepreneurshipacrosstheglobe

UNIT-II

Starting the New Venture - Generating business idea – Sources of new ideas & methods of
generating ideas-Opportunity recognition-Feasibility study-Marketfeasibility, technical /
operational feasibility - Financial feasibility - Drawing business plan – Preparingprojectreport-
Presentingbusinessplant investors.

LearningOutcomes:

Attheend of the Unit, thelearnerswillbeableto

 Knowtheprocessofstarting anewventure
276 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
  Analyzethesourcesofnewmethods ingeneratingbusinessidea

 Evaluatemarket feasibility,financialfeasibilityandtechnicalfeasibility

 Designanddrawbusinessplansinprojectpreparationandprepareprojectreports

UNIT-III

Sources of finance - Various sources of Finance available - Long term sources - Short
termsources - Institutional Finance – Commercial Banks, SFC's in India - NBFC's in India –
theirway of financing in India for small and medium business -Entrepreneurship
developmentprogramsinIndia-The entrepreneurial journey – Institutions in aid of
entrepreneurship development

LearningOutcomes:

Attheend of the Unit, thelearnerswillbeableto

 Knowthevarioussourcesoffinanceto start anewventure

 Contrast&comparebetweenLong term&Shorttermfinancesources

 Analyze the role of banks and other financial institutions inpromoting

entrepreneurship in India

 Evaluate the need and importance of MSMEs in the growth of country

UNIT-IV

Women Entrepreneurship - Entrepreneurship Development and Government - Role of

CentralGovernment and State Government in promoting women Entrepreneurship -
Introduction tovarious incentives, subsidies and grants – Export- oriented Units - Fiscal and
Tax concessions available-Womenentrepreneurship-Roleandimportance-Growth of women
entrepreneurship in India –Issues & Challenges –Entrepreneurialmotivations.

LearningOutcomes:

At the end of the Unit, the learners will be able to

 Understandtheroleofgovernmentinpromotingwomenentrepreneurship

 Knowvariousincentives,subsidiesandgrantsavailabletowomenentrepreneurs

 Analyzetheroleofexport-oriented units

 Knowaboutthetaxconcessionsavailablefor Womenentrepreneurs

 Preparetofacetheissuesandchallenges.

UNIT-V

Fundamentals of Business Incubation - Principles and good practices of business incubation-

Process of business incubation and the business incubator and how they operate and
influencethe Type/benefits of incubators - Corporate/educational / institutional incubators –

277 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Broaderbusiness incubation environment - Pre-Incubation and Post - Incubation process -
Idea lab,Businessplanstructure –Valueproposition

CourseOutcomes:

At theend ofthecourse,students will be ableto

 Understand the concept of Entrepreneurship and challenges in the world of

Competition.

 Apply the Knowledge in generating ideas for New Ventures.

 Analyze various sources off in ance and subsidies to entrepreneur / women

Entrepreneurs.

 Evaluate the role of central government and state government inpromoting

Entrepreneurship.

 Create and design business plan structure through incubations.

Textbooks:

 D F Kuratko and T V Rao, “Entrepreneurship” - A South-Asian Perspective –

CengageLearning, 2012. (For PPT, Case Solutions Facultymay
visit:login.cengage.com)

 NandanH, “FundamentalsofEntrepreneurship”,PHI,2013

References:

 VasantDesai,“SmallScaleIndustries andEntrepreneurship”, HimalayaPublishing2012.

 RajeevRoy“Entrepreneurship”, 2ndEdition,Oxford, 2012.

 B.JanakiramandM.Rizwana“EntrepreneurshipDevelopment: Text&Cases”,Excel Books,

2011.

 Stuart Read, Effectual“Entrepreneurship”,Routledge, 2013.

E-RESOURCES

 Entrepreneurship-Through-the-Lens-of-VentureCapital

 http://www.onlinevideolecture.com/?course=mba-
programs&subject=entrepreneurship

 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/122106032/Pdf/7_4.pd

278 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(BA20AHS704) ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING

Course Objectives:
 To provide a contemporary and forward-looking on the theory and practice of
Enterprise Resource Planning

 To enable the students in knowing the Advantages of ERP

 To train the students to develop the basic understanding of how ERP enriches the

 Business organizations in achieving a multi-dimensional growth.

 Impart knowledge about the historical back ground of BPR

 Toaimatpreparingthestudents,technologicallycompetitiveandmakethemreadytoself-
upgradewiththehighertechnicalskills

UNIT-I

Introduction to ERP: Enterprise–An Overview Integrated Management Information,

Business Modeling, Integrated Data Model Business Processing Reengineering(BPR), Data
Warehousing, Data Mining, On-line Analytical Processing (OLAP), Supply Chain
Management(SCM), Customer Relationship Management(CRM)

UNIT-II

Benefits of ERP: Reduction of Lead-Time, On-time Shipment, Reduction in Cycle Time,

Improved Resource Utilization, Better Customer Satisfaction, Improved Supplier
Performance, Increased Flexibility, Reduced Quality Costs, Improved Information Accuracy
and Design-making Capability

UNIT-III

ERP Implementation Lifecycle :Pre-evaluation Screening, Package Evaluation, Project

Planning Phase, Gap Analysis, Reengineering, Configuration, Implementation Team Training,
Testing, Going Live,End-userTraining,Post-implementation(Maintenance mode)

279 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT-IV

BPR: Historical background: Nature, significance and rationale of business process

reengineering (BPR), Fundamentals of BPR. Major issues in process redesign: Business vision
and process objectives, Processes to be redesigned, Measuring existing processes

UNIT-V

IT in ERP: Role of information technology (IT) and identifying IT levers. Designing and
building aprototype of the new process: BPR phases, Relationship between BPR phases. MIS–
Management Information System, DSS-Decision Support System, EIS- Executive Information
System

CourseOutcomes:

 UnderstandthebasicuseofERPPackageandits roleinintegratingbusinessfunctions.

 ExplainthechallengesofERPsystemintheorganization

 ApplytheknowledgeinimplementingERPsystemforbusiness

 EvaluatetheroleofITintakingdecisions withMIS

 Createreengineeredbusinessprocesses withprocessredesign

Textbooks:

 PankajSharma. “EnterpriseResourcePlanning”.AphPublishingCorporation,New Delhi,

2004.

 AlexisLeon, “Enterprise Resource Planning”, IVEdition,Mc.GrawHill,2019

References:

 MarianneBradford“ModernERP”, 3rdedition.

 “ERP making it happen Thomas F. Wallace and Michael

 Directing the ERP Implementation Michael wpelphrey

280 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(BA20AHS705) MANAGEMENT SCIENCE

Course Objectives:
 To provide fundamental knowledge on Management, Administration, Organization &
its concepts.

 To make the students understand the role of management in Production

 To impart the concept of HR Min order to have an idea on Recruitment, Selection,

Training & Development, job evaluation and Merit rating concepts

 To create awareness on identify Strategic Management areas & the PERT/CPM for
better Project Management

 To make the students aware of the contemporary issues in management

UNIT-I

INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT:

Management- Concept and meaning- Nature- Functions-Management as a Science and Art

and both. Schools of Management Thought - Taylor’s Scientific Theory-Henry Fayol’s
principles –EltanMayo’s Human relations - Systems Theory - Organisational Designs - Line
organization - Line &StaffOrganization-FunctionalOrganization-MatrixOrganization-Project
Organization-Committeeform of Organization – Social responsibilities of Management.
UNIT-II

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT– Principles and Types of Plant Layout - Methods of

Production (Job, batch and Mass Production),Work Study - Statistical Quality Control-
Deming‘s contribution to Quality. Material Management -Objectives - Inventory-Functions -
Types, Inventory Techniques - EOQ-ABC Analysis – Purchase Procedureand Stores
Management-MarketingManagement-Concept-Meaning-Nature-Functionsof Marketing -
Marketing Mix- Channels of Distribution –Advertisement and Sales Promotion-Marketing
Strategies based on Product Life Cycle.

UNIT-III

HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT(HRM)– HRM - Definition and Meaning – Nature -

Managerial and Operative functions - Evolution of HRM -Job Analysis - Human Resource
Planning(HRP) - Employee Recruitment-Sources of Recruitment –Employee Selection-Process
and Tests in Employee Selection-Employee Training and Development-On-the-job& Off-the-

281 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
job training methods-Performance Appraisal Concept-Methods of Performance Appraisal–
Placement-Employee Induction-Wage and Salary Administration

UNIT-IV

STRATEGIC&PROJECT MANAGEMENT: Differences between Leader & Manager -

Leadership – Leadership styles Leadership theories – Managerial Grid – Transactional Vs
Transformational Leadership – Qualities of a good leader- Women Leadership in India.

UNIT-V

CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN MANAGEMENT –The concept of Management Information

System(MIS) - Materials Requirement Planning (MRP) -Customer Relations
Management(CRM) - Total Quality Management (TQM) - Six Sigma Concept –Supply Chain
Management(SCM)-Enterprise Resource Planning(ERP)-Performance Management- Business
Process Outsourcing (BPO) - Business Process Re-engineering and Bench Marking –Balanced
Score Card -Knowledge Management.

Course Outcomes:

 Understand the concepts &principles of management and designs of organization in a

practical world

 Apply the knowledge of Work-study principles & Quality Control techniques in industry

 Analyze the concepts of HR Min Recruitment, Selection and Training& Development.

 Evaluate PERT/CPM Techniques for projects of an enterprise and estimate time &cost
of project & to analyze the business through SWOT.

 Create Modern technology in management science.

Textbooks:

 A.R.Aryasri,“Management Science”, TMH,2013

 Stoner,Freeman,Gilbert, Management,PearsonEducation, NewDelhi,2012.

References:

 Koontz&Weihrich, “EssentialsofManagement”, 6thedition, TMH, 2005.

 ThomasN.Duening&JohnM.Ivancevich,“ManagementPrinciplesandGuidelines”,Biztantra
KanishkaBedi, “Production and Operations Management”, oxford University Press,
2004.

 SamuelC.Certo, “ModernManagement”, 9thedition,PHI,2005

282 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech- VII Sem L T P C
1 0 2 2
(EC20ASC701) IOT AND INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
Course Objectives:
1. Introduce the fundamental concepts of IoT and physical computing
2. Expose the student to a variety of embedded boards and IoT Platforms
3. Create a basic understanding of the communication protocols in IoT communications.
4. Familiarize the student with application program interfaces for IoT.
5. Enable student’s to create simple IoT applications.
UNIT-I
Overview of IoT:

The Internet of Things: An Overview, The Flavour of the Internet of Things, The
“Internet”of “Things”, The Technology of the Internet of Things, Enchanted Objects, Who is
Making the Internet of Things?

DesignPrinciplesforConnectedDevices: Calm and Ambient Technology, Privacy, Web

Thinking for Connected Devices, Affordances.

Prototyping: Sketching,Familiarity,Costs Vs Ease of Prototyping,Prototypes and

Production, Open source Vs Close source, Tapping into the community.

• Explain IoT architecture.[L2]

• Interpret the design principles that govern connected devices[L2]
UNIT-II
Embedded Devices:

Electronics, Embedded Computing Basics, Arduino, RaspberryPi, Mobile phones and tablets,
Plug Computing: Always-on Internet of Things

• Explain the basics of microcontrollers [L2]

• Outline the architecture of Arduino [L2]
UNIT-III
Communication in the IoT:
InternetCommunications: An Overview, IP Addresses, MAC Addresses, TCP and UDP Ports,
Application Layer Protocols

Prototyping Online Components:

GettingStartedwithanAPI, Writing a NewAPI,Real-Time Reactions,Other ProtocolsProtocol

• Interpret different protocols and compare them [L2]

• Select which protocol can be used for a specific application [L3]

Practice Exercises:
Any 10 experiments are to be done (Any Software 6 +4 Hardware)
283 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
1. Data acquisition using MyDAQ. Select any one development board (Eg., Arduino or
Raspberry Pi) and control LED using the board.
2. Using the same board as in (1), read data from a sensor. Experiment with both analog
and digital sensors.
3. Control any two actuators connected to the development board using Bluetooth.
4. Read data from sensor and send it to a requesting client. (using socket communication)
Note: The client and server should be connected to same local area network.
5. Create any cloud platform account, explore IoT services and register a thing on the
platform. Push sensor data to cloud.
6. Control an actuator through cloud.
7. Accesses the data pushed from sensor to cloud and apply any data analytics or
visualization services.
8. Create a mobile app to control an actuator.
9. Design an IoT based air pollution control system which monitors the air pollution by
measuring carbon monoxide, ammonia, etc and gives alarm or sends message when the
pollution level is more than permitted range.
10. Design an IoT based system which measures the physical and chemical properties of the
water and displays the measured values.
11. Identify a problem in your local area or college which can be solved by integrating the
things you learned and create a prototype to solve it (Mini Project).
12. Design a business model canvas for a digital display
Course outcomes:

CO1: Choosethe sensors and actuators foranIoT application (L1)

CO2: Select protocols foraspecificIoT application (L2)
CO3: Utilizethe cloud platform and APIsforIoTapplications (L3)
CO4: Experiment with embedded boards for creatingIoT prototypes (L3)
CO5: Design a solution foragivenIoT application (L6)

Text Books:
1. Adrian McEwen, Hakim Cassimally- Designing the Internet of Things, WileyPublications, 2012.
2. Alexander Osterwalder, and Yves Pigneur – Business Model Generation – Wiley, 2011.

ReferenceBooks:
1. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti- Internet of Things: A Hands-On Approach, Universities
Press, 2014.
2. TheInternetofThings,Enablingtechnologiesandusecases–PethuruRaj,AnupamaC.Raman,
CRC Press.
Referencesites:

1. https://www.arduino.cc/
2. https://www.raspberrypi.org/
284 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- V Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20AOE501) BASIC VLSI DESIGN

Course Objectives:
1. Learn about the various processing steps involved in the fabrication of a nMOS,
pMOS and CMOS transistors.
2. Learn about the various Design rules and Layout of MOS transistors.
3. Enable the students to learn about the Scaling Models and Scaling factors of MOS
transistors.
4. Study the various examples of structured design.
5. Learn about the Testing concepts in VLSI Chip design.

Unit I
Review of Microelectronics and Introduction to MOS technology:
The IC era, Basic MOS transistors- Enhancement mode and Depletion mode transistor
action, nMOS fabrication, CMOS fabrication-P-Well, N-Well and Twin-tub process, Drain-
to-Source Current versus Voltage VDS relationships, MOS transconductance, output
conductance and Figure of Merit.

Unit II
MOS circuits and Design process:
The Pass transistor, nMOS inverter, Pull-up to Pull-down ratio of different cases, CMOS
inverter and Latch-up in CMOS circuits, MOS layers, Stick diagrams-nMOS and CMOS
design styles, Design rules and Layout- Lambda-based design rules, Contact cuts.

Unit III
Circuit Concepts and Scaling of MOS circuits:
Sheet resistance concept, Area Capacitance of layers and calculations, The Delay unit,
Inverter delay, Driving large capacitance loads, Propagation delays and Wiring
capacitances, Scaling Models and Scaling factors, Scaling factors for various device
parameters and its summary.
Unit IV
Subsystem Design:
Architectural issues, Switch logic, Gate restoring logic-The inverter, Two-input nMOS,
CMOS and BiCMOS NAND and NOR gates and Other forms of CMOS logic.
285 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit V
Test and Testability:
System partitioning, Layout and Testability, Reset/Initialization, Design for Testability,
Testing Combinational Logic and Sequential Logic, Practical Design for Test guidelines,
Scan Design Techniques and Built-In-Self-Test (BIST).

Text Books:
1. K.Eshraghian, D.A. Pucknell and S.Eshraghian, “Essentials of VLSI Circuits and
Systems”, Third Edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2019.
2. W.Wolf “Modern VLSI Design IP based design” Fourth edition, PHI Learning Pvt.
Ltd., 2020.
References:
1. Mead, C.A and Conway, L.A., “Introduction to VLSI Systems”, Addison –Wesley,
USA, 1980.
2. Neil H. E. Weste & D.M.Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design-A Circuits and Systems
Perspective”, Fourth edition, Pearson Edition, 2020.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Outline the processing steps in the fabrication of a nMOS, pMOS and CMOS
structure.
CO2: Illustrate the Layout procedure of simple MOS circuit using Lambda based design
rules.
CO3: Summarize the scaling effects of various key parameters of MOSFET devices.
CO4: Design various MOS based logic circuits.
CO5: Develop algorithms for automatic test generation for combinational and sequential
circuits.

286 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

L T P C
B. Tech- V Sem
3 0 0 3
(EC20AOE502) DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
Course Objectives:
1. To introduce basic postulates of Boolean algebra and the methods for simplifying
Boolean expressions
2. To learn about Gate Minimization techniques.
3. To illustrate the concepts and study the procedures for the analysis and design of
Combinational circuits.
4. To study the procedures for the analysis and design of Sequential circuits.
5. To introduce the concepts of programmable logic devices.

UNIT I
Number System & Boolean Algebra:
Digital Systems, Binary Numbers, Number base conversions, Complements of numbers,
Signed binary numbers, Binary codes.
Boolean Algebra-Basic definition, Basic theorems and properties, Boolean Functions,
Canonical & Standard forms, other logic operations & Logic gates.

UNIT II
Gate Level Minimization:
The map method, four variable & Five variable K-map, POS & SOP Simplification, Don’t care
conditions, NAND & NOR Implementation, Other two level Implementation, Ex-or Function,
Tabular Method- Simplification of Boolean function using tabulation Method.

UNIT III
Combinational Logic Circuits:
Combinational circuits, Analysis & Design procedure, Binary Adder-Subtractor, Decimal
Adder, Binary Multiplier, Magnitude comparator, Decoder, Encoders, Multiplexers.

UNIT IV
Sequential Logic Circuits:
Sequential Circuits, Latches, Flips-Flops - RS, JK, Master-Slave JK, D & T flip flops, Analysis
of Clocked sequential circuits, State Reduction & Assignment, Design procedure, Registers &

287 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Counters – Registers, Shift Registers, Ripple Counters, Synchronous counters, and
Asynchronous counters.

UNIT V
Programmable Devices:
Memory organization, classification of semiconductor memories, ROM, PROM, DROM, EPROM,
EEPROM, RAM, expansion of memory, CCD, Flash memories, content addressable memory
and Programmable logic devices-PROM, Programmable logic array (PLA) and Programmable
array logic (PAL), field programmable gate array (FPGA).

Text Books:
1. M.Morris Mano & Michel D. Ciletti, “Digital Design”, 5th Edition, Pearson education.
2. Zvi Kohavi and Nirah K.Jha, “Switching theory and Finite Automata Theory”, 3 rd Edition
Cambridge.

References:
1. Subratha Goshal, “Digital Electronics”, Cambridge Publishers.
2. Comer, “Digital & State Machine Design”, Third Indian edition, OXFORD publishers.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Apply basic postulates of Boolean Algebra in the design of design systems.
CO2: Design digital logic circuits using K-Map minimization technique.
CO3: Develop an Arithmetic Logic Unit using different Combinational circuits.
CO4: Design Sequential circuits.
CO5: Compare various Programmable logic devices.

288 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VI Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3

(EC20AOE601) ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION & MEASUREMENTS

Course Objectives:

1. To understand various measurement metrics for performance analysis and basic

principles of various measurements like voltage, current, Resistance
2. To familiarize the characteristics, operations, calibrations and applications of the
different oscilloscopes.
3. To explain principles of operation and working of different electronic instruments
like signal generators, wave analyzers etc.
4. Understand the basic principle of various DC/AC bridges for the measurement of
unknown passive elements like R, L and C.
5. To provide exposure to working principles of different sensors and transducers.

UNIT-I
Performance characteristics of Instruments: Static characteristics, Accuracy, Precision,
Resolution, Sensitivity, static and dynamic calibration, Errors in Measurement, and their
statistical analysis, dynamic characteristics-speed of Response, fidelity, Lag and dynamic
error. DC ammeters, DC voltmeters-multirange, range extension/solid state and differential
voltmeters, AC voltmeters –multirange, range extension. Thermocouple type RF ammeter,
ohm meters, series type, shunt type, multimeter for voltage, current and resistance
measurements.
Learning Outcomes:
 Define different terms used for characterizing the performance of an
instrument/measurement system (L1)
 Understand the principle of operation of various meters (L1)
UNIT-II
Oscilloscopes-I: Standard specifications of CRO,CRT features, vertical and horizontal
amplifiers, horizontal and vertical deflection systems, sweep trigger pulse, delay line, sync
selector circuits, probes for CRO – active, passive, and attenuator type,
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand the basic blocks of analog CROs (L1)
 Measure amplitude and frequency utilizing oscilloscopes (L2)

289 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT-III
Oscilloscopes-II: Dual trace/beam CRO, Principles of sampling oscilloscope, storage
oscilloscope, and digital storage oscilloscope, Digital frequency counters, time & Period
measurements.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand the basic blocks of digital CROs (L1)
 Measure amplitude and frequency utilizing oscilloscopes (L2)

UNIT-IV
Signal generators & Analyzers: Specifications & principles of working (Block diagram
approach) Signal generators-fixed and variable, AF oscillators, function generators, pulse,
random noise, sweep, and Wave analyzers, Harmonic distortion analyzers, Spectrum
analyzers.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand the basic principle of various signal generators and analyzers (L1)
 Describe characteristics of signal generators and analyzers (L2)
UNIT-V
Review of DC Bridges: Wheatstone bridge, Kelvin Bridge, errors and precautions in using
bridges.
AC bridges: Measurement of inductance-Maxwell’s bridge, Anderson Bridge. Measurement
of capacitance- Schering Bridge. Measurement of frequency- Wein Bridge, Q-meter.

Learning Outcomes:
 Understand principles of measurements associated with different DC/AC bridges(L2)
 Ability to derive balance condition of various bridges to find unknown values (L2)

TEXT BOOKS:
1. A.D. Helfrick and W.D. Cooper, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and
th
Measurement Techniques”, PHI, 5 Edition,2002.
2. H.S.Kalsi, “Electronic instrumentation”, second edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.
3. K. Lal Kishore, “Electronic Measurements & Instrumentations”, Pearson
Education,2009.

290 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
REFERENCES:
1. Robert A. Witte, “Electronic Test Instruments, Analog and Digital
Measurements”, Pearson Education, 2nd Ed., 2004.
2. David A. Bell, “Electronic Instrumentation & Measurements”, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2003.

Course Outcomes:
CO 1: Describe the basic principles involved in the meters for measuring voltage, current,
resistance and frequency (L2).
CO 2: Analyze CRO for measuring signal characteristics (L4).
CO3: Analyze different waveforms using advanced instruments such as signal generators,
logic analyzer & Spectrum analyzer (L4).
CO4: Apply the principles of various DC/AC bridges to solve various measurement
parameters (L3).
CO5: Analyze various parameters using sensors and transducers (L4).

291 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VI Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20AOE602) SIGNAL PROCESSING

Course Objectives:
1. To introduce students to the basic idea of signal and system analysis and its
characterization in time and frequency domains.
2. To present Fourier tools through the analogy between vectors and signals.
3. To teach concept of sampling and reconstruction of signals.
4. To analyze characteristics of linear systems in time and frequency domains.
5. To understand Laplace and z-transforms as mathematical tool to analyze continuous and
discrete-time signals and systems.

UNIT I
SIGNALS & SYSTEMS:
Definition and classification of Signal and Systems (Continuous time and Discrete time),
Elementary signals such as Dirac delta, unit step, ramp, sinusoidal and exponential and
operations on signals. Analogy between vectors and signals-orthogonality-Mean Square
error-Fourier series: Trigonometric & Exponential and concept of discrete spectrum

UNIT II
CONTINUOUS TIME FOURIER TRANSFORM:
Definition, Computation and properties of Fourier Transform for different types of signals.
Statement and proof of sampling theorem of low pass signals.

UNIT III
SIGNAL TRANSMISSION THROUGH LINEAR SYSTEMS:
Linear system, impulse response, Response of a linear system, linear time-invariant (LTI)
system, linear time variant (LTV) system, Transfer function of a LTI system. Filter
characteristics of linear systems. Distortion less transmission through a system, Signal
bandwidth, system bandwidth, Ideal LPF, HPF and BPF characteristics, Causality and Poly-
Wiener criterion for physical realization, Relationship between bandwidth and rise time.
Energy and Power Spectral Densities

UNIT IV
DISCRETE TIME FOURIER TRANSFORM:

292 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Definition, Computation and properties of Fourier Transform for different types of signals.

UNIT V
LAPLACE TRANSFORM:
Definition-ROC-Properties-Inverse Laplace transforms-the S-plane and BIBO stability-
Transfer functions-System Response to standard signals-Solution of differential equations
with initial conditions.

The Z–TRANSFORM: Derivation and definition-ROC-Properties- Inverse Z-Transform-System

analysis-Transfer function-BIBO stability-System.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. B. P. Lathi, “Linear Systems and Signals”, Second Edition, Oxford University press.
2. A.V. Oppenheim, A.S. Willsky and S.H. Nawab, “Signals and Systems”, Pearson, 2 nd
Edition.
3. A. Ramakrishna Rao, “Signals and Systems”, 2008, TMH.

REFERENCES:
1. Simon Haykin and Van Veen, “Signals & Systems”, Wiley, 2 nd Edition.
2. B.P. Lathi, “Signals, Systems & Communications”, 2009,BS Publications.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Understand the mathematical description and representation of continuous-time and
discrete-time signals and systems. Also understand the concepts of various transform
techniques.
CO2: Apply sampling theorem to convert continuous-time signals to discrete-time signals
and reconstruct back, different transform techniques to solve signals and system
related problems.
CO3: Analyze the frequency spectra of various continuous-time signals using different
transform methods.
CO4: Analyze the systems based on their properties and determine the response of them.
CO5: Analyze the frequency spectra of various discrete-time signals using different
transform methods.

293 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech-VII Sem L T PC
3 0 0 3
(EC20AOE701) IC APPLICATIONS

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the basic building blocks of Opamp

2. To explain linear and nonlinear applications of opamp
3. To introduce the concept of IC 555 and PLL
4. To study working principle of data converters
5. To illustrate combinational & sequential circuits

UNIT I:
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Introduction, Classification of ICs, Ideal and Practical Op-Amp, Op-amp characteristics-DC
and AC Characteristics. 741 Op-Amp and its Features, Modes of operation-inverting, non-
inverting, differential.
Linear Applications of Op-Amp, adder ,subtractor, AC Amplifier, V to I and I to V Converters,
Differentiators and Integrators.

Learning outcomes:
1. Understand ideal and practical Op-Amps (L2)
2. Understand internal blocks and characteristics of Op-Amp (L2)

UNIT II:
OSCILLATORS& WAVEFORM GENERATORS
Comparators, Schmitt Trigger. Multivibrators-Astable and monostable Principle of Operation
and Types of Oscillators – RC, Wien Bridge.
Waveform Generators - Triangular. Saw Tooth, Square Wave.
Learning outcomes:
1. Illustrate the applications using Op-Amp (L3)
2. Demonstrate waveform generators using Op-Amp (L3)

294 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT III:
TIMERS & PHASE LOCKED LOOPS
Introduction to 555 Timer, Functional Diagram, Monostable and Astable Operations and
Applications, Schmitt Trigger, PLL- Introduction, Block Schematic, Principles and Description
of individual Blocks of 565.

Learning outcomes:
1. Describe internal circuit operation of 555 timer (L2)
2. Illustrate the concept of PLL (L3)

UNIT IV:
D-A AND A- D CONVERTERS
Introduction, Basic DAC Techniques - Weighted Resistor Type. R-2R Ladder Type, inverted R-
2R Type. Different types of ADCs - Parallel Comparator Type. Counter Type. Successive
Approximation Register Type and Dual Slope Type DAC and ADC Specifications.

Learning outcomes:
1. Explain operation principles of different A/D & D/A converters (L2)
2. Demonstrate different types of A /D & D/A converter circuits (L3)

UNIT V:
COMBINATIONAL & SEQUENTIAL LOGIC DESIGN
COMBINATIONAL CIRCUIT ICs: Use of TTL-74XX Series–Logic gates using 74XX ICs,
adders, Comparator, multiplexers, encoders, Decoders, Demultiplexers, Priority Encoders(Pin
Diagram, Function table)
SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT ICs: Commonly Available 74XX ICs –Latches, Flip flops- RS, JK, D
and T-Type Flip-Flops, Binary counter, Decade counter. Shift Registers & applications.

Learning outcomes:
1. Describe internal circuit operation of different Combinational I Cs( L2)
2. Demonstrate Sequential circuits using 74XX ICs (L3)

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Linear Integrated Circuits -D. Roy Chowdhury, New Age International (p)Ltd, 3rd Ed.,
2008.
2. Wakerly J.F. Digital Design: Principles and Practices, 4 th Edition, Pearson India, 2008.

295 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. R. P. Jain, Modern Digital Electronics, McGraw Hill Education (India Private Limited), 4 th
edition, 2012.
2. Op-Amps & Linear ICs - Ramakanth A. Gayakwad, PHI, 1987.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Understand the basic building blocks of Op-Amp.
CO2: Illustrate waveform generators and oscillators using Op-Amp.
CO3: Analyze concept of 555 timer and PLL.
CO4: Analyze the operation & characteristics of data converters.
CO5: Study the design of various 74XX ICs, Combinational & sequential.

296 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech-VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3

(EC20AOE702) PRINCIPLES OF COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

Course Objectives:
1. To understand the concept of various modulation schemes and multiplexing.
2. To apply the concept of various modulation schemes to solve engineering problems.
3. To analyze various modulation schemes.
4. To evaluate various modulation scheme in real time applications.

UNIT I
Amplitude Modulation
Introduction, An overview of Electronic Communication Systems. Need for Frequency
Translation, classification of modulation schemes, Amplitude Modulation: DSB-FC, DSB-
SC, SSB-SC and VSB, Modulators and demodulators. The Superheterodyne Receiver.
UNIT II
Angle Modulation
Basic definitions, Frequency Modulation: Narrow Band FM, Wide Band FM, Transmission
bandwidth of FM Signals, Generation of FM Signals, Demodulation of FM Signals, FM
Stereo Multiplexing, Phase modulation, AM vs PM.

UNIT III
Pulse Modulation
Sampling Theorem, Quantization, Pulse Amplitude Modulation, Pulse Width Modulation,
Pulse position modulation, Pulse code modulation.
Concept of Time Division Multiplexing, Frequency Division Multiplexing.

UNIT IV
Digital Modulation
Digital Representation of Analog Signals. Phase shift keying-Binary Amplitude Shift
Keying, Binary Phase Shift Keying ,Differential phase shift keying, and Quadrature
Phase Shift Keying, Frequency Shift Keying— Comparison.

UNIT V
MULTI-USER RADIO COMMUNICATION
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM),Mobile &Cellular communication
297 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Concept – Overview of Multiple Access Schemes – Code division multiple access (CDMA)
,Frequency division multiple access (FDMA),Satellite Communication – Bluetooth.(Block
diagram approach only).

Note: The main emphasis is on qualitative treatment. Complex mathematical

treatment may be avoided.

Textbooks:
1. Herbert Taub, Donald L Schilling and Goutam Saha, “Principles of
Communication Systems”, 3rdEdition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd.,
2008.
2. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2004

References:
1. B. P. Lathi, Zhi Ding and Hari M. Gupta, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication
Systems”, 4th Edition, Oxford University Press, 2017.
2. K. Sam Shanmugam “Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, Wiley India
Edition, 2008.
3. Martin S.Roden, “Analog and Digital Communication System”, 3 rd Edition, Prentice
Hall of India, 2002.

Course Outcomes:
CO1. Analyze and design of various continuous wave modulation and demodulation
techniques.
CO2. Attain the knowledge about angle modulation and FM Transmitters and
Receivers.
CO3. Analyze and design the various Pulse Modulation Techniques.
CO4. Understand the concepts of Digital Modulation Techniques and Baseband
transmission.
CO5.Comprehend the principles of radio communication systems like GSM.CDMA,
Bluetooth, Mobile and satellite communications etc.,

298 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20AOE703) SENSORS AND SYSTEMS

Course Objectives:
1. To learn about the characterization of sensors.
2. To understand about the working of Electromechanical, Thermal, Magnetic and radiation
sensors
3. To understand the concepts of Electro analytic and smart sensors.
4. To learn about the various characteristics of radiation sensors.
5. To learn about the usage of different sensors in various real time applications.

UNIT I
Sensors / Transducers:
Principles, Classification, Parameters, Characteristics, Environmental Parameters (EP),
Characterization Electromechanical Sensors: Introduction, Resistive Potentiometer, Strain
Gauge, Resistance Strain Gauge, Semiconductor Strain Gauges -Inductive Sensors:
Sensitivity and Linearity of the Sensor -Types-Capacitive Sensors: Electrostatic Transducer,
Force/Stress Sensors Using Quartz Resonators, Ultrasonic Sensors.

UNIT II
Thermal Sensors-I:
Introduction ,Gas thermometric Sensors ,Thermal Expansion Type Thermometric Sensors
,Acoustic Temperature Sensor ,Dielectric Constant and Refractive Index thermo sensors
,Helium Low Temperature Thermometer ,Nuclear Thermometer and Magnetic Thermometer.

UNIT III
Magnetic sensors:
Introduction, Sensors and the Principles Behind, Magneto-resistive Sensors, Anisotropic
Magneto resistive Sensing, Semiconductor Magneto resistors, Hall Effect and Sensors,
Inductance and Eddy Current Sensors, Angular/Rotary Movement Transducers and Synchros.

UNIT IV
Radiation Sensors:

299 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Introduction, Basic Characteristics, Types of Photo resistors/ Photo detectors, X-ray and
Nuclear Radiation Sensors, Fiber Optic Sensors Electro analytical Sensors: The
Electrochemical Cell, The Cell Potential – Standard Hydrogen Electrode (SHE), Liquid Junction
and Other Potentials, Polarization, Concentration Polarization, Reference Electrodes, Sensor
Electrodes, Electro ceramics in Gas Media.

UNIT V
Smart Sensors:
Introduction, Primary Sensors, Excitation, Amplification, Filters, Converters, Compensation,
Information Coding/Processing – Data Communication, Standards for Smart Sensor
Interface, the Automation Sensors -Applications: Introduction, On-board Automobile Sensors
(Automotive Sensors), Home Appliance Sensors, Aerospace Sensors, Sensors for
Manufacturing and Environmental Monitoring.

Text Books:
1. Sensors and Actuators, D. Patranabis, 2 nd Ed., PHI, 2013.
2. Introduction to sensors- John Veteline, Aravindraghu, CRC press, 2011.
References:
1. Sensors handbook- Sabrie soloman, 2nd Ed. TMH, 2009
2.Make sensors: Terokarvinen, kemo, karvinen and Villey valtokari, 1 st edition, maker media,
2014.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Understand Classification and Characterization of Sensors.
CO2: Explore the working of Electromechanical, Thermal, Magnetic, radiation and Electro
analytic sensors.
CO3: Analyze and Model various losses occurring in Magnetic sensors.
CO4: Compare the working performance of various radiation sensors.
CO5:Design a complete system for monitoring of environmental parameters.

300 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VII Sem L T P C
3 0 0 3
(EC20AOE704) INTERNET OF THINGS

Course Objectives:
1. Understand IOT design requirements.
2. Understand various technologies and protocols.
3. Understand storage and intelligent analytics.
4. Analyze security requirements along with threat model.
5. Create and Design various applications.

UNIT 1
Introduction to IoT: Architectural overview, Design principles and needed
capabilities, IoT Applications, Sensing, Actuation, Basics of Networking, M2M and IoT
Technology Fundamentals- Devices and gateways, Data management, Business processes in
IoT, Role of cloud in IoT.

UNIT II
Elements of IoT: Hardware components – computing (Arduino, Raspberry Pi),
communication, Sensing, Actuation, I/O interfaces Software Components- Programming APIs
(Using Python/Arduino) for communication protocols-MQTT, Zigbee, Bluetooth, CoAP, UDP
and TCP.

UNIT III
Sensing and Actuation: Definition of Sensor, Sensor features, Resolution, Classes,
Different types of sensors, Actuator, Different types of Actuators, purpose of Sensors and
Actuators in IoT.

UNIT IV
IoT Application Development: Solution frame work for IoT Applications-Implementation of
Device integration, Data acquisition and Integration, Device data storage on
cloud/local server, Authentication, authorization of Devices.

301 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT V
IoT Case Studies: IoT Case studies and mini projects based on industrial Automation,
Transportation, Agriculture, Healthcare and Home Automation.

Textbooks:
1. Vijay Madisetti, Arshdeep Bahga, “Internet of Things a Hands-On- Approach”,2014.
2. Dr SRN Reddy, Rachit Thukral and Manasi Mishra ,” Introduction to Internet of Things”: A
practical Approach” ETI Labs

References:
1. Raj Kamal, “Internet of Things: Architecture and Design”, McGraw Hill Education.
2. Adrian McEwen, “Designing the Internet of Things”, Wiley Publishers, 2013.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Understand the concepts of Internet of Things.
CO2: Identify hardware and software components of Internet of Things.
CO3: Analyze basic communication protocols.
CO4: Discuss various techniques related to authorization of Devices.
CO5: Design IoT applications in different domain and be able to analyze their performance.

302 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech- VII Sem L T P C

3 0 0 3

(EC20AOE705)INTRODUCTION TO IMAGE PROCESSING

Course Objectives:
1. To introduce fundamentals of Image Processing
2. To expose various relationships between pixels
3. To descript various intensity transformations in spatial domains.
4. To descript various spatial and frequency domains filters.
5. To dissimilate various segmentation and compression techniques for image
processing.

Unit I
Fundamentals of Image Processing – I:
Introduction, A simple image model, Components of image processing system,
Fundamental Steps in digital image processing, image sensing and acquisition,
Applications of image processing.

Unit II
Fundamentals of Image Processing – II:
Image sampling and quantization, basic relationships between pixels –
neighbourhood, adjacency, connectivity, distance measures, mathematical operations
in image processing.

Unit III
Image Enhancement in spatial domain:
Introduction to gray level transformations, Point processing - Image negative,
contrast stretching, intensity slicing, Bit plane slicing and grey level slicing, Histogram
Processing, Histogram equalization and Specifications.

303 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit IV
Image Enhancement in frequency domain:
Spatial Filtering, Smoothing filters, Sharpening filters, Enhancement in Frequency
domain –image smoothing, image sharpening and Homomorphic filtering.

Unit V
Image Segmentation and compression:
Point, Line and Edge Detection, Fundamentals of Compression, Image compression
model, Types of Redundancy – Coding, Inter pixel and Psycho visual, Lossless
compression – Huffman coding, Shannon-Fano coding.

Text Books:
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E woods and Steven L. Eddins, “Digital Image
processing using MATLAB”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. S. Jayaraman, S.Esakkirajan, T.Veerakumar, “Digital Image processing”, Tata
McGraw Hill.
References:
1. Milan Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac, Roger Boule, Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine
Vision, Third Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. William K. Pratt, “Digital Image Processing”, John Wiley, 3rd Edition, 2004
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Understand fundamentals of digital image processing and apply engineering
mathematics in processing of digital image.
CO2: Compute the relationship between the pixels in image processing
CO3: Analyze different image enhancement techniques in spatial domain.
CO4: Describe various image spatial filters and Analyze different image enhancement
techniques in frequency domain
CO5: Analyze various techniques in image segmentation and apply various
algorithms to perform image compression.

304 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech-VII Sem
L T P C
3 0 0 3

(EC20AOE706) MICROCONTROLLER AND APPLICATIONS

Course Objectives:

4. To introduce architectural concepts of 8051 microcontroller.

5. To impart knowledge on addressing modes and instruction set of 8051.
6. To describe timers, counters and serial communication in 8051.
7. To explain interfacing concepts of 8051.

UNIT I
Microprocessor Vs Microcontroller, Embedded Systems, Embedded Microcontrollers,
8051 Architecture- Registers, I/O ports functions, Internal Memory organization, External
Memory, 8051 Pin diagram.
UNIT II
8051 - Addressing Modes, instruction set. Simple Assembly language programs.
UNIT III
8051 - Stack, Timers and Counters – Operation and Assembly language programming to
generate a pulse using Mode-1 and a square wave using Mode- 2 on a port pin.
UNIT-IV
8051 Serial Communication- Basics of Serial Data Communication, RS- 232 standard,
Simple Serial Port programming in C to transmit a message and to receive data serially.
8051 - Interrupts, Assembly language programming to generate an external interrupt
using a switch.
UNIT-V
Interfacing 8051 with LCD, Stepper Motor Interfacing, PWM generation using 8051.

305 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Text Books:

1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi and Janice Gillespie Mazidi and Rollin D. McKinlay; “The 8051
Microcontroller and Embedded Systems – using assembly and C”, PHI, 2006 / Pearson,
2006.
2. Kenneth J. Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller”, 3 rd Edition, Thomson/Cengage Learning.

References:

1. Manish K Patel, “The 8051 Microcontroller Based Embedded Systems”, McGraw Hill,
2014, ISBN: 978-93-329-0125-4.
2. Raj Kamal, “Microcontrollers: Architecture, Programming, Interfacing and System
Design”, Pearson Education, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

CO1: Understand the architecture of 8051 microcontroller.

CO2: Develop 8051 assemble language programming.
CO3: Develop assembly language programs based on timers and counters of 8051 .
CO4: Understand the serial communication basics of 8051 microcontroller.
CO5: Describe 8051 Microcontroller interfacing with I/O devices.

306 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech IV Sem L T P C

4 0 0 4
(EC20AHO401) ELECTRONICS PACKAGING
(Honors)

Unit 1
Introduction and Role of Packaging:
Integrated Circuits, IC Packaging, Semiconductor Roadmap, IC Packaging Challenges, Summary
and Future Trends, Role of Packaging in the Computer Industry, Telecommunication Industry,
Automotive Systems, Medical Electronics, Consumer Electronics and MEMS Products
Unit 2
Design for Reliability and Thermal Management:
What Is Design for Reliability, Microsystems Failures and Failure Mechanisms, Fundamentals of
Design for Reliability, Thermomechanically-Induced Failures, Electrically-Induced Failures,
Chemically-Induced Failures.
Introduction to thermal management, Cooling Requirements for Microsystems, Thermal
Management Fundamentals, Thermal Management of IC and PWB Packages, Electronic Cooling
Methods.
Unit 3
Single Chip Packaging and Multichip Packaging:
Single Chip Package: Introduction and Functions, Types and Fundamentals, Materials,
Processes, Properties and Characteristics of Single Chip Packages.
Multichip Packaging: Functionality, Multichip, Advantages, Multichip Modules at the System
Level, Types of Multichip Module Substrates, Multichip Module Design, Multichip Module
Technology Comparisons.
Unit 4
IC Assembly and Wafer-Level Packaging:
IC Assembly: Introduction and Purpose, Requirements, IC Assembly Technologies Wire
bonding, Tape Automated Bonding and Introduction to Flip Chip.
Wafer-Level Packaging: Introduction, Various Technologies, Reliability and Wafer-level Burn-
in and Test.
Unit 5
Sealing and Encapsulation:
Introduction and Fundamentals of Encapsulation and Sealing, Encapsulation Requirements,
Encapsulant Materials, Encapsulation Processes and Hermetic Sealing.

307 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Text Books:
1. Rao. R. Tummala, “Fundamentals of Microsystems Packaging”, McGraw Hill, 3 rd edition,
2019.
2. William D. Brown, “Advanced Electronic Packaging”, Second edition, IEEE Press,
2011.
References:
1. Walter C Bosshart, “Printed Circuit Boards: Design and Technology”, TMGH 1998.
2. Glenn R.Blackwell, “The Electronic Packaging Handbook”, CRC Press, 2010.

308 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech IV Sem L T P C

4 0 0 4
(EC20AHO402)STRUCTURED DIGITAL SYSTEM
DESIGN
(HONORS)
Course Objectives:

1. To study about structural functionality of different Digital blocks (Both combinational and
Sequential).
2. To provide an exposure to ASM charts, their notations and their realizations.
3. To provide an exposure to VHDL and different styles of modelling using VHDL.
4. To introduce concept of micro programming and study issues related to micro
programming.

UNIT-1
BUILDING BLOCKS FOR DIGITAL DESIGN: Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Decoder,
Encoder, Comparator, Adder, ALU, Carry-look-ahead adder.
BUILDING BLOCKS WITH MEMORY: Clocked building blocks, register building blocks,
RAM, ROM, PLA, PAL, Timing devices.

UNIT -II
DESIGN METHODS: Elements of design style, top-down design, separation of
controller and architecture, refining architecture, and control algorithm, Algorithmic State
Machines, ASM chart notations.

UNIT-III
REALISING ASMS - Traditional synthesis from ASM chart, multiplexer controller method,
one-shot method, ROM based method.
ASYNCHRONOUS INPUTS AND RACES - Asynchronous ASMs, Design for testability, test
vectors, fault analysis tools.
UNIT-IV
MICROPROGRAMED DESIGN: Classical Microprogramming with Modem Technology;
Enhancing the Control Unit; The 2910 Microprogram Sequencer; Choosing a Microprogram
Memory; A Development System for Microprogramming; Designing a Microprogrammed
Minicomputer

309 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT-V
MODELLING WITH VHDL: CAD tools, simulators, schematic entry, synthesis from VHDL.
DESIGN CASE STUDIES: Single pulse, system clock, serial to parallel data conversion,
traffic light controller.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Franklin P. Prosser and David E. Winkel, "The Art of Digital Design", Prentice Hall.
2. Roth, “Digital System Design using VHDL”, McGraw Hill, 2000.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. William Fletcher, An Engineering Approach to Digital Design, 1st Edition, Prentice-Hall
India, 1997.
2. William J Dally and John W Poulton, Digital Systems Engineering, Cambridge University
Press, 2008.
3. Jayaram Bhasker, A VHDL Primer, 3rd edition, Prentice-Hall India, 2009.
4. Kevin Skahill, VHDL for Programmable Logic, Cypress Semiconductors.

Course Outcomes:

CO1: Understand structural functionality of different digital blocks.

CO2: Represent and Realize their designs in ASM charts.
CO3: Represent their designs in different modelling styles by using VHDL.
CO4: Understand concept of Micro program and issues related to microprogramming.

310 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech - V Sem L T P C
4 0 0 4

(EC20AHO501) MEMS TECHNOLOGY

(HONORS)

UNIT I
Introduction: Introduction to MEMS & Microsystems, Introduction to Microsensors,
Evaluation of MEMS, Microsensors, Market Survey, Application of MEMS, MEMS
Materials and its Properties.
UNIT II
Microelectronic Technology for MEMS: Microelectronic Technology for MEMS,
Micromachining Technology for MEMS, Micromachining Process, Etch Stop
Techniques and Microstructure, Surface and Quartz Micromachining, Fabrication of
Micromachined Microstructure and Microstereolithography.
UNIT III
Micro Sensors: MEMS Microsensors, Thermal Microsensors, Mechanical
Micromachined Microsensors, MEMS Pressure Sensor, MEMS Flow Sensor,
Micromachined Flow Sensors, MEMS Inertial Sensors, MEMS Gyro Sensor.

UNIT IV
MEMS Accelerometers: Micromachined Micro accelerometers for MEMS, MEMS
Accelerometers for Avionics, Temperature Drift and Damping Analysis, Piezoresistive
Accelerometer Technology, MEMS Capacitive Accelerometer and its design process,
MEMS for Space Applications.

UNIT V
MEMS Applications: Polymer MEMS & Carbon Nano Tubes CNT, Wafer Bonding &
Packaging of MEMS, Interface Electronics for MEMS, Introduction to Bio-MEMS and
Micro Fluidics, Introduction to Bio-Nano Technology, Bio-Sensors, Fluidics, MEMS for
Biomedical Applications (Bio-MEMS).

Text Books:
1. Nadim Maluf Kirt Williams “An Introduction to Microelectromechanical Systems
Engineering”, Second Edition, Artech House, Inc. Boston London, International
Standard Book Number: 1-58053-590-9.
2. G. K. Ananthasuresh, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalakrishnan, K. N. Bhat and V. K. Atre,

311 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 “Micro and smart systems”, Wiley India, 2010.

References:
1. M.J. Usher, “Sensors and Transducers”, McMillian Hampshire, second edition, 2014.
2. R.S. Muller, Howe, Senturia and Smith, “Micro sensors”, IEEE Press.

Course Outcomes:

CO1: Understand the Basic concept of MEMS Fabrication Technologies,Piezo-

resistance Effect, Piezo electricity and Piezoresistive Sensor.
CO2: Explain Mechanics of Beam and Diaphragm Structures.
CO3: Understand the Basic concept of Air Damping and Basic Equations for Slide-
film Air Damping, Couette-flow Model, Stokes-flow Model.
CO4: Analyze the modeling of Electrostatic Actuation.
CO5: Analyze various applications of MEMS in RF.

312 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech-V Sem L T P C
4 0 0 4

(EC20AHO502) MODERN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

(HONORS)

Unit I:
Digital Communication Systems
Introduction to communications systems, digital communication systems, review
ofdigital modulation techniques, PCM, BPSK, QPSK, GMSK, Delta Modulation, Adaptive
Delta Modulation, Sigma Delta Modulation, Basic principles of orthogonality, Single vs
Multicarrier Systems, OFDM block diagram and its Explanations, Shannon- Fano
Coding, Huffman Coding, Hamming Coding.

Unit II:
Stochastic Process
Introduction, Mathematical definition of a stochastic process, Mean-Square
Stochastic Integrals, Mean-Square Stochastic Differential Equations, Markov process,
Poisson process, Ergodic Process.

Unit III:
Optimum Receivers
Optimum receivers for signals corrupted by additive white gaussian noise, Correlation
demodulator, Optimum detector. ML sequence detector, Probability of error for
binary modulation techniques.

Unit IV:
Software Defined Radio
Need for software radio, general structure for transceiver for SDR, third generation
SDR system architecture, trends in SDR, cognitive radio, spectrum sensing in
cognitive radio.
Unit V:
MIMO Systems
Introduction, space diversity and systems based on space diversity, MIMO based
system architecture, MIMO channel modeling, MIMO channel measurement, MIMO
channel capacity.

313 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Text Books:
1. U. Dalal, “Wireless Communication”, Oxford University Press, fifth edition, 2012.
2. H. Stark and J. Woods, “Probability, Statistics, and Random Processes for
Engineers”,4th Edition, Pearson, 2012.

References:
1. John G. Proakis, “Digital Communication”, 5/e , McGraw Hill Education, 2014.
2. W. Tomasi, “Advanced Communication Systems”, Pearson Education.
3. S. Haykin “Digital Communication Systems”, John Wiley& sons, 2013.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Discuss about the concept of Multicarrier Modulation.
CO2: Analyze errors in system using optimum receivers and detectors.
CO3: Comprehend the concepts of related to stochastic processes.
CO4: Contribute in the areas of software defines radio and cognitive radio.
CO5: Understand MIMO systems and channel modeling.

314 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech VI Sem L T P C
4 0 0 4

(EC20AHO601) ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE

(Honors)

UNIT-I:
Pipeline and vector processing:
Parallel Processing, Pipelining, Arithmetic Pipeline, Instruction Pipeline, RISC Pipeline,
Vector Processing, Array Processors.

UNIT-II:
Computer Arithmetic:
Addition and Subtraction, Hardware Implementation, Multiplication Algorithms and
Hardware Implementation, Division Algorithms and Hardware Implementation,
Floating Point Arithmetic Operations.

UNIT-III:
Parallel Computer Models:
Evolution of Computer Architecture, System Attributes to Performance, Shared
Memory Multiprocessors, Distributed Memory Multicomputers, Vector Super
Computers, SIMD Super Computers.

UNIT-IV:
Processors and Memory Hierarchy:
Advanced Processor Technology: Design Space of Processors, Instruction-Set
Architectures, CISC scalar Processors, RISC scalar Processors, Super Scalar and
Vector Processors: Superscalar Processors.

UNIT-V:
Pipelining and Superscalar Techniques:
Linear Pipeline Processors: Asynchronous and Synchronous models, Clocking and
Timing Control, Speedup, Efficiency and Throughput, Pipeline Schedule Optimization,
Instruction Pipeline Design: Instruction Execution Phases, Mechanisms for Instruction
Pipelining, Dynamic Instruction Scheduling, Branch Handling Techniques.

315 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Text Books:
1.Computer System Architecture, Morris M. Mano, 3rd edition, Pearson/Prentice Hall
India.
2. Advanced Computer Architecture, Kai Hwang, McGraw-Hill, India.

References:
1. Computer Organization and Architecture, William Stallings ,8th edition, PHI.
2. Computer Organization, Carl Hamacher, Z. Vranesic, S. Zaky, 5th edition, McGraw
Hill.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Understand the Concept of Parallel Processing and its applications.
CO2: Implement the Hardware for Arithmetic Operations.
CO3: Analyze the performance of different scalar Computers.
CO4: Develop the Pipelining Concept for a given set of Instructions.
CO5: Distinguish the performance of pipelining and non-pipelining environment in a
processor.

316 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech VI Sem L T P C
4 0 0 4

(EC20AHO602 ) DIGITAL SPEECH PROCESSING

(HONORS)

UNIT-I:
Fundamentals of Digital Speech Processing
Anatomy & Physiology of Speech Organs, The process of Speech Production, Acoustic
Phonetics, Articulatory Phonetics, The Acoustic Theory of Speech Production- Uniform
lossless tube model, effect of losses in vocal tract, effect of radiation at lips, Digital
models for speech signals.

UNIT-II:
Time Domain Models for Speech Processing
Introduction- Window considerations, Short time energy and average magnitude
Short time average zero crossing rate, Speech Vs Silence discrimination using energy
and zero crossing, Pitch period estimation using a parallel processing approach, The
short time autocorrelation function, The short time average magnitude difference
function, Pitch period estimation using the autocorrelation function.

UNIT-III:
Linear Predictive Coding (LPC) Analysis:
Basic principles of Linear Predictive Analysis: The Autocorrelation Method, The
Covariance Method, Solution of LPC Equations: Cholesky Decomposition Solution for
Covariance Method, Durbin’s Recursive Solution for the Autocorrelation Equations,
Comparison between the Methods of Solution of the LPC Analysis Equations,
Applications of LPC Parameters: Pitch Detection using LPC Parameters, Formant
Analysis using LPC Parameters.
UNIT-IV:
Homomorphic Speech Processing:
Introduction, Homomorphic Systems for Convolution: Properties of the Complex
Cepstrum, Computational Considerations, The Complex Cepstrum of Speech, Pitch
Detection, Formant Estimation, The Homomorphic Vocoder. Speech Enhancement:

317 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Nature of interfering sounds, Speech enhancement techniques: Single Microphone
Approach : spectral subtraction, Enhancement by re-synthesis, Comb filter, Wiener
filter, Multi microphone Approach.
UNIT-V:
Automatic Speech & Speaker Recognition:
Basic pattern recognition approaches, Parametric representation of speech,
Evaluating the similarity of speech patterns, Isolated digit Recognition System,
Continuous digit Recognition System. Hidden Markov Model (HMM) for Speech:
Hidden Markov Model (HMM) for speech recognition, Viterbi algorithm, Training and
testing using HMMS. Speaker Recognition: Recognition techniques, Features that
distinguish speakers, Speaker Recognition Systems: Speaker Verification System,
Speaker Identification System.
Text Books:
1. L.R. Rabiner and S. W. Schafer, “Digital Processing of Speech Signals”, 2 nd Ed.,
Pearson Education.
2. Douglas O’Shaughnessy, “Speech Communications: Human & Machine”, 2 nd Ed.,
Wiley India, 2000.
References:
1. Thomas F. Quateri, “Discrete Time Speech Signal Processing: Principles and
Practice”, 1st Edition., PE.
2. Ben Gold & Nelson Morgan, “Speech & Audio Signal Processing”, 1 st Edition,
J.Wiley

Course Outcomes:
CO1:Express the speech signal in terms of its time domain and frequency domain
representations and the different ways in which it can be modeled.
CO2: Derive expressions for simple features used in speech classification
applications.
CO3: Discuss the operation of example algorithms covered in lectures, and discuss
the effects of varying parameter values within these.
CO4: Synthesize block diagrams for speech applications, explain the purpose of the
various blocks, and describe in detail algorithms that could be used to
implement them.
CO5: Deduce the behavior of previously unseen speech processing systems and
hypothesize about their merits.

318 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech VII Sem L T P C

4 0 0 4

(EC20AHO701 ) DIGITAL VIDEO PROCESSING

(ECE)

UNIT-I:
Introduction and Fundamentals:
Representation of video, analog video, spatio-temporal sampling, sampling of analog
and digital video, sampling of 3-D structures, reconstruction from samples.

UNIT-II:
Video Motion Estimation-I:
Real versus apparent motion, spatial-temporal constraint methods (optical flow
equation), general methodologies-Block matching algorithm, Deformable block
matching algorithm.

UNIT-III:
Video Motion Estimation-II:
Mesh based motion estimation, Global motion estimation, Region based motion
estimation, Multiresolution motion estimation Feature based Motion Estimation and
Direct motion Estimation.

UNIT-IV:
Video Coding:
Content dependent video coding, Region based video coding, Object based video
coding, Knowledge based video coding, Semantic video coding, Scalable video
coding, Applications of motion estimator in video coding.

UNIT-V:
Digital Video Compression Standards:
Inter-frame and intra-frame compression, Lossy and Loss less compression
techniques, MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 Standard, H.265/HEVC.

319 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Text Books:
1. M.Tekalp, Digital Video Processing, Prentice Hall, 2 nd Edition, 2018.
2. Alan C. Bovik, The Essential Guide to Video Processing, Elsevier Science, 2nd
Edition, 2016.

References:
1.Y.Wang, J. Ostermann and Y.-Q. Zhang, Video Processing and Communications.
Signal Proc. Series, Prentice Hall, 2012.
2. J. Watkinson, The Art of Digital Video, 3 rd edition, Focal Press, 2014.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Understand the video sampling and reconstruction.
CO2: Describe algorithms of video motion estimation.
CO3: Interpret video coding and segmentation algorithms.
CO4: Analyze various applications of motion estimator in video coding.
CO5: Familiarize with video compression standards.

320 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech VII Sem L T P C

4 0 0 4

(EC20AHO702 ) TESTING & TESTABILITY

(HONORS)

UNIT-I:
Need for testing, the problems in digital Design testing, the problems in Analog
Design testing, the problems in mixed analog/digital design testing, design for test,
printed-circuit board (PCB) testing, software testing, Fault in Digital Circuits: General
Introduction, Controllability and Observability, Fault Models, stuck at faults, bridging
faults, CMOS technology considerations, intermittent faults.

UNIT-II:
General Introduction to test pattern generation, Test Pattern generation for
combinational logic circuits, Manual test pattern generation, automatic test pattern
generation, Boolean difference method, Roth’s D- algorithm, Developments following
Roth’s D-algorithm, Pseudorandom test pattern generation.

UNIT-III:
Pseudorandom test pattern generators, Design of test pattern generator using Linear
feedback shift registers (LFSRs) and Cellular Automata (CAs).

UNIT-IV:
Design for Testability for combinational circuits: Basic Concepts of testability,
controllability and observability, the Reed Muller’s expansion techniques, use of
control logic and syndrome testable designs.

UNIT-V:
Making sequential circuits testable, testability insertion, full scan DFT technique-Full
scan insertion, flip- flop structures, Full scan design and test, scan architectures-full
scan design, shadow register DFT, partial scan methods, multiple scan design, other
scan designs.

Text Books:
1. Digital Systems Testing and Testable Design-Miron Abramovici, Melvin A. Breuer

321 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 and Arthur D. Friedman, IEEE, Wiley-Interscience, 2008.
2. Michael. L. Bushnell, and Vishwani. D. Agrawal, “Essentials of Electronic Testing
For Digital, Memory And Mixed Signal VLSI Circuits” Kluwer Academic Publishers,
Third Edition, 2012.

References:
1. H. Fujiwara, “Logic Testing and Design for testability” MIT Press, 1985.
2. Chris Spear, “System Verilog for Verification,” Springer Publications, second
edition 2008.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Model the digital circuits at logic level and register level.
CO2:Identify the problems associated with testing of semiconductor circuits at
earlier design levels so as to significantly reduce the testing costs.
CO3: Analyze various Trade-Offs and Techniques for Testability.
CO4: Explain the concepts of built-in-self-test.
CO5: Illustrate the Memory Test Architectures and Techniques.

322 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech IV Sem L T P C
4 0 0 4

(EC20AMI401) COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS-I

(Minor)

UNIT-I:
Amplitude Modulation
Time-Domain Description, Frequency domain description, Generation of AM waves,
Detection of AM waves, AM/DSB, Time-Domain Description, Frequency domain
description Generation of DSBSC waves, Coherent Detection of DSBSC Modulated
waves, Costas loop, Quadrature Carrier multiplexing, Comparison of amplitude
modulation techniques, frequency translation, FDM.

UNIT-II:
Angle Modulation
Basic Concepts, Frequency Modulation, Spectrum Analysis Of sinusoidal FM wave,
NBFM,WBFM, Constant Average power, Transmission bandwidth of FM waves,
Generation of FM waves, Direct FM, demodulation of FM waves, frequency
discriminator, ZCD, phase locked loop (1st order) comparison of AM and FM.

UNIT-III:
Noise in Analog Modulation Systems
Signal-to-noise ratios, AM receiver model, DSBSC receiver, noise in AM receivers
using envelope detection, threshold effect, FM receiver model, noise in FM reception,
FM threshold effect, pre-emphasis and de-emphasis in FM systems.

UNIT-IV:
Pulse Modulation
Sampling theorem for low-pass and band-pass signal, statement and proof, PAM,
Channel Bandwidth for a PAM signal, natural sampling, flat-top sampling, signal
recovery through holding, quantization of signals, quantization error, PCM, electrical
representations of binary digits, PCM systems, DPCM , delta Modulation, Adaptive
delta modulation.

323 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 UNIT-V:
Digital Modulation
Introduction, Binary Shift Keying, DPSK, QPSK, QPSK transmitter, QPSK receiver,
signal space representation, BFSK, spectrum, receiver for BFSK, line codes, TDM.
Application of analog/digital communication in Instrumentation and Automation.

Text Books:
1.H Taub, D L Schilling, G Saha, “Principles of Communication Systems” 3/e, TMH
2017.
2. S. Haykin “Digital Communications” John Wiley 2015.
References:
1. B.P.Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, 3rd edition,
Oxford University Press, 2017.
2. H P Hsu, “Analog and Digital Communications”, Schaum’s Outline Series TMH
2016.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Define, understand and explain the concept of modulation, demodulation, figure
of merit ,sampling, quantization, multiplexing.
CO2: Apply the knowledge of basic systems to articulate the building blocks of the
given analog/digital communication system and derive figure of merit for the
system.
CO3: Analyze interaction among various blocks of a given analog/digital
communication system to obtain waveform at different points for given
specifications and obtain noise performance parameters.
CO4: Design and decide the modulators, demodulators, sampling rate, type of
encoding for given specifications of analog/digital communication systems.
CO5: Design the modulator-demodulator for the given analog/digital communication
system using modern tools.

324 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech IV Sem L T P C
4 0 0 4
(EC20AMI402)ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION
(Minor)
Course Objectives:
1. Understand the measurement of electrical parameters such as voltage, current,
resistance.
2. Apply the basic concepts signals to illustrate working of CRO and signal generators
3. Design of Ammeters, Voltmeter and Multimeters
4. Analyze the working of Display Devices and Recorders in practical fields.
5. Learn the different measurement techniques for non-physiological parameters.

UNIT 1
Measurements: Introduction, Functions of instruments and measurement systems,
Applications of measurement systems. Static & dynamic characteristics. Measurement
Errors: Introduction Gross errors and systematic errors, Absolute and relative errors,
Measurement error combinations. Basic concepts of accuracy, Precision, Resolution and
Significant figures.

UNIT 2
Ammeters, Voltmeter and Multimeters: Introduction, DC ammeter principle only, DC
voltmeter, Multi-range voltmeter, Extending voltmeter ranges, Loading. Digital Voltmeters:
Introduction, Ramp type, Dual slope integrating type (V–T), integrating type (V–F) and
Successive approximation type (relevant problems). Digital Instruments: Introduction, Block
diagram of a Basic Digital Multimeter. Digital frequency meters.

UNIT 3
Oscilloscopes: Introduction, Basic principles, CRT features, Block diagram and working
CRO, Typical CRT connections, Dual beam and dual trace CROs, Special Oscilloscopes:
Analog storage oscilloscopes, Digital storage oscilloscopes Sampling Oscilloscope.
Signal Generators: Introduction, Fixed and variable AF oscillator, Standard signal
generator, Modern laboratory signal generator, AF sine and Square wave generator, Function
generator, Square and Pulse generator.

UNIT 4

325 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
Display Devices and Recorders: Introduction, Segmental Displays: Seven segmental
display, dot matrices, LED, LCD, decade counting assemblies, display systems. Recorders:
Recording requirements, analog recorders- Graphic recorders, strip chart recorders & its
types, X-Y recorder.
Sensors and Transducers - Active and passive transducers: Measurement of displacement
(Resistance, capacitance, inductance; LVDT) Force (strain gauges) Pressure (piezoelectric
transducers) Temperature (resistance thermometers, thermocouples, and thermistors).

UNIT 5
Biomedical Measurements:
Bio signals characteristics – frequency and amplitude ranges. ECG – Einthovens triangle,
standard lead system, Principles of EEG,EMG- unipolar and bipolar mode. Recording of ERG,
EOG and EGG.
Biochemical sensors – pH, pO2 and pCO2, Ion selective Field effect Transistor (ISFET),
Immunologically sensitive FET (IMFET), Blood glucose sensors, Blood gas analyzers -
colorimeter, Sodium Potassium Analyser, spectrophotometer, blood cell counter, auto
analyzer (simplified schematic description) – Bio Sensors – Principles – amperometric and
voltometric techniques.

Text books:
1. “Electronic Instrumentation”, H. S. Kalsi, TMH, 2004.
2. “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements”, David A Bell, PHI / Pearson Education
2006 / Oxford Higher Education, 2013.
3. Electrical and Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation – A. K. Sawhney, 17th Edition
(Reprint 2004), Dhanpat Rai & Co. Pvt. Ltd., 2004.
4. Leslie Cromwell, Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement, 2nd edition, Prentice hall
of India, New Delhi, 2015.

Reference Books:

1. “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measuring Techniques”, Cooper D & A D

Helfrick, PHI, 1998.
2. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology,
Pearson Education, 2004.
3. Khandpur R.S, Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
New Delhi, 2014

326 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Course Outcomes:

CO1: Understand instrument characteristics, errors and generalized measurement

system.
CO2: Analyze and use the circuits for the measurement of R, L, C, F, I, V etc.
CO3: Use of Ammeters, Voltmeter and Multimeters and CRO for measurement.
CO4: Interpret different signal generator circuits for the generation of various
waveforms.
CO5: Demonstrate different biochemical measurement techniques.

327 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech V Sem L T P C
4 0 0 4

(EC20AMI501) AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS

(Minor)

UNIT-I:
Fundamentals of Automotive Electronics
Components for electronic engine management system, open and closed loop control
strategies, PID control, Lookup tables, introduction to modern control strategies like
Fuzzy logic and adaptive control. Parameters to be controlled in SI and CI engines.

UNIT-II:
Sensors &Actuators
Hall Effect, hot wire, thermistor, piezo electric, piezoresistive, based sensors.
Introduction, basic sensor arrangement, types of sensors, oxygen concentration
sensor, lambda sensor, crankshaft angular position sensor, cam position sensor,
Mass air flow (MAF) rate, Manifold absolute pressure (MAP), Throttle plate angular
position, engine oil pressure sensor, vehicle speed sensor, stepper motors, relays,
detonation sensor and emission sensors.

UNIT-III:
Digital Engine Control System
Open loop and close loop control system, engine cooling and warm up control, idle
speed control, acceleration and full load enrichment, deceleration fuel cutoff. Fuel
control maps, open loop control of fuel injection and closed loop lambda control
exhaust emission control, on-board diagnostics, diagnostics, future automotive
electronic systems, Electronic dash board instruments – Onboard diagnosis system.

UNIT-IV:
SI Engine Management
Feedback carburetor system, throttle body injection and multi point fuel injection
system, injection system controls, advantage of electronic ignition systems, three way
catalytic converter, conversion efficiency versus lambda. Working of the fuel system
components. Advantages of electronic ignition systems. Types of solid state ignition
systems and their principle of operation, Contactless electronic ignition system and
Electronic spark timing control.
328 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 UNIT-V:
CI Engine Management
Fuel injection system, parameters affecting combustion, noise and emissions in CI
engines. Pilot, main, advanced, post injection and retarded post injection. Working of
components like fuel injector, fuel pump, rail pressure limiter, flow limiter, EGR valve
control in electronically controlled systems.

Text Books:
1.Automobile Electrical & Electronic Equipments - Young, Griffitns - Butterworths,
London.
2.Understanding Automotive Electronics, Wiliam B. Ribbens, 5th Edition, Newnes,
Butterworth–Heinemann.

References:
1. Fundamentals of Automotive Electronics - V.A.W.Hilliers - Hatchin, London.
2. Automotive Computer & Control System – Tom wather J. R., Cland Hunter, Prentice
Inc. NJ.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Acquire an overview of automotive components, subsystems, and basics of
Electronic Engine Control in today’s automotive industry.
CO2: Gain fundamental knowledge to develop electronic controls for automotive
subsystems.
CO3: Use available automotive sensors and actuators while interfacing with
microcontrollers / microprocessors during automotive system design.
CO4: Understand the networking of various modules in automotive systems,
communication protocols and diagnostics of the sub systems.
CO5: Design and implement the electronics that attribute the reliability, safety, and
smartness to the automobiles, providing add-on comforts and get fair idea on
future Automotive Electronic Systems.

329 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech V Sem L T P C
4 0 0 4

(EC20AMI502) COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS-II

(Minor)

UNIT I
Optical Fiber Transmission Media:
Introduction, History of optical fiber communications, Optical Fibers vs metallic cable
facilities, electromagnetic spectrum, block diagram of an optical fiber communication
system, optical fiber types, light propagation, optical fiber configurations, optical
fiber classifications, losses in optical fiber cables, light sources, optical sources, light
detectors, lasers, optical fiber system link budget.

UNIT II
Microwave Radio Communications and System Gain
Introduction, Advantages and Disadvantages of Microwave radio, Analog vs digital
microwave, frequency vs amplitude modulation, frequency modulated microwave
radio system, FM microwave radio repeaters, diversity, protection switching
arrangements, FM microwave radio stations, microwave repeater station, light of
sight path characteristics, microwave radio system gain.

UNIT III
Digital Telephone Transmission:
Pulse Modulation, PCM, PCM Sampling, Signal to Quantization Noise ratio, linear vs
nonlinear pcm codes, idle channel noise, coding methods, companding, vocoders,
pcm line speed, delta modulation pcm, adaptive delta modulation pcm, differential
pcm, pulse transmission, signal power in binary digital signals. Time division
multiplexing, frequency division multiplexing, Public Telephone Network: Telephone
transmission system environment, public telephone network, instruments, local
loops, trunk circuits and exchanges.

UNIT IV
Cellular Telephone Concepts
Mobile Telephone Service, evolution of cellular telephone, cellular telephone,

330 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 frequency reuse, interference, cell splitting, sectoring, segmentation and dualization,
cellular system topology, roaming and handoffs, cellular telephone network
components, cellular telephone call processing.

UNIT V
Cellular Telephone Systems
Introduction, First generation analog cellular telephone, personal communications,
system, second generation cellular telephone systems, Digital Cellular telephone,
interim standard 95 (IS-95), Global system for mobile communications, personal
satellite communication systems.

Text Books:
1. W. Tomasi, Advanced Electronic Communication Systems, 6/e, Pearson, 2019.
2. Theodore S. Rappaport: Wireless communication principles and practice, 2/e,
Pearson Education, 1990.

References:
1. George Kennedy, Electronic Communication systems, TMGH, 2016.
2. John Bellamy, Digital Telephony, Wiley Publications, 2015.

Course Outcomes:
CO1:Appreciate the importance of microwave signal and learn important microwave
devices.
CO2: Describe the working principle of different RADAR systems and their
applications.
CO3:Understand the Satellite fundamentals and types of satellite.
CO4: Analyze the working of a Satellite communication system and its inner
modules.
CO5: Explain the working principle of Mobile communication and GSM Services.

331 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech VI Sem L T P C
4 0 0 4

(EC20AMI601) DIGITAL INTEGRTAED CIRCUITS

(ECE)
Course Objectives:
1. Learn the modeling of MOS transistors
2. Learn about the use resistive Load inverter circuits in VLSI.
3. Learn about the calculation of delay times in MOS inverter circuits.
4. Learn about the working principle of two, three and four input CMOS logic circuits.
5. Study the working cycles of DRAM and SRAM cells.

Unit I
Modeling of MOS Transistors using SPICE:
Basic Concepts, The LEVEL 1 Model Equations, The LEVEL 2 Model Equations, The
LEVEL 3 Model Equations, Capacitance Models and Comparison of the SPICE MOSFET
Models.

Unit II
MOS Inverters: Static Characteristics
Introduction, Resistive-Load Inverter, Inverters with n-Type MOSFET Load and CMOS
Inverter.

Unit III
MOS Inverters: Switching Characteristics:
Introduction, Delay-Time Definitions, Calculation of Delay Times, Inverter Design
with Delay Constraints.

Unit IV
Combinational and Sequential MOS Logic Circuits:
MOS logic circuits with Depletion nMOS loads, CMOS logic circuits, Complex logic
circuits, Behavior of Bistable elements, SR Latch circuit, Clocked latch and Flip-Flop
circuits, CMOS D-Latch and Edge–Triggered Flip-Flop.
Unit V
Semiconductor Memories:
Overview of Semiconductor memories, RAM array organization, DRAM-Cell types,
Operation of Three-Transistor DRAM cell and One-Transistor DRAM cell, Leakage
332 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 currents and Refresh operation, SRAM- Various configurations, Full CMOS SRAM cell,
Memory structure of SRAM Cell array and Leakage currents.

Text Books:
1. S.M.Kang & Y.Leblebici, “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits-Analysis and Design”
Third edition, McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2020.
2. Neil H. E. Weste & D.M.Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design-A Circuits and Systems
Perspective”, Fourth edition, Pearson Edition, 2020.
References:
1. T.C.Carusone, D.A.Johns & K.W.Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”,
Second Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2019.
2. Kiat Seng Yeo and Kaushik Roy, “Low- Voltage, Low-Power VLSI Subsystems”,
McGraw Hill Professional Engineering Education, 2018.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Interpret the various Modelling effects encountered in a MOSFET
CO2: Analyze CMOS inverter circuits using different loads.
CO3: Design a inverter for a specified delay.
CO4: Design two, three and four input CMOS logic circuits.
CO5: Illustrate the working cycles of DRAM and SRAM cells.

333 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech VI Sem L T P C
4 0 0 4

(EC20AMI602) NANOTECHNOLOGY
(Minor)

Unit-I:
Introduction: History and Scope, Can Small Things Make a Big Difference?
Classification of Nanostructured Materials, Fascinating Nanostructures, Applications
of Nanomaterials, Nature: The Best of Nanotechnologist, Challenges and Future
Prospects.

Unit-II:
Unique Properties of Nanomaterials:
Microstructure and Defects in Nanocrystalline Materials: Dislocations, Twins, stacking
faults and voids, Grain Boundaries, triple and disclinations, Effect of Nano-
dimensions on Materials Behavior: Elastic properties, Melting Point, Diffusivity, Grain
growth characteristics, Enhanced solid solubility, Magnetic Properties: Softmagnetic
nanocrystalline alloy, Permanent magnetic nanocrystalline materials, Giant Magnetic
Resonance, Electrical Properties, Optical Properties, Thermal Properties and
Mechanical Properties.

Unit-III:
Synthesis Routes:
Bottom up approaches: Physical Vapor Deposition, Inert Gas Condensation, Laser
Ablation, Chemical Vapor Deposition, Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Sol-gel method ,Self-
assembly, Top down approaches: Mechanical alloying, Nano-lithography,
Consolidation of Nanopowders: Shock wave consolidation, Hot isostatic pressing and
Cold isostatic pressing Spark plasma sintering.

UNIT-IV:
Tools to Characterize nanomaterials:
X-Ray Diffraction (XRD), Small Angle X-ray scattering (SAXS), Scanning Electron
Microscopy (SEM), Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM), Atomic Force Microscopy
(AFM), Scanning Tunneling Microscope (STM), Field Ion Microscope (FEM).

334 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 UNIT-V:
Applications of Nanomaterials:
Nano-electronics, Micro- and Nanoelectromechanical systems (MEMS/NEMS),
Nanosensors, Nanocatalysts, Food and Agricultural Industry, Cosmetic and Consumer
Goods, Structure and Engineering, Automotive Industry, Water- Treatment and the
environment, Nano-medical applications, Textiles, Paints, Energy, Defence and Space
Applications, Concerns and challenges of Nanotechnology.

Text Books:
1. Text Book of Nano Science and Nano Technology – B.S. Murthy, P. Shankar,
Baldev Raj, B.B. Rath and James Munday, University Press IIM.
2. Introduction to Nanotechnology – Charles P. Poole, Jr., and Frank J. Owens, Wiley
India Edition, 2018.

References:
1. Nano: The Essentials by T.Pradeep, McGraw- Hill Education.
2. Nanomaterials, Nanotechnologies and Design by Michael F. Ashby, Paulo J. Ferreira
and Daniel L. Schodek.

Course Outcomes:
CO1:Explain the fundamental principles of nanotechnology and their application to
biomedical engineering.
CO2: Apply engineering and physics concepts to the nano-scale and non-continuum
domain.
CO3: Identify and compare state-of-the-art nanofabrication methods and perform a
critical analysis of the research literature.
CO4: Design processing conditions to engineer functional nanomaterials.
CO5: Apply and transfer interdisciplinary systems engineering approaches to the field
of bio and nanotechnology projects.

335 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech VII Sem L T P C

4 0 0 4

(EC20AMI701 ) DIGITAL IMAGE AND VIDEO PROCESSING

(Minor)

UNIT-I:
Introduction and Image Enhancement:
Digital image fundamentals, Concept of pixels and gray levels, Applications of image
processing, Introduction to image enhancement, spatial domain methods: point
processing – intensity transformations, histogram processing, image averaging,
image subtraction, Spatial filtering- smoothing filters, sharpening filters, Frequency
domain methods: low pass filtering, high pass filtering, Homomorphic filtering.

UNIT-II:
Image Restoration:
Introduction to Image restoration, Degradation model, Restoration in the presence of
Noise only-Spatial Filtering, Periodic Noise reduction by Frequency domain Filtering,
Algebraic approaches- Inverse filtering, Wiener filtering, Constrained Least squares
restoration. Color Image Processing: Introduction, Fundamentals of Color image
processing: Color models- RGB, CMY, YIQ, HSI, Pseudo color image processing –
intensity slicing, gray level to color transformation, Basics of Full Color image
processing.

UNIT-III:
Image Compression:
Introduction, Need for image compression, Redundancy in images, Classification of
redundancy in images, image compression scheme, Classification of image
compression schemes, Huffman coding, Arithmetic coding, Predictive coding,
Transformed based compression, Image compression standards, Wavelet-based
image compression.

UNIT-IV:
Image Segmentation:
Introduction to image segmentation, Detection of discontinuities -point, line and
edge and combined detection; Edge linking and boundary description - local and

336 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 global processing using Hough transform, Thresholding, Region oriented
segmentation – basic formulation, region growing by pixel aggregation, region
splitting and merging.

UNIT-V:
Digital Video & Coding:
Basics of Video, Time-varying Image formation Models, Spatio Temporal Sampling,
Optical flow, General methodologies, Overview of coding systems, Video
Compression Standards.

Text Books:
1. R. Gonzalez, R.E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, 3rd Edition, Pearson
Education, India, 2019.
2. M. Tekalp, “Digital Video Processing”, Prentice-Hall, 2015.

References:
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E Woods and Steven L. Eddins,“Digital Image
Processing using MAT LAB” , Pearson Edu., 2018.
2. Bovik, “Handbook of Image & Video Processing”, Academic Press, 2016.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Comprehend the image processing fundamentals and enhancement techniques
in spatial and frequency domain.
CO2: Describe the color image fundamentals, models and various restoration
techniques.
CO3: Design and Analyze the image compression systems.
CO4: Outline the various image segmentation operations.
CO5: Comprehend the basics of video processing and video coding.

337 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech VII Sem L T P C

4 0 0 4
(EC20AMI604) EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN
(Minor)

UNIT-I:
Embedded Systems Basics:
Introduction to Embedded systems, Examples of embedded systems, Typical
Hardware, Gates, Timing Diagrams, Memory, Microprocessors, Buses, Direct Memory
Access, Interrupts, Microprocessor Architecture, and Interrupt Basics.

UNIT-II:
8051 Architecture:
Introduction, 8051 Micro controller Hardware, Input/output Pin Ports and Circuits,
External Memory, Serial data Input/output, Interrupts.

UNIT-III:
Basic Assembly Language Programming Concepts:
The Assembly Language Programming Process, Programming Tools and Techniques,
Programming the 8051.

UNIT-IV:
Moving Data:
Introduction, Addressing Modes, External Data Moves, Code Memory Read Only Data
Moves, Push and Pop Opcodes, Data Exchanges.
Basic Design Using a Real-Time Operating System:
Message Queues, Mailboxes and Pipes, Timer Functions, Events, Memory
Management, Interrupt Routines in an RTOS Environment.

UNIT-V:
Applications:
Introduction, keyboards, Human Factor, Key Switch Factors, Keyboard
Configurations, Displays, Seven-Segment Numeric Display, D/A and A/D
Conversions.

338 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Embedded Software Development Tools:
Host and Target machines, Linker/Locators for Embedded Software, Getting
Embedded Software into the Target System; Debugging Techniques: Testing on Host
Machine, Using Laboratory Tools, An Example System.

Text Books:
1. An Embedded Software Primer, David E. Simon, Pearson Education.
2. The 8051 Microcontroller, Third Edition, Kenneth J.Ayala, Thomson.

References:
1. 8051 Microcontrollers, Satish Shah, Oxford Higher Education.
2.Embedded Microcomputer Systems Real Time Interfacing, Jonathan W. Valvano,
Cengage Learning.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Understand the microprocessor architecture and its components used in
embedded systems.
CO2: Write the 8051 assembly language code for specific purposes.
CO3: Implement code for interfacing various devices.
CO4: Develop simple embedded systems for real time operations.
CO5: Compose simple embedded system with error free software to obtain target
system.

339 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
L T P C
B.Tech IV Sem 4 0 0 4

(EC20AMI403) INTRODUCTION TO SIGNAL PROCESSING

(Minor)

Unit I
Signals & Systems:
Basic definitions and classification of Signals and Systems (Continuous time and discrete
time), operations on signals, Concepts of Convolution and Correlation of signals, Fourier
series: Trigonometric & Exponential, concept of discrete spectrum, Illustrative Problems.

Unit II
Continuous Time Fourier Transform:
Definition, Computation and properties of Fourier transform for different types of signals and
systems, Inverse Fourier transform. Statement and proof of sampling theorem of low pass
signals, Illustrative Problems.

Unit III
Discrete Time Fourier Transform:
Definition, Computation and properties of Discrete Time Fourier transform for different types
of signals and systems, Illustrative Problems.

Unit IV
Laplace Transform:
Definition, ROC, Properties, Inverse Laplace transforms, the S-plane and BIBO stability,
Transfer functions.
Z–Transform:
Definition, ROC, Properties, Poles and Zeros in Z-plane, The inverse Z- Transform, System
analysis, Transfer function, Solution of difference equations with initial conditions,
Illustrative Problems.

340 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Unit V
Discrete Fourier Transform:
Discrete Fourier series, Properties of Discrete Fourier series, Discrete Fourier Transform
(DFT), The DFT as a linear transformation, Properties of DFT.
Fast Fourier Transforms:
Efficient computation of DFT algorithms - Radix 2-Decimation- in-Time & Decimation-in-
Frequency algorithms, Inverse FFT, Illustrative problems.

Text Books:
1 A.V. Oppenheim, A.S. Willsky and S.H. Nawab, “Signals and Systems”, 2 nd Edition,
PHI, 2009.

2 John G. Proakis, Dimitris G. Manolakis, “Digital signal processing, principles,

Algorithms and applications,” Pearson Education/PHI, 4th ed., 2007.

References:
1 B P Lathi, “Principles of Linear Systems and Signals”, 2 nd Edition, Oxford University
Press, 015.
2 Simon Haykin and Van Veen, “Signals & Systems”, 2 nd Edition, Wiley, 2005.
3 Avtar Singh and S. Srinivasan, “Digital Signal Processing,” Thomson Publications,
2004.

341 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech IV Sem L T P C
4 0 0 4

(EC20AMI402)ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION
(Minor)
Course Objectives:
1. Understand the measurement of electrical parameters such as voltage, current,
resistance.
2. Apply the basic concepts signals to illustrate working of CRO and signal generators
3. Design of Ammeters, Voltmeter and Multimeters
4. Analyze the working of Display Devices and Recorders in practical fields.
5. Learn the different measurement techniques for non-physiological parameters.

UNIT 1
Measurements: Introduction, Functions of instruments and measurement systems,
Applications of measurement systems. Static & dynamic characteristics. Measurement
Errors: Introduction Gross errors and systematic errors, Absolute and relative errors,
Measurement error combinations. Basic concepts of accuracy, Precision, Resolution and
Significant figures.

UNIT 2
Ammeters, Voltmeter and Multimeters: Introduction, DC ammeter principle only, DC
voltmeter, Multi-range voltmeter, Extending voltmeter ranges, Loading. Digital Voltmeters:
Introduction, Ramp type, Dual slope integrating type (V–T), integrating type (V–F) and
Successive approximation type (relevant problems). Digital Instruments: Introduction, Block
diagram of a Basic Digital Multimeter. Digital frequency meters.

UNIT 3
Oscilloscopes: Introduction, Basic principles, CRT features, Block diagram and working
CRO, Typical CRT connections, Dual beam and dual trace CROs, Special Oscilloscopes:
Analog storage oscilloscopes, Digital storage oscilloscopes Sampling Oscilloscope.
Signal Generators: Introduction, Fixed and variable AF oscillator, Standard signal
generator, Modern laboratory signal generator, AF sine and Square wave generator, Function
generator, Square and Pulse generator.

342 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
UNIT 4
Display Devices and Recorders:
Introduction, Segmental Displays: Seven segmental display, dot matrices, LED, LCD, decade
counting assemblies, display systems. Recorders: Recording requirements, analog recorders-
Graphic recorders, strip chart recorders & its types, X-Y recorder.
Sensors and Transducers –
Active and passive transducers: Measurement of displacement (Resistance, capacitance,
inductance; LVDT) Force (strain gauges) Pressure (piezoelectric transducers) Temperature
(resistance thermometers, thermocouples, and thermistors).
UNIT 5
Biomedical Measurements:
Bio signals characteristics – frequency and amplitude ranges. ECG – Einthovens triangle,
standard lead system, Principles of EEG,EMG- unipolar and bipolar mode. Recording of ERG,
EOG and EGG.
Biochemical sensors –
pH, pO2 and pCO2, Ion selective Field effect Transistor (ISFET), Immunologically sensitive
FET (IMFET), Blood glucose sensors, Blood gas analyzers -colorimeter, Sodium Potassium
Analyser, spectrophotometer, blood cell counter, auto analyzer (simplified schematic
description) – Bio Sensors – Principles – amperometric and voltometric techniques.

Text books:

1. Electronic Instrumentation, H. S. Kalsi, TMH, 2004.

2. Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements, David A Bell, PHI / Pearson Education 2006
/ Oxford Higher Education, 2013.
3. Electrical and Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation – A. K. Sawhney, 17th Edition
(Reprint 2004), Dhanpat Rai & Co. Pvt. Ltd., 2004.
4. Leslie Cromwell, Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement, 2 nd edition, Prentice hall
of India, New Delhi, 2015.

Reference Books:

1. “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measuring Techniques”, Cooper D & A D

Helfrick, PHI, 1998.
2. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology,
Pearson Education, 2004.
3. Khandpur R.S, Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
New Delhi, 2014

343 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Course Outcomes:

CO1: Understand instrument characteristics, errors and generalized measurement

system.
CO2: Analyze and use the circuits for the measurement of R, L, C, F, I, V etc.
CO3: Use of Ammeters, Voltmeter and Multimeters and CRO for measurement.
CO4: Interpret different signal generator circuits for the generation of various
waveforms.
CO5: Demonstrate different biochemical measurement techniques.

344 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech V SEM L T P C
4 0 0 4

(EC20AMI401) COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS-I

(Minor)

UNIT-I:
Amplitude Modulation
Time-Domain Description, Frequency domain description, Generation of AM waves,
Detection of AM waves, AM/DSB, Time-Domain Description, Frequency domain
description Generation of DSBSC waves, Coherent Detection of DSBSC Modulated
waves, Costas loop, Quadrature Carrier multiplexing, Comparison of amplitude
modulation techniques, frequency translation, FDM.

UNIT-II:
Angle Modulation
Basic Concepts, Frequency Modulation, Spectrum Analysis Of sinusoidal FM wave,
NBFM,WBFM, Constant Average power, Transmission bandwidth of FM waves,
Generation of FM waves, Direct FM, demodulation of FM waves, frequency
discriminator, ZCD, phase locked loop (1st order) comparison of AM and FM.

UNIT-III:
Noise in Analog Modulation Systems
Signal-to-noise ratios, AM receiver model, DSBSC receiver, noise in AM receivers
using envelope detection, threshold effect, FM receiver model, noise in FM reception,
FM threshold effect, pre-emphasis and de-emphasis in FM systems.

UNIT-IV:
Pulse Modulation
Sampling theorem for low-pass and band-pass signal, statement and proof, PAM,
Channel Bandwidth for a PAM signal, natural sampling, flat-top sampling, signal
recovery through holding, quantization of signals, quantization error, PCM, electrical
representations of binary digits, PCM systems, DPCM , delta Modulation, Adaptive
delta modulation.

345 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 UNIT-V:
Digital Modulation
Introduction, Binary Shift Keying, DPSK, QPSK, QPSK transmitter, QPSK receiver,
signal space representation, BFSK, spectrum, receiver for BFSK, line codes, TDM.
Application of analog/digital communication in Instrumentation and Automation.

Text Books:
1.H Taub, D L Schilling, G Saha, “Principles of Communication Systems” 3/e, TMH
2017.
2. S. Haykin “Digital Communications” John Wiley 2015.

References:
1. B.P.Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, 3 rd edition,
Oxford University Press, 2017.
2. H P Hsu, “Analog and Digital Communications”, Schaum’s Outline Series TMH
2016.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Define, understand and explain the concept of modulation, demodulation,
figure of merit ,sampling, quantization, multiplexing.
CO2: Apply the knowledge of basic systems to articulate the building blocks of the
given analog/digital communication system and derive figure of merit for the
system.
CO3: Analyze interaction among various blocks of a given analog/digital
communication system to obtain waveform at different points for given
specifications and obtain noise performance parameters.
CO4: Design and decide the modulators, demodulators, sampling rate, type of
encoding for given specifications of analog/digital communication systems.
CO5: Design the modulator-demodulator for the given analog/digital communication
system using modern tools.

346 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech V SEM L T P C
4 0 0 4

(EC20AMI504) MATLAB PROGRAMMING

(Minor)

UNIT-I:
Introduction to MATLAB
MATLAB Interactive Sessions, Menus and the toolbar, computing with MATLAB, Script
files and the Editor Debugger, MATLAB Help System, Programming in MATLAB.

UNIT-II:
Arrays
Arrays, Multidimensional Arrays, Element by Element Operations, Polynomial
Operations Using Arrays, Cell Arrays, Structure Arrays.

UNIT-III:
Functions & Files:
Elementary Mathematical Functions, User Defined Functions, Advanced Function
Programming, Working with Data Files.

UNIT-IV:
Programming Techniques:
Program Design and Development, Relational Operators and Logical Variables,
Logical Operators and Functions, Conditional Statements, Loops, the Switch
Structure, Debugging Mat Lab Programs.
Plotting :XY- plotting functions, Subplots and Overlay plots, Special Plot types,
Interactive plotting, Function Discovery, Regression, 3-D plots.

UNIT-V:
Linear Algebraic Equations:
Elementary Solution Methods, Matrix Methods for (Linear Equations), Cramer’s
Method, Undetermined Systems, Order Systems.

347 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Text Books:
1.G. H. Golub and C. F. Van Loan, Matrix Computations, 3 rd Ed., Johns Hopkins
University Press, 2014.
2. Delores M. Etter, David C. Kuncicky, Holly Moore, “Introduction to MATLAB 7.0”,
Pearson, 2018.

References:
1. RudraPratap, “Getting Started with MATLAB”, OXFORD University Press, 2017.
2. Agam Kumar Tyagi, “MATLAB and Simulink for Engineers”, University Press, 2019.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Use MATLAB Tool and help system to solve problems.
CO2: Analyze the concepts of Arrays and examine the Operations in MATLAB.
CO3: Develop various Functions and Files in MATLAB Programming.
CO4: Develop MATLAB programming techniques using logical and conditional
operators.
CO5: Solve Linear Equations using MATLAB.

348 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)

B.Tech VI SEM L T P C
4 0 0 4
( EC20AMI604 ) EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN
(Minor)
UNIT-I:
Embedded Systems Basics:
Introduction to Embedded systems, Examples of embedded systems, Typical
Hardware, Gates, Timing Diagrams, Memory, Microprocessors, Buses, Direct Memory
Access, Interrupts, Microprocessor Architecture, and Interrupt Basics.

UNIT-II:
8051 Architecture:
Introduction, 8051 Micro controller Hardware, Input/output Pin Ports and Circuits,
External Memory, Serial data Input/output, Interrupts.

UNIT-III:
Basic Assembly Language Programming Concepts:
The Assembly Language Programming Process, Programming Tools and Techniques,
Programming the 8051.

UNIT-IV:
Moving Data:
Introduction, Addressing Modes, External Data Moves, Code Memory Read Only Data
Moves, Push and Pop Opcodes, Data Exchanges.
Basic Design Using a Real-Time Operating System:
Message Queues, Mailboxes and Pipes, Timer Functions, Events, Memory
Management, Interrupt Routines in an RTOS Environment.

UNIT-V:
Applications:
Introduction, keyboards, Human Factor, Key Switch Factors, Keyboard
Configurations, Displays, Seven-Segment Numeric Display, D/A and A/D
Conversions.
349 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Embedded Software Development Tools:
Host and Target machines, Linker/Locators for Embedded Software, Getting
Embedded Software into the Target System; Debugging Techniques: Testing on Host
Machine, Using Laboratory Tools, An Example System.

Text Books:
1. An Embedded Software Primer, David E. Simon, Pearson Education.
2. The 8051 Microcontroller, Third Edition, Kenneth J.Ayala, Thomson.
References:
1. 8051 Microcontrollers, Satish Shah, Oxford Higher Education.
2. Embedded Microcomputer Systems Real Time Interfacing, Jonathan W. Valvano,
Cengage Learning.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Understand the microprocessor architecture and its components used in
embedded systems.
CO2: Write the 8051 assembly language code for specific purposes.
CO3: Implement code for interfacing various devices.
CO4: Develop simple embedded systems for real time operations.
CO5: Compose simple embedded system with error free software to obtain target
system.

350 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VI Sem L T P C
4 0 0 4

( EC20AMI605 ) INTRODUCTION TO CMOS VLSI DESIGN

(Minor)

Course Objectives:
1. Learn about the various MOSFET models.
2. Learn about the implementation of logic functions using CMOS.
3. Study the design principles involved in the design of Combinational circuits.
4. Study the design principles involved in the design of Sequential circuits.
5. Learn about the Testing concepts in VLSI Chip design.

UNIT 1
MOS Transistor Theory: Introduction, Long-Channel I-V Characteristics and C-V
Characteristics, Simple MOS Capacitance Models, Detailed MOS Gate Capacitance Model,
Detailed MOS Diffusion Capacitance Model, Non-deal I-V Effects, Mobility Degradation and
Velocity Saturation, Channel Length Modulation, Threshold Voltage Effects, Leakage,
Temperature Dependence and Geometry Dependence.

UNIT II
CMOS Logic and Fabrication: CMOS Logic - The Inverter, The NAND Gate, CMOS Logic
Gates, The NOR Gate, Compound Gates, Pass Transistors and Transmission Gates, Tristates,
Multiplexers, and Sequential Circuits.
CMOS Fabrication-Inverter Cross-Section and Fabrication Process.

UNIT III
Combinational circuit design: Introduction, Circuit Families- Static CMOS, Ratioed
Circuits, Cascode Voltage Switch Logic, Dynamic Circuits and Pass-Transistor Circuits.

UNIT IV
Sequential circuit design: Circuit Design of Latches and Flip-Flops, Conventional CMOS
Latches, Conventional CMOS Flip-Flops, Pulsed Latches, Resettable Latches and Flip-Flops,
Enabled Latches and Flip-Flops, Incorporating Logic into Latches, Klass Semi-dynamic Flip-

351 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 Flop (SDFF), Differential Flip-Flops, Dual Edge-Triggered Flip-Flops, Radiation-Hardened Flip-
Flops, True Single-Phase-Clock (TSPC) Latches and Flip-Flops.

UNIT V
Testing and Verification: Introduction- Logic Verification and Manufacturing Tests , Testers
and Test Fixtures, Test Programs, and Handlers, Test Vectors, Test benches and Harnesses
and Regression Testing.
Manufacturing Test Principles- Fault Models, Observability, Controllability, Repeatability,
Survivability, Fault Coverage, Automatic Test Pattern Generation and Delay Fault Testing.
Design for Testability: Ad Hoc Testing, Scan Design, Built-In Self-Test (BIST) and IDDQ
Testing.

Text Books:
1. Neil H. E. Weste & D.M.Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design-A Circuits and Systems Perspective”,
Fourth edition, Pearson Edition, 2020.
2. K.Eshraghian, D.A. Pucknell and S.Eshraghian, “Essentials of VLSI Circuits and Systems”,
Third Edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2019.
References:
1. Mead, C.A and Conway, L.A., “Introduction to VLSI Systems”, Addison –Wesley, USA,
1980.
2. W.Wolf “Modern VLSI Design IP based design” Fourth edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2020.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Summarize the modeling effects of MOSFET.
CO2: Implement various logic functions using CMOS logic.
CO3: Design CMOS based Switching circuits.
CO4: Design CMOS based Flip-flops.
CO5: Develop algorithms for automatic test generation for combinational and sequential
circuits.

352 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B.Tech VII SEM L T P C
4 0 0 4

(EC20AMI501) AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS

(Minor)

UNIT-I:
Fundamentals of Automotive Electronics
Components for electronic engine management system, open and closed loop control
strategies, PID control, Lookup tables, introduction to modern control strategies like
Fuzzy logic and adaptive control. Parameters to be controlled in SI and CI engines.

UNIT-II:
Sensors & Actuators
Hall Effect, hot wire, thermistor, piezo electric, piezoresistive, based sensors.
Introduction, basic sensor arrangement, types of sensors, oxygen concentration
sensor, lambda sensor, crankshaft angular position sensor, cam position sensor,
Mass air flow (MAF) rate, Manifold absolute pressure (MAP), Throttle plate angular
position, engine oil pressure sensor, vehicle speed sensor, stepper motors, relays,
detonation sensor and emission sensors.

UNIT-III:
Digital Engine Control System
Open loop and close loop control system, engine cooling and warm up control, idle
speed control, acceleration and full load enrichment, deceleration fuel cutoff. Fuel
control maps, open loop control of fuel injection and closed loop lambda control
exhaust emission control, on-board diagnostics, diagnostics, future automotive
electronic systems, Electronic dash board instruments – Onboard diagnosis system.

UNIT-IV:
SI Engine Management
Feedback carburetor system, throttle body injection and multi point fuel injection
system, injection system controls, advantage of electronic ignition systems, three
way catalytic converter, conversion efficiency versus lambda. Working of the fuel

353 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 system components. Advantages of electronic ignition systems. Types of solid state
ignition systems and their principle of operation, Contactless electronic ignition
system and Electronic spark timing control.

UNIT-V:
CI Engine Management
Fuel injection system, parameters affecting combustion, noise and emissions in CI
engines. Pilot, main, advanced, post injection and retarded post injection. Working of
components like fuel injector, fuel pump, rail pressure limiter, flow limiter, EGR valve
control in electronically controlled systems.

Text Books:
1. Automobile Electrical & Electronic Equipments - Young, Griffitns - Butterworths,
London.
2. Understanding Automotive Electronics, Wiliam B. Ribbens, 5th Edition, Newnes,
Butterworth–Heinemann.

References:
1. Fundamentals of Automotive Electronics - V.A.W.Hilliers - Hatchin, London.
2. Automotive Computer & Control System – Tomwather J. R., Cland Hunter, Prentice
Inc. NJ.

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Acquire an overview of automotive components, subsystems, and basics of
Electronic Engine Control in today’s automotive industry.
CO2: Gain fundamental knowledge to develop electronic controls for automotive
subsystems.
CO3: Use available automotive sensors and actuators while interfacing with
microcontrollers / microprocessors during automotive system design.
CO4: Understand the networking of various modules in automotive systems,
communication protocols and diagnostics of the sub systems.
CO5: Design and implement the electronics that attribute the reliability, safety, and
smartness to the automobiles, providing add-on comforts and get fair idea on
future Automotive Electronic Systems.

354 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(Autonomous)
B. Tech- VII SEM L T P C
4 0 0 4
(EC20AMI702) INTRODUCTION TO IoT
(Minor)

Course Objectives:
1. Study about the genesis and impact of IoT applications, architectures in real world.
2. Learn about the diverse methods of deploying smart objects and connect them to
network.
3. Study different Application protocols for IoT.
4. Study the role of Data Analytics and Security in IoT.
5. Learn about the sensor technologies for sensing real world entities and understand the
role of IoT in various domains of Industry

UNIT 1
What is IoT, Genesis of IoT, IoT and Digitization, IoT Impact, Convergence of IT and IoT, IoT
Challenges, IoT Network Architecture and Design, Drivers Behind New Network
Architectures, Comparing IoT Architectures, A Simplified IoT Architecture, The Core IoT
Functional Stack, IoT Data Management and Compute Stack.

UNIT II
Smart Objects- The “Things” in IoT, Sensors, Actuators, and Smart Objects, Sensor
Networks, Connecting Smart Objects, Communications Criteria, IoT Access Technologies.

UNIT III
IP as the IoT Network Layer, The Business Case for IP, The need for Optimization, Optimizing
IP for IoT, Profiles and Compliances, Application Protocols for IoT, The Transport Layer, IoT
Application Transport Methods.

UNIT IV
Data and Analytics for IoT, An Introduction to Data Analytics for IoT, Machine Learning, Big
Data Analytics Tools and Technology, Edge Streaming Analytics, Network Analytics, Securing
IoT, A Brief History of OT Security, Common Challenges in OT Security, How IT and OT
Security Practices and Systems Vary, Formal Risk Analysis Structures: OCTAVE and FAIR,
The Phased Application of Security in an Operational Environment.

355 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in
 UNIT V
IoT Physical Devices and Endpoints - Arduino UNO: Introduction to Arduino, Arduino UNO,
Installing the Software, Fundamentals of Arduino Programming. IoT Physical Devices and
Endpoints - RaspberryPi: Introduction to RaspberryPi, About the RaspberryPi Board:
Hardware Layout, Operating Systems on RaspberryPi, Configuring RaspberryPi, Programming
RaspberryPi with Python, Wireless Temperature Monitoring System Using RaspberryPi Pi,
DS18B20 Temperature Sensor, Connecting Raspberry Pi via SSH, Accessing Temperature
from DS18B20 sensors, Remote access to RaspberryPi, Smart and Connected Cities, An IoT
Strategy for Smarter Cities, Smart City IoT Architecture. Smart City Security Architecture,
Smart City Use-Case Examples.

Textbooks:
1. David Hanes, Gonzalo Salgueiro, Patrick Grossetete, Robert Barton, Jerome Henry, "IoT
Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols, and Use Cases for the Internet of
Things”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education (Cisco Press Indian Reprint). (ISBN: 978-
9386873743)
2. Srinivasa K G, “Internet of Things”,CENGAGE Leaning India, 2017.
References:
1. Vijay Madisetti and Arshdeep Bahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on-Approach)”, 1st
Edition, VPT, 2014. (ISBN: 978-8173719547)
2. Raj Kamal, “Internet of Things: Architecture and Design Principles”, 1st Edition,
McGraw Hill Education, 2017. (ISBN: 978-9352605224)

Course Outcomes:
CO1: Interpret the impact and challenges posed by IoT networks leading to new
architectural models.
CO2: Compare and contrast the deployment of smart objects and the technologies to
connect them to network.
CO3: Appraise the role of IoT protocols for efficient network communication.
CO4: Elaborate the need for Data Analytics and Security in IoT.
CO5: Illustrate different sensor technologies for sensing real world entities and identify the
applications of IoT in Industry.

356 | P a g e www.svce.edu.in